SlideShare a Scribd company logo
General
Helpful Links
This sections contains a list of useful websites and references. Some of the links require an HP Passport account.
ALM Supported Environments
Integrations Matrix ALM 12.00
HP Software Support Online
HP ALM Resources Site
ALM Functionality by Edition
HP Application Lifecycle Management is also available in several editions which provide subsets of
ALM functionality—HP ALM Essentials Edition, HP Quality Center Enterprise Edition, and HP
ALM Performance Center Edition.
HP ALM Edition Description
HP ALM A unified platform for managing and automating processes, activities, and
assets for building, testing, delivering, and maintaining applications. It
includes modules for requirements, test, defect, and development
management, and overall release and project planning. HP ALM helps
organizations drive consistent processes, shared best-practices, and asset
sharing across projects.
HP ALM
Essentials
Edition
Provides a subset of HP ALM product functionality, and is designed to help
smaller teams get up and running quickly. It provides core functionality for
requirements management, test management, and defect management.
HP Quality
Center
Enterprise
Edition
Resides on the same unified platform as HP ALM. It delivers core
functionality for quality management. It supports building a quality center of
excellence through tight integrations with HP Unified Functional Testing,
HP Business Process Testing, and HP Sprinter.
HP
ALMPerformance
Center Edition
Functionality for the complete management, scheduling, running, and
monitoring of performance test scripts. It resides on the same platform as
HP ALM and integrates directly with HP ALM and HP LoadRunner.
The following table indicates the availability of ALM functionality according to edition. Further
information on each function is provided below.
Functionality HP ALM Edition
HP ALM
Essentials
Edition
HP Quality
Center
Enterprise
Edition
HP ALM
Performance
Center
Edition
"Licensing" on
page 4
"Release
Management"
on page 4
"Project
Planning and
Tracking (PPT)
Releases" on
page 5
HP ALM (12.00) Page 2 of 154
Functionality HP ALM Edition
HP ALM
Essentials
Edition
HP Quality
Center
Enterprise
Edition
HP ALM
Performance
Center
Edition
"Multiple
Requirement
Types" on page
5
"Requirement
to Requirement
Traceability" on
page 5
"Risk-Based
Quality
Management"
on page 5
"Business
Models
Module" on
page 5
"Test Authoring
and Execution"
on page 5
(partial)
"Test
Resources" on
page 5
"Test
Configurations"
on page 5
"HP Sprinter"
on page 5
"Lab
Management"
on page 5
"Automatic
Provisioning of
Cloud Test
Hosts" on page
6
HP ALM Docs on Tap
General
HP ALM (12.00) Page 3 of 154
Functionality HP ALM Edition
HP ALM
Essentials
Edition
HP Quality
Center
Enterprise
Edition
HP ALM
Performance
Center
Edition
"Versioning"
on page 6
"Baselining" on
page 6
"Sharing
Requirements
and Tests" on
page 6
"Sharing
Defects" on
page 6
"Cross Project
Customization"
on page 6
"Cross Project
Reporting" on
page 6
"Export Data to
Excel" on page
6
"Business
Process
Testing" on
page 6
"Extensions"
on page 7 (partial) (partial) (partial)
"Upgrading
Editions" on
page 7
--
Licensing
ALM licensing is determined according to your purchase agreement. The site administrator can
manage and monitor the license usage from Site Administration. For more details, see the HP
Application Lifecycle Management Administrator Guide.
Release Management
You organize and track your upcoming releases in the Releases module. Performance Center
HP ALM Docs on Tap
General
HP ALM (12.00) Page 4 of 154
Edition does not support release management. If you are working with Performance Center Edition,
fields and commands related to cycles and releases are not available. For example, Target Cycle
and Target Release are not available.
Project Planning and Tracking (PPT) Releases
ALM project planning and tracking (PPT) functionality enables quality assurance managers to track
application readiness by defining goals for activities of an application release. PPT is available for
ALM Edition only.
Multiple Requirement Types
You can assign each requirement in the Requirements module to a default ALM requirement type.
In addition, you can customize the default types and create your own requirement types.
Requirement to Requirement Traceability
Requirements traceability defines a relationship between two or more requirements, assisting you
when analyzing the impact of a change proposed in a specific requirement.
Risk-Based Quality Management
The risk-based quality management feature enables you to calculate at which level to test each
requirement, based on the nature of the requirement and the resources you have available. In the
ALM Essentials Edition, the Risk tab is unavailable in the Requirements module. In addition, any
risk related fields are unavailable.
Business Models Module
The Business Models module enables you to import business process models from standard
modeling tools, and test their quality in ALM. The Business Models module is not available in ALM
Essentials Edition or Performance Center Edition.
Test Authoring and Execution
You can build test plans and design tests based on your project requirements, and then execute
those tests to diagnose and resolve problems. ALM Performance Center Edition supports
performance testing only.
Test Resources
The Test Resources module enables you to manage resources used by your tests.
Test Configurations
Test configurations enable testing of various use-cases, each time with a different set of data.
HP Sprinter
HP Sprinter provides enhanced manual testing functionality and a variety of tools to assist in the
manual testing process. Sprinter is available for ALM Edition and Quality Center Enterprise Edition.
Lab Management
Lab Management allows users to manage the lab resources and systems they use for functional
and performance testing in ALM. Lab Management is available for functional and performance
testing with ALM Edition and for performance testing with Performance Center Edition.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
General
HP ALM (12.00) Page 5 of 154
For more details, refer to the HP ALM Lab Management Guide.
Automatic Provisioning of Cloud Test Hosts
Cloud provisioning is currently available only for provisioning of load generators.
For more details, refer to the HP ALM Lab Management Guide.
Versioning
Version control enables you to create and manage ALM entities while maintaining previous versions
of those entities. ALM Essentials Edition does not support single entity versioning of your ALM
projects.
Baselining
You can create a baseline to store a snapshot of multiple entities in your project, at a specific point
in time. ALM Essentials Edition does not support baselining.
Sharing Requirements and Tests
The Libraries module enables you to create and compare baselines of requirements, tests, test
resources, and business components. You can also reuse an existing set of entities by importing,
synchronizing and comparing libraries across multiple projects.
Quality Center Enterprise Edition: You can use the Libraries module to create and compare
baselines in a project. Quality Center Enterprise Edition does not include importing, synchronizing
and comparing libraries across multiple projects.
Sharing Defects
You can share and synchronize defects across multiple ALM projects using the HP ALM
Synchronizer. Defect sharing is available for ALM Edition only.
For more details, see the HP ALM Synchronizer User Guide, available from the HP Application
Lifecycle Management Adds-ins page.
Cross Project Customization
Cross project customization enables you to work with template projects to standardize policies and
procedures across projects in your organization. Cross project customization is not available for
Quality Center Enterprise Edition.
For more details, see the HP Application Lifecycle Management Administrator Guide.
Cross Project Reporting
When you create graphs in ALM, you can combine and compare data from multiple projects. Cross
project reporting is unavailable for some entities. Cross project reporting is not available for Quality
Center Enterprise Edition.
Export Data to Excel
All editions enable exporting ALM data to Excel for reporting. Exporting functionality is unavailable
for some entities.
Business Process Testing
Business Process Testing enables non-technical subject matter experts to build and work with
HP ALM Docs on Tap
General
HP ALM (12.00) Page 6 of 154
business components in a script-free environment and to create application-quality business
process tests. Business Process Testing is not available for ALM Essentials Edition or
Performance Center Edition.
Each user with the proper permissions who logs into an ALM server with a Business Process
Testing license uses up both a Business Process Testing license and an ALM license.
Note: You can run test sets containing business process tests in the Test Lab module and you
can also edit automated components in Unified Functional Testing, even if no Business
Process Testing license is available in ALM.
For more information on Business Process Testing, refer to the HP Business Process Testing User
Guide.
Extensions
ALM extensions provide added functionality to ALM. Various extensions are available, depending
on the edition with which you are working. If you have a license for an ALM extension, you can
utilize the added functionality by enabling the extension on a per project basis. For more details on
enabling extensions, refer to the HP Application Lifecycle Management Administrator Guide.
To view the list of extensions available with ALM 12.00 or to download documentation for the
extensions, access the HP ALM Add-ins Page. You can access the Add-ins page in ALM from
Help > Add-ins.
Upgrading Editions
You can upgrade your current edition to another edition. For example, you can upgrade from HP
ALM Essentials Edition 12.00 to HP ALM Edition 12.00.
For more information on upgrading, refer to the HP Application Lifecycle Management Installation
and Upgrade Guide.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
General
HP ALM (12.00) Page 7 of 154
System Requirements
ALM Server-Side System Requirements
This section includes the server-side system requirements and configurations for installing HP ALM
12.00 on Windows and Linux.
ALM Server-Side Hardware Requirements
The following table includes hardware requirements for installing ALM on a server machine.
CPU Windows: Quad Core AMD64 processor or equivalent x86-compatible
processor
Linux: Quad Core AMD 64 bit or equivalent x86 compatible processor
Memory (RAM) Minimum: 8 GB
Free disk
Space
Minimum: 8 GB
Recommended ALM Server-Side Environments
The following table includes recommended configurations for each operating system.
Operating System Database Server Web
Server
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
Enterprise SP1 64 Bit
Microsoft SQL Server 2008
R2 SP2
Microsoft
IIS 7.5
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.4 64 Bit Oracle 11.2.0.3 Apache 2.2
Supported ALM Server-Side Configurations
The following applications are supported for installing ALM on a server machine. You may use any
combination of these applications. To ensure best performance and quick support resolutions, we
recommend using the recommended environments described in the section "System Requirements
" above.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
General
HP ALM (12.00) Page 8 of 154
Operating
Systems
l Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise SP1 64 Bit
l Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Standard 64 Bit
l Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.3 64 Bit
l Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.4 64 Bit
l Oracle Enterprise Linux 6.3 64 Bit
l Oracle Enterprise Linux 6.4 64 Bit
l SUSE Linux 11.0
Note:
l It is strongly recommended that ALM be deployed only on 64 bit systems
in Windows production environments.
l Localized editions of ALM are supported only on Windows operating
systems.
l Oracle Enterprise Linux versions are supported provided they are
compatible with the supported versions of Red Hat Linux.
Database
Servers
l Oracle 10.2.0.5
l Oracle 11.2.0.3
l Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 SP2
l Microsoft SQL Server 2012 SP1
Note:
l All database servers, unless otherwise stated, have been validated on 64
bit configurations.
l HP ALM is certified to work with Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) for
Microsoft and Oracle databases. Implementation of TDE does have an
impact on system performance, for details reach out to the database
vendor providing encryption.
Applications
Servers
The Application server functionality is now built in to the ALM platform and
there is no need to install a third party application server (WebLogic,
WebSphere, and JBoss) from version 11.50 and later. The HP ALM
application server uses JDK7 (1.7) and supports 64 bit JVM.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
General
HP ALM (12.00) Page 9 of 154
Web Servers l Apache 2.2
l Microsoft IIS 7.5
l Microsoft IIS 8.0
Note:
l By default, application servers include HTTP servers. If you need
additional functionality a web server can be added.
l HP will certify the major and minor releases of Apache (e.g. Apache 2.2)
while all minor-minor releases of Apache (e.g. version 2.2.x) will not
undergo specific certifications as it is expected that minor-minor software
releases from Apache will maintain full compatibility.
Virtual
Environments
VMWare ESX/ESXi Server 5.0 and later
Note:
HP ALM is certified to work with VMWare ESX/ESXi. Due to the rapidly
evolving architectures provided by virtualization vendors as long as the
above stated vendor guarantees full compatibility of the virtualized
environment to the HP ALM approved system requirements for physical
hardware, HP ALM will function as designed.
Full Disk
Encryption
Full disk encryption (FDE) is supported for all system components, including
database, server, repository server, and client machines. Implementation of
FDE, does have an impact on system performance. For details, contact the
vendor that provides the encryption.
ALM Client System Requirements
This section describes the client system requirements for installing ALM on client machines.
CPU Dual Core 1.6 Ghz (or higher) or equivalent compatible
Memory (RAM) Minimum: 2 GB
Free Disk Space Minimum: 2 GB
HP ALM Docs on Tap
General
HP ALM (12.00) Page 10 of 154
Recommended ALM Client Environments
The following section includes recommended configurations for each operating system.
Operating System Browsers Office Suites
Microsoft Windows 7 SP1 32
Bit
Microsoft Internet Explorer
10
Microsoft Office 2010 SP2 32
Bit
ALM Desktop Client Supported Environments
This section describes the ALM desktop client supported environments.
Prerequisites l Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 / Microsoft .NET
Framework 4.5
l Microsoft Office 2010 / Microsoft Office 2013
Operating
System
l Microsoft Windows 7 SP1 32 Bit
l Microsoft Windows 7 SP1 64 Bit
l Microsoft Windows 8 32 Bit (Requires Microsoft Fix
449677. For more details, see
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/2870007.
l Microsoft Windows 8 64 Bit (Requires Microsoft Fix
449677. For more details, see
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/2870007.
l Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 64 Bit
Note:
l If you are integrating Quality Center with other HP
testing tools, you must modify the DCOM permissions
on your client machine.
l DCOM is not required for running Functional test sets
(server-side execution).
l Functional test sets are available only in ALM Edition.
l HP ALM Client on Windows 64 bit runs in WOW64
mode.
l You can work with the HP ALM desktop client using a
remote desktop.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
General
HP ALM (12.00) Page 11 of 154
Browsers l Microsoft Internet Explorer 8
l Microsoft Internet Explorer 9
l Microsoft Internet Explorer 10
Note: For customers who have restrictions on plugins in
their browsers, such as ActiveX, HP ALM can be loaded in
the HP ALM Explorer Add-In. For more information on
downloading and installing the Add-In, see the HP
Application Lifecycle Management Installation and
Upgrade Guide.
Office Suites l Microsoft Office 2010 SP2 32 Bit
l Microsoft Office 2013 32 Bit
Note: Only 32 bit versions of Microsoft Office are
supported.
Virtual
Environments
l Citrix XenApp 6.0 or higher
l Microsoft Terminal Services
l Remote Desktop Services
Note: HP ALM is certified to work with Citrix XenApp,
Microsoft Terminal Services and Remote Desktop
Services. Due to the rapidly evolving architectures
provided by Virtualization vendors as long as the above
stated vendor guarantees full compatibility of the
virtualized environment to the HP ALM approved system
requirements for physical hardware, then HP ALM will
function as designed.
Other
Configuration
Settings
l Screen Resolution (Minimum): 1024x768
l DPI Setting: 100%
HP ALM Docs on Tap
General
HP ALM (12.00) Page 12 of 154
ALM Web Client Supported Environments
This section describes the ALM Web client supported environments.
Operating
System
l Microsoft Windows 7 SP1 32 Bit
l Microsoft Windows 7 SP1 64 Bit
l Microsoft Windows 8 32 Bit
l Microsoft Windows 8 64 Bit
l Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.3 64 Bit
l Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.4 64 Bit
l Oracle Enterprise Linux 6.3 64 Bit
l Oracle Enterprise Linux 6.4 64 Bit
l Ubuntu 12.04 LTS
l Apple Mac OS X (On Macbook Pro only)
Browsers l Microsoft Internet Explorer 10 (On Microsoft Windows
only)
l Google Chrome 31 (On Microsoft Windows and Apple
Mac OS only)
l Mozilla Firefox 26 (On Microsoft Windows, Linux OS
only)
l Apple Safari 6.1 (On Mac OS only)
Virtual
Environments
l Citrix XenApp 6.0 or higher
l Microsoft Terminal Services
l Remote Desktop Services
Note: HP ALM is certified to work with Citrix XenApp,
Microsoft Terminal Services and Remote Desktop
Services. Due to the rapidly evolving architectures
provided by Virtualization vendors as long as the above
stated vendor guarantees full compatibility of the
virtualized environment to the HP ALM approved system
requirements for physical hardware, then HP ALM will
function as designed
HP ALM Docs on Tap
General
HP ALM (12.00) Page 13 of 154
Other
Configuration
Settings
l Screen Resolution: 1024x768 (minimum); 1600x1050
(maximum)
l DPI Setting: 100%,125%
HP ALM Lab Service for Remote Test Execution System
Requirements
This section describes the system requirements for installing HP ALM Lab Service for remote test
execution.
Processor CPU Type: Intel Core, Pentium, AMD or compatible
Speed: 2 GHz or higher recommended, 1 GHz minimum
Memory (RAM) Minimum: 1GB
Note: Memory needs depend on the number of add-ins.
Disk Space Minimum: 1GB
Note: You must also have an additional 120 MB of free
space on the system disk.
Operating System l Windows Server 2008 (SP2) 32 or 64 bit
l Windows Server 2008 R2 (SP1) 64 bit
l Windows 7 (SP1) 32 or 64 bit
l Windows 8 32 or 64 bit
l Windows Server 2012 64 bit
Operating Systems
Supporting Auto Login
l Windows 7 (SP1) 32 or 64 bit
l Windows Server 2008 R2 (SP1) 64 bit
HP ALM Performance Center System Requirements
This section describes the system requirements for installing ALM for Performance Center, and
Performance Center components.
Performance Center Server Configurations
HP ALM Docs on Tap
General
HP ALM (12.00) Page 14 of 154
This section describes the system requirements for installing a Performance Center Server.
Processor CPU Type:: Intel Core, Pentium, Xeon, AMD or compatible
Speed: 2 GHz or higher recommended, 1 GHz minimum.
Memory (RAM) Minimum: 4GB
Available Hard Disk Space Minimum: 5 GB
Screen Resolution Minimum: 1024 x 768
Operating System l Windows Server 2008 R2 (SP1) 64 bit (Recommended)
l Windows Server 2012 64 bit
Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 8, 9, or 10
Web Server IIS 7.5 or 8.0
Recommended ALM and Performance Center Configurations
The following table describes the recommended configuration for Performance Center server
components. They should be used along with the recommended ALM server configurations above.
Performance Center Server Operating System Windows 2008 R2 (SP1) 64 bit
Host Operating System Windows 2008 R2 (SP1) 64 bit
Host and Windows Standalone Load Generator Configurations
This section describes the system requirements for installing a Performance Center Host and a
standalone Load Generator on Windows.
Processor CPU Type: Intel Core, Pentium, Xeon, AMD or compatible
Speed:1.6 GHz minimum. 2 GHz or higher recommended
Note for Pentium Processors: Intel Hyper-Threading technology is not
supported. Hyper-Threading can be disabled in the BIOS. For more information,
see: http://www.intel.com/support/processors/pentium4/sb/CS-017371.htm
Memory
(RAM)
Recommended: 4 GB or higher
Minimum: 2GB
HP ALM Docs on Tap
General
HP ALM (12.00) Page 15 of 154
Available
Hard Disk
Space
Minimum: 40 GB
Screen
Resolution
Minimum: 1024 x 768
Operating
System
l Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit
l Windows 7 SP1 32 and 64-bit
l Windows 8 64-bit
l Windows Server 2012 64 bit
Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 8, 9 or 10
Linux Standalone Load Generator Configurations
This section describes the supported operating systems and CPU types for installing a standalone
Load Generator on Linux systems.
Processor CPU Type: Intel Core, Pentium, Xeon, AMD or compatible
Operating
System
l Red Hat Linux Enterprise Linux 5.8 or 6.0, 32 bit
l Red Hat Linux Enterprise Linux 5.8 or 6.4, 64 bit
l Ubuntu Server 10.04LTS, 32 or 64 bit
l Ubuntu Server 12.04LTS, 32 or 64 bit
l Oracle Enterprise Linux 5.0 RH, 32 or 64 bit
l Oracle Enterprise Linux 6.0 RH, 6.0UEK, 32 bit
l Oracle Enterprise Linux 6.0 RH, 6.4UEK, 64 bit
l Amazon Linux AMI 2012.03 or later, 32 or 64 bit
Note: Oracle Enterprise Linux versions are supported as long as they are
compatible with the supported versions of Red Hat Linux.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
General
HP ALM (12.00) Page 16 of 154
Standalone VuGen and Standalone Analysis Configurations
This section describes the system requirements for installing Standalone VuGen and Standalone
Analysis.
Processor CPU Type: Intel Core, Pentium, Xeon, AMD or compatible
Speed:2 GHz or higher recommended, 1.6 GHz minimum.
Memory (RAM) Recommended: 4 GB or higher
Minimum: 2GB
Available Hard Disk Space Minimum:40 GB
Screen Resolution Minimum: 1024 x 768
Operating System l Windows 7 (SP1) 32 and 64-bit
l Windows Server 2008 R2 (SP1) 64 bit
l Windows 8 64 bit
l Windows Server 2012 64 bit (On Standalone Analysis
only)
Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 8, 9, or 10
MI Listener System Requirements
This following table describes the system requirements for the MI Listener.
Processor CPU Type: Intel Core, Pentium, Xeon, AMD or compatible
Speed: 2 GHz minimum, 4 GHz or higher recommended
Memory
(RAM)
Minimum: 2GB
Note:Memory needs depend on the number of Load Generators and
Controllers connected to the MI Listener.
Operating
System
l Windows Server 2008 R2 (SP1) 64 bit
l Windows 7 (SP1) 32 and 64-bit
l Windows 8 64-bit
l Windows Server 2012 64 bit
HP ALM Docs on Tap
General
HP ALM (12.00) Page 17 of 154
Administration
Default ALM Parameters
You can set the following default site configuration parameters:
Parameter Description
ADD_NEW_
USERS_FROM_
PROJECT
(formerly
CUSTOM_
ENABLE_
USER_
ADMIN)
If this parameter is set to N, you can add new ALM users from Site
Administration (Site Users tab) only.
If this parameter is set to Y (default), new ALM users can also be
added from Project Customization. In the Project Users page, click
Add User. The Add User to Project dialog box opens.
If this parameter is set to Y, a New button is available for adding new
ALM users.
ATTACH_
MAX_SIZE
The maximum size (in kilobytes) of an attachment that can be sent
with email from ALM. If the attachment size is greater than the
specified value, the email is sent without the attachment. By default,
the maximum email attachment size is 3,000 KB.
ATTACH_
TOTAL_
MAX_SIZE
The maximum size (in kilobytes) of all attachments that can be sent
with email from ALM, taking into account the value of "ATTACH_
MAX_SIZE" above. If the size of all the attachments is greater than
the specified value, the email is sent without the attachments. By
default, the maximum email attachment size is 10,000 KB.
AUTO_MAIL_
WITH_
ATTACHMENT
(formerly
SAQ_MAIL_
WITH_
ATTACHMENT)
If this parameter is set to Y (default), defect email is sent with
attachments. This applies only if you select Send mail automatically
in the Site Projects tab.
Note: The former parameter name is supported for purposes of
backward compatibility.
AUTO_MAIL_
WITH_
HISTORY
(formerly
SAQ_MAIL_
WITH_
HISTORY)
If this parameter is set to Y (default), defect email is sent with the
history. This applies only if you select Send mail automatically in the
Site Projects tab.
Note: The former parameter name is supported for purposes of
backward compatibility.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 18 of 154
Parameter Description
BASE_
REPOSITORY_
PATH
The base repository path. The ALM and Site Administration
repositories are sub-folders of this repository. If you change this
parameter value, new projects you create are stored in this location.
After you change the value of this parameter, you must restart all
servers in the cluster. The initial repository path is set during ALM
server configuration.
COMMUNICATION_
SECURITY_
PASSPHRASE
Communication between HP ALM and other HP BTO applications is
enabled after authentication by a Single Sign-On (SSO) token through
REST API. This parameter contains the passphrase that ALM uses to
encrypt the SSO token. The initial parameter value is the SSO
communication security passphrase that was entered during the ALM
server configuration.
Changing the COMMUNICATION_SECURITY_PASSPHRASE
parameter on ALM requires that the equivalent value on other servers
will be updated as well, for example, on Performance Center server
and Host machines.
CREATE_
HTTP_
SESSION
You can use this parameter if you are working with load balancing over
a cluster of application servers. If the parameter is set to Y, ALM
creates an HTTP session. This causes the load balancer to operate in
sticky mode, meaning that after a request sent by a client is directed to
a particular node in the cluster, all subsequent requests sent by that
client are directed to the same node.
By default, this parameter is set to N.
DISABLE_
VERBOSE_
ERROR_
MESSAGES
This parameter is a security feature that controls the level of detail that
error messages display. If the parameter is set to N, the user can view
system details connected to the error.
By default, this parameter is set to Y.
EVENT_
LOG_PURGE_
PERIOD_
DAYS
Performance Center: The time interval in days that deletable events
remain in the EVENT_LOG database table.
By default, the value is set to 60. If you set the value to -1, the events
period is unlimited.
LDAP_
SEARCH_
USER_
CRITERIA
A comma-separated list of ALM user properties to be used as LDAP
search criteria, if the Domain Authentication property does not contain
the user's distinguished name (DN). The order of the properties
defines their priority if multiple results are found. The following are the
possible values: username, email, fullname, phone, description.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 19 of 154
Parameter Description
LIBRARY_
FUSE
The parameter value indicates the base number for calculating the
maximum number of entities for a library, in order to maintain optimal
performance. By default, the value is 2500.
Calculation is performed as follows:
l Maximum number of tests in a library = LIBRARY_FUSE * 1 (2500
by default)
l Maximum number of resources in a library = LIBRARY_FUSE *
0.25 (625 by default)
l Maximum number of business components in a library =
LIBRARY_FUSE * 0.25 (625 by default)
A validation of this value is performed when you create baselines,
import libraries, or synchronize libraries.
Business Process Testing: We recommend you set this parameter
to a high value, such as 300000.
For information on a related parameter, see "REQUIREMENTS_
LIBRARY_FUSE" on page 42.
LICENSE_
ARCHIVE_
PERIOD
The time interval in days during which license usage is archived.
License usage information before this period is removed from the
archive.
By default, the value is set to 365 days. If you set the value to -1, the
license archive period is unlimited.
LOCK_
TIMEOUT
The maximum number of hours that ALM objects can remain locked.
After this time, the lock is removed. By default, the value is set to 10
hours.
MAIL_
FORMAT
The format ALM uses to send email. By default, the format is set to
HTML. To instruct ALM to send email as plain text, change the value
to Text.
MAIL_
INTERVAL
The time interval in minutes for sending a defect email according to
your mail configuration settings. By default, the value is set to 10
minutes. Note that this applies only if you select Send mail
automatically in the Site Projects tab.
MAIL_
MESSAGE_
CHARSET
The character set used by ALM to send email to users. By default, the
value is set to UTF-8.
MAIL_
PROTOCOL
Displays the mail service used to send email messages to users. To
configure the mail protocol, use the Settings button.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 20 of 154
Parameter Description
MAIL_
SERVER_
HOST
Displays the server name used by the SMTP mail service. To
configure the server name, use the Settings button.
For information on a related parameter, see "MAIL_SERVER_PORT"
on page 36.
MAIL_SHOW_
SITE_NAME
Indicates whether the site name is displayed in the subject of the mail.
This parameter can be either a project parameter or a site parameter. If
the parameter is defined in both site and project tables, the project
value is considered. The default value is N.
REPORT_
QUERY_
RECORDS_
LIMIT
The maximum number of records that can be retrieved from the
database for an Excel report. If you set the value to -1, the number is
unlimited.
REPORT_
QUERY_
TIMEOUT
The maximum length of time in seconds that ALM waits for an SQL
query for an Excel report to be executed. If the query takes longer than
this time to be executed, the query is canceled.
RESTRICT_
SERVER_
FOLDERS
This parameter enables you to access restricted-access server
directories using the OTA ExtendedStorage.ServerPath property.
If this parameter does not exist, or is set to Y, you can only use the
ExtendedStorage.ServerPath property to access the following
directories:
l the Site Administration (SA) directory
l the root directory for a project
l the attach subdirectory for a project
l the baseline subdirectory for a project
l the checkouts subdirectory for a project
l the components subdirectory for a project
l the hist subdirectory for a project
l the resources subdirectory for a project
l the StyleSheets subdirectory for a project
l the tests subdirectory for a project
If this parameter is set to N, you can access all server directories
using the ExtendedStorage.ServerPath property.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 21 of 154
Parameter Description
SITE_
ANALYSIS
If this parameter is set to Y (default), you can track ALM license usage
over time from the Site Analysis tab. If this parameter is set to N, the
Site Analysis tab is unavailable.
SUPPORT_
TESTSET_
END
If this parameter is set to Y (default), UFT closes automatically when a
test set is finished running.
UPLOAD_
RESULTS_
AFTER_
TEST_RUN
Test results are, by default, saved in ALM. When running an
automated test from within ALM you can avoid saving large test
results.
Large test results might be produced when runnning UFT GUI tests,
UFT API tests, or automated business process tests.
ALWAYS. Default. Always save test results.
NEVER. Never save test results.
ON_FAILURE. Save test results if run failed.
WAIT_
BEFORE_
DISCONNECT
The time interval in minutes that the ALM client can be inactive before
it is disconnected from the ALM server machine. Disconnecting the
client enables the license to be used by another ALM user. By default,
the value is set to 600 minutes. For performance reasons, it is
recommended to set a value of at least 60 minutes. If you set the value
to -1, ALM is not disconnected, regardless of how long the client is
inactive. For more information, see "AUTO_LOGOUT_ON_
SERVER_DISCONNECT" on page 24.
Optional ALM Parameters
You can add the following optional site configuration parameters:
Parameter (A – Z) Description
ALLOW_
MULTIPLE_
VALUES
This parameter determines whether the Allow Multiple Values check
box is visible in the Project Entities page in Project Customization.
If this parameter is set to N, then the Allow Multiple Values check box
is unavailable. If this parameter does not exist or is set to "Y", then the
Allow Multiple Values check box is available.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 22 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
ALLOW_UPDATE_
USER_
PROPERTIES_
FROM_
CUSTOMIZATION
User details are set in Site Administration. A project administrator cannot
change details of project users in Project Customization.
If this parameter is set to Y, the project administrator is able to change the
details of project users in Project Customization. This option may cause a
security risk, as it allows the project administrator to replace a user's e-
mail address with his own. By doing so, the project administrator can then
use the Forgot Password link to reset and change a user's password.
If this parameter does not exist, or is set to N, only the user can change
his details in Project Customization.
ALLOW_WEBUI_
ACCESS
This parameter determines whether to allow access to Web UI client.
Access is allowed only to users who belong to at least one group with
Allow Web UI Project Access permission.
If this parameter is set to Y or is not defined, ALM can be accessed
through a web-based client user interface.
If this parameter is set to N, ALM can only be accessed through a
desktop-based client user interface.
The default is Y.
ASYNC_
MAIL_ENABLED
If this parameter is set to Y (default), emails are sent asynchronously.
This means that the email is queued to be sent, and you can continue
working. If an email is undeliverable:
l An email notification is sent to you, if the mail server is up.
l A warning is added to the Site Administration log.
If this parameter is set to N, emails are sent synchronously—meaning,
emails are sent immediately and you continue working only when the mail
is sent successfully.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 23 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
AUTO_LOGOUT_
ON_SERVER_
DISCONNECT
The ALM server can disconnect an ALM client session. This occurs if:
l The site administrator disconnects the session.
l The session is automatically disconnected, according to the inactivity
time interval setting. For more information on setting a timeout, see
"WAIT_BEFORE_DISCONNECT" on page 22.
The ALM client machine displays a message, informing the user that the
session has been disconnected.
If this parameter is set to Y, the client machine also automatically
performs logout actions and returns the user to the ALM Login window.
This ensures that the user does not continue to work in a session which is
no longer connected to the server. If this parameter is set to N, no logout
action is performed on disconnect.
Note: If this parameter is set to Y in external authentication mode,
the client machine returns the user to the ALM Connect to project
window.
AUTO_MAIL_
SUBJECT_
FORMAT
(formerly
SAQFORMAT
This parameter enables you to customize the subject line of defect email
sent automatically to users.
For example, you can define a subject line such as Defect no. 4321
has changed by providing the value Defect no. ?BG_BUG_ID has
changed , where Defect no. and has changed are strings, and BG_
BUG_ID is an ALM field name.
Note: The former parameter name is supported for purposes of
backward compatibility.
AUTO_
MAIL_USER_
NOTIFICATION
This parameter enables you to prevent ALM sending automatic email
notification to project administrators when users are assigned or removed
from a project in Site Administration.
If this parameter is set to N, then automatic notification is not sent to
project administrators. If this parameter does not exist, is empty, or is set
to Y, then automatic notification is sent.
BACKWARD_
SUPPORT_
ALL_DOMAINS_
PROJECTS
This parameter enables the use of DomainsList and ProjectsList
properties for the purposes of backward compatibility. If this parameter is
set to Y, then the DomainsList and ProjectsList properties are supported.
If the parameter does not exist or is empty, the default value is N, and
these properties are not supported.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 24 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
BV_EXCEL_
REPORT_
MAX_ROWS
This parameter defines the maximum number of rows that can be
included in a Business View Excel Report.
The default value is 100000.
CLEAN_
ORPHAN_
ANALYSIS_
DATA_
JOB_SLEEP_
INTERVAL
This parameter defines how often orphan analysis data is cleaned up off
the file repository. The data is cleaned up by the Orphan Analysis Data
File Cleanup job.
Define a value in minutes where the minimum is 10080 (one week).
The default value is 43200 (one month).
COPY_
CHANGES_
USER_FIELDS
(formerly
COPY_PASTE_
CHANGES_
OWNER)
This parameter enables you to specify that the user who copies a record
is listed in the specified User List fields of the copy.
The value of this parameter is a comma-separated list of User List fields.
For example, set the value of the parameter to BG_DETECTED_BY. Assume
defect 10 is detected by user Cecil_qc, and user Shelly_qc copies
defect 10. ALM creates a copy of the defect with Shelly_qc as the user
who detected the defect, not Cecil_qc.
CUSTOM_HELP_
MENU_LINK
This parameter enables you to add a custom entry to the Help menu that
links to a URL address. For example, if you want to allow users local
access to ALM product movies, you can save the movies on the server,
and create a link to a movies index page.
Use the following syntax to enter a parameter value: <link
alias>;<URL>, where the values of both <link alias> and <URL> are
surrounded by quotation marks, and separated by a semicolon.
For example, set the value of the parameter to "MyBusiness -
Online Help Page";"http://mybusiness/ALMHelp".
The above example adds the MyBusiness - Online Help Page
entry to the Help menu. Clicking the entry opens a custom Web page
located at http://mybusiness/ALMHelp.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 25 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
CUSTOM_
PREREQUISITES_
PAGE_URL
This parameter enables you to handle missing prerequisites during the
deployment phase of starting the ALM client.
The value of this parameter is either:
l A valid URL to a page that contains links for downloading alternate
prerequisites.
l NO_URL or blank. The deployment phase opens the default URL.
The default value is blank.
Note: Setting a separate URL for each prerequisite is not supported.
The page must contain information for all prerequisites.
DASHBOARD_
PAGE_ITEM_
LIMIT
By default, dashboard pages can include up to four graphs.
This parameter enables you to set a different number of maximum graphs
that dashboard pages can include. Increasing the number of graphs may
reduce the system's performance.
DEBUG_
CLOSURE_
LOG_DOM_PROJ
This parameter enables the creation of a server log for debugging issues
related to closure. This can be helpful when investigating missing or
redundant results of closure queries, or suspected performance related
issues.
Caution: This parameter should not be enabled unless debugging is
required by support for specific reasons. Delete this parameter if not
in use for a specific debugging purpose.
The closure log can be enabled per project, per domain, or per site. Use
one of the following formats for the parameter value:
l Per project: <domain name>;<project name>
For example, DEFAULT;project1
For more than one project in a domain, separate the projects with a
semi-colon.
For example, for two projects named project1 and project2 in the
DEFAULT domain, use: DEFAULT;project1; DEFAULT;project2
l Per domain:
<domain name>;___DEBUG_ALWAYS___ to indicate all projects in the
specified domain
For example, for the DEFAULT domain, use: DEFAULT;___DEBUG_
ALWAYS___
For more than one domain, separate the domains with a semi-colon.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 26 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
l Per site:___DEBUG_ALWAYS___;___DEBUG_ALWAYS___
to indicate all domains, and all projects in each domain
Note: The DEBUG_ALWAYS value uses three underscores as a prefix
and suffix.
The log files are saved to the location for server log files, as specified in
the Site Administration Server tab > Client Log File Settings. The log
files are not purged automatically. You must delete the closure log files
manually when the closure log is no longer required.
DISABLE_
ASYNC_
CUSTOMIZATION_
LOAD
This parameter affects customization loading by OTA.
If this parameter is set to N, customization is loaded asynchronously.
If this parameter is set to Y, customization is loaded synchronously.
The default is N.
DISABLE_
COMMAND_
INTERFACE
If this parameter is set to Y (default), only users belonging to the
TDAdmin group can use the OTA Command object.
If it is set to N, any user can use it.
If it is set to ALL, no users can use it.
DISABLE_
CONSOLE_
DEBUG_INFO
This parameter enables you to access the ALM debug info console page
(access to it is disabled by default). The console, if enabled, is accessible
using http://<qcserver>/qcbin/tdservlet?method=debuginfo or
http://<qcserver>/qcbin/debug.
If this parameter exists and is set to N, the debug info console page can
be accessed.
DISABLE_
DEFAULT_
VALUES
If this parameter is set to Y, default values for certain entities (such as
defects, tests, and test configurations) cannot be set per user per project.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 27 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
DISABLE_
EXTENDED_
STORAGE
This parameter controls user access to the OTA ExtendedStorage
object. This is a security feature that can be used to limit access to the
file system of the project.
If this parameter is set to Y (default), the ExtendedStorage object cannot
be accessed from TDConnection. Users can access the object from a
specific entity for read-only, but no changes can be made.
If it is set to N, the ExtendedStorage object can be accessed by all users,
from a specific entity or from TDConnection.
Note: This parameter can impact how certain add-ins run, such as
the HP Screen Recorder. For details, see the documentation for the
individual add-ins, available from the HP Application Lifecycle
Management Add-ins page (Help > Add-ins) or the HP Application
Lifecycle Management Tools page (Help > ALM Tools).
DISABLE_GET_
CHILDREN_
LISTS_WITH_
VERSIONING
If this parameter is set to Y, this parameter disables certain performance
enhancements that improve the speed at which various modules display
data (such as entity trees).
This parameter is relevant for version controlled projects.
The default is N.
DISABLE_HTTP_
COMPRESSION
By default, the data transferred from the ALM server to clients is
compressed to improve performance.
If this parameter exists and is set to Y, the data compression is disabled.
DISABLE_
PASSWORD_
OTA_
ENCRYPTION
By default, the OTA TDConnection.Password property is encrypted. If
this parameter exists and is set to Y, encryption for this property is
disabled.
Note: Setting this parameter has no effect on password encryption
during transport to the server machine.
DISPLAY_
LAST_USER_
INFO
This parameter enables you to add additional security to the client ALM
Login window. By default, ALM displays the last user login information
(user name, domain and project).
If this parameter is set to N, the last user login information is not saved on
the client machine and is not displayed in the ALM Login window. To
activate this parameter, you must log in to ALM, log out, and log in again.
If this parameter is set to Y or does not exist, the last user information is
displayed.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 28 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
DOWNLOAD_
REST_
ATTACHMENTS
This parameter determines whether attachments are downloaded
automatically in REST.
If the value is Y, attachments are downloaded only after the browser
prompts the user to open or save the attachment.
If the value is N, the browser downloads the attachment automatically
The default is Y.
EI_DELETE_
INTERVAL
This parameter defines the interval, in hours, between jobs that delete
execution items from the database. If an execution item was marked as
Deleted for more than 10 hours, it is deleted by the job.
The default is 10.
ENABLE_
COLUMN_
VISIBILITY_
TRACKING
This parameter defines whether fields can be made invisible in the GUI.
The available options are:
l Y. Fields can be made invisible in the GUI.
l N. Fields cannot be made invisible in the GUI
By default, the parameter is set to N.
ENABLE_
CREATE_
DOCGEN
This parameter enables or disables the Document Generator menu item in
the masthead menu.
The available options are:
l Y. Document Generator is enabled..
l N. Document Generator is disabled.
By default, the parameter is set to N.
ENABLE_
CREATE_
DOCGEN_
FAVORITE
This parameter defines whether new project documents can be added to
your favorites list.
The available options are:
l Y. Project documents can be added to the favorites list.
l N. Project documents cannot be added to the favorites list.
By default, the parameter is set to N.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 29 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
ENABLE_
CREATE_
LEGACY_
EXCEL_
REPORT
This parameter defines whether Microsoft Excel reports can be created in
the Analysis View module.
The available options are:
l Y. Reports can be created.
l N. Reports cannot be created.
The default setting is N.
ENABLE_
CREATE_
STANDARD_
REPORT
This parameter defines whether standard reports can be created in the
Analysis View module.
The available options are:
l Y. Reports can be created.
l N. Reports cannot be created. Only existing reports are available.
The default setting is N.
ENABLE_
ENTITY_
SELECTION_
TREE_REQ_
MOVE_TO
By default, the MoveTo event is not triggered when navigating up/down in
a tree. However, in Quality Center version 10.00, the MoveTo event was
triggered when navigating up/down in a Requirements tree.
For backward compatibility, this parameter enables you to define whether
the MoveTo event is triggered in when navigating up/down in a
Requirements tree.
The available options are:
l Y. The MoveTo event is triggered.
l N. The MoveTo event is not triggered.
The default setting is N.
ENABLE_JMX_
CONSOLE
By default, JMX Console is disabled. This parameter allows you to
enabled JMX Console for debugging purposes.
The available options are:
l Y. JMX Console is enabled.
l N. JMX Console is disabled.
The default setting is N.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 30 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
ENABLE_
OUTPUT_
SANITIZATION
This parameter determines whether REST output sanitization is
available.
The available options are:
l Y. REST output sanitization is enabled.
l N. REST output sanitization is disabled.
The default setting is Y.
ENABLE_
PERFORMANCE_
MONITOR_BIRT_
REPORTS
By default, QC Sense reports are disabled. This parameter allows you to
generate QC Sense reports for debugging purposes,
The available options are:
l Y. QC Sense reports are enabled.
l N. QC Sense reports are disabled.
The default setting is N.
ENABLE_XSRF_
VALIDATION
This parameter enables or disables the XSRF token validation sent from
the client on request
The available options are:
l Y. The XSRF token validation is enabled.
l N. The XSRF token validation is disabled.
The default setting is Y.
ENTITY_LINK_
HOST
This parameter enables you to set the mail server host name used in the
link to an entity when ALM mails an entity. By default, ALM uses the
default host name specified during installation. For details, see MAIL_
SERVER_PORT.
ENTITY_LINK_
PORT
This parameter enables you to set the mail server port number used in the
link to an entity when ALM mails an entity. By default, ALM uses the
default port number specified during installation.
ENTITY_LINK_
SCHEMA
This parameter enables you to set the schema used in the link to an entity
when ALM mails an entity.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 31 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
ENTITY_TABLE_
NAMES_FOR_
FIXING_UPDATE_
PERMISSIONS_
INCONSISTENCY
This parameter determines which database tables are checked by the
verifier to find potential permission inconsistencies that are then fixed by
the repairer.
Permission inconsistencies occur when a user group has permission to
modify specific fields of an entity, but does not have permission to modify
the entity itself.
EXTENDED_
MEMO_
FIELDS
This parameter extends the maximum number of memo-type user-defined
fields per entity to 15 instead of five. The default value is N. To extend the
number of memo-type fields, set the parameter to Y.
FAST_
RECONNECT_
MODE
This parameter defines options for reconnecting after a user session
expires. This parameter is not valid for external authentication, since the
user must always be certified when reconnecting. Values include:
0. Disables the reconnect option that bypasses reload of customization if
no major change has been made. Users must manually log out and log in
again when the session expires.
100 (default). Password authentication is required. The user must enter a
password to reconnect and continue working in ALM.
200. The user does not need to enter password information to reconnect
to ALM. User authentication is performed using the current password. If
the user's password has been changed since the last log in, the user
cannot reconnect. The user must log out and log in again using the new
password.
Note: If the user has been removed from the ALM Users list, the user
cannot reconnect.
FAVORITES_
DEPTH
Defines the number of most recently used favorite views displayed on the
Favorites menu. By default, ALM displays the four most recently used
views on the menu. To hide the list of recently used views completely, set
the parameter to 0.
FETCH_LIMIT To optimize performance, the maximum number of records retrieved and
displayed in ALM grids is limited. This parameter enables you to change
the default limit.
If this parameter does not exist, the maximum number of records
displayed is limited to 500.
If the value of this parameter is set to 0, all results are displayed.
For information on a related parameter, see "GROUP_FETCH_LIMIT" on
page 34.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 32 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
FILE_
EXTENSION_
BLACK_LIST_
DOWNLOAD
The value is the semicolon delimited string with the file extensions that
are not allowed to be downloaded via open attachments, REST API, or
FTP Explorer.
Note:
l Imported or restored projects are not blocked even if their
repository contains files of blocked file types.
l Projects upgraded from previous versions still contain files of
blocked file types that already exist in the repository.
l During optimized repository migration, files of blocked file types
are not blocked.
FILE_
EXTENSION_
BLACK_LIST_
UPLOAD
The value is the semicolon delimited string with the file extensions that
are not allowed to be uploaded via open attachments, extended storage,
REST API, or FTP Explorer.
Note:
l Imported or restored projects are not blocked even if their
repository contains files of blocked file types.
l Projects upgraded from previous versions still contain files of
blocked file types that already exist in the repository.
l During optimized repository migration, files of blocked file types
are not blocked.
FORCE_LOGIN_
SSL_MODE
If this parameter is set to Y, only the login process is sent over SSL
(HTTPS). All other communication is sent without SSL (using HTTP).
Note: ALM must be configured to work with SSL.
For information on a related parameter, see "LOGIN_SSL_PORT" on
page 36.
FROM_EMAIL_
ADDRESS
If a user clicks the Forgot Password link in the ALM Login window, an
email notification is sent to the user with a link to specify a new
password.
This parameter enables you to change the email address in the email
From field.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 33 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
FTP_PORT The port number of the FTP service that enables you to browse ALM
project repositories. .
Recommended values are 21 or 2121.
Note:
l Defining the parameter starts the FTP service on the specified
port.
l Reconfiguring the parameter restarts the FTP service.
l Deleting the parameter stops the FTP service.
GET_COVERAGE_
FROM_BL_FOR_
PINNED_TESTSET
This parameter enables you to get coverage from the baseline (and not
from current view) when selecting tests for a requirement to be added to a
pinned test set.
The default value is N.
GRAPH_RESULT_
LIFESPAN
When a graph is shared via the Share Analysis Item command in the
Analysis View module, the graph retrieves data from a cache. By default,
the cache information is updated every 60 minutes.
This parameter enables you to configure the frequency, in minutes, at
which the cache is updated.
The minimum value you can assign to the parameter is 5 minutes. The
maximum value is 60 minutes.
GROUP_FETCH_
LIMIT
To optimize performance, the maximum number of records retrieved and
displayed per group when a group by filter is applied to ALM grids is
limited. This parameter enables you to change the default limit.
If this parameter does not exist, the maximum number of records
displayed per group is limited to 100.
If the value of this parameter is set to 0, all results are displayed for each
group.
For information on a related parameter, see "FETCH_LIMIT" on page 32.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 34 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
INHERIT_
MODULE_
ACCESS_
TO_VIEWS
Some modules are logically connected to views in other modules. For
example, the Business Models module is related to business linkage in
the Requirements module and the Test Plan module.
Project managers can hide access to modules for certain users/groups.
This parameter indicates whether such related views should be hidden if
their "parent" modules are hidden.
Note: This parameter affects only views related to the Business
Models module.
Default: N (meaning, related views are not hidden)
INPUT_
VALIDATION_
LOGPATH
This parameter contains the input validation framework log folder location.
If the parameter is not defined, the input validation error log is created in
repository/log/InputValidation.
INPUT_
VALIDATION_
MODE
This parameter controls the input validation framework mode.
The available options are:
l OFF. No input validation is performed.
l LOG. Perform hidden validation. Do not throw exceptions but log all
errors.
l ON. Full input validation is performed.
The default setting is ON.
LAB_MAX_DB_
HANDLERS
This parameter enables you to define the maximum number of
connections to the database allowed for LAB_PROJECT.
The default value is 100.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 35 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
LDAP_IMPORT_
ATTRIBUTE_
MASK
This parameter enables you to define a regular expression that can be
used to distinguish between different values for an LDAP attribute when
importing users from an LDAP directory. When importing users, ALM
chooses a value for the attribute that matches the regular expression.
The parameter should be of the format:
<LDAP attribute name> = <regular expression>, where <LDAP
attribute name> is the name of the LDAP attribute whose value you want
to choose, and <regular expression> is a regular expression. This
regular expression should conform to the standard Java syntax for regular
expressions.
For example, a parameter value uid=^Dw+$ would choose values for
the LDAP attribute uid consisting of a non-digit followed by any number
of word characters (letters, numerals or the underscore character).
LDAP_RESULT_
SIZE_LIMIT
The maximum number of results that LDAP returns for a filtered query.
The default value is 1000.
A value less than the recommended minimum value of 100 can slow
LDAP imports and searches. A value greater than the recommended
maximum value of 10000 can cause the server to run out of memory.
LDAP_TIMEOUT
(formerly
DIRECTORY_
TIME_LIMIT_
CONSTRAINT)
The length of time, in milliseconds, that ALM waits before canceling an
LDAP operation.
The time limit on LDAP operations prevents a situation where LDAP
encounters a problem and causes ALM to wait indefinitely. The default
timeout value is 10 minutes.
LOGIN_SSL_PORT If the FORCE_LOGIN_SSL_MODE parameter exists and is set to Y, this
parameter enables you to configure the port used for SSL login. By
default, the value is 443.
For information on a related parameter, see "FORCE_LOGIN_SSL_
MODE" on page 33.
MAIL_SERVER_
PORT
The SMTP server port used by ALM to send mail. By default, the value is
set to 25.
For information on a related parameter, see "MAIL_SERVER_HOST" on
page 21.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 36 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
MAX_
CONCURRENT_
REPORTS
This parameter defines the maximum number of project reports that can
be generated concurrently.
Define any value where the minimum is 1.
Where the maximum number has been reached, and you choose to
generate an additional report, the report generation only begins once one
of the original reports finishes generating.
For example, if the maximum number is 5, and you try generate an
additional report, the sixth report only begins generating once one of the
original five concludes generating.
The default maximum is 3.
MAX_GRAPH_
RESULT_DATA_
TABLE_VOLUME
This parameter enables you to change the maximum size of the graph
results, as calculated by the number of cells in the graph's Grid View. The
size of a cell is 8 bytes.
The default maximum is 100 megabytes.
MAX_KPIS_PER_
MILESTONE
This parameter determines the maximum number of KPIs that can be
defined per milestone. The default number is 30.
MAX_
MILESTONES_
PER_RELEASE
This parameter determines the maximum number of milestones that can
be defined per release. The default number is 20.
MAX_PROJECTS_
IN_EXCEL_
REPORT
This parameter determine the maximum number of projects that can be
selected fora Business Views Excel report.
MAX_QUERY_
LENGTH
This parameter enables you to change the maximum query length
(number of letters). It includes the parameters and is valid for Oracle and
for SQL. The default value is 1000000.
Some reports are too large for the default limit query size to handle. In
such cases, this parameter should be set to 100000000.
MAX_SCOPE_
ITEMS_PER_
RELEASE
This parameter determines the maximum number of scope items that can
be defined per release. The default number is 20.
MAX_STEPS_IN_
PROJECT
This parameter limits the maximum number of steps that can be fetched
in each request, to protect the server from an Out Of Memory error.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 37 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
MAX_TEST_
INSTANCES
This parameter enables you to limit the number of test instances handled
by the server per call. The default value is 1000000.
If there is a call with more test instances than this value, an error
message will appear and the calls will be rejected causing the operation to
fail.
MAX_TESTS_IN_
TEST_SET
This parameter enables you to limit the number of tests in a test set for
copy/paste or delete functions. The default value is 20000.
If there is a test set with more tests than this value, an error message will
appear and the functions will not be performed.
MAX_
THRESHOLD_
VALUES_
PER_KPI
This parameter determines the maximum number of threshold values that
can be defined per KPI. The default number is 12.
.
NLS_SEARCH_
LOCALE
The language used by the Find Similar Defects command to tokenize
the defect summary. This parameter is needed only if the default locale on
the server does not match the language in which the defect summary is
written, in terms of whether spaces are used to separate words.
The value should be a string value that matches a language code listed in
ISO 639 (http://www.w3.org/WAI/ER/IG/ert/iso639.htm).
For example, if the default locale is English and the text is in Japanese,
which does not use spaces to separate words, set NLS_SEARCH_
LOCALE=ja.
If this parameter is not defined or is invalid, the default locale of the server
is used.
ORACLE_RAC_
SUPPORT
This parameter must be set to Y to enable RAC support on Oracle
database servers.
ORPHAN_
ANALYSIS_
DATA_
FILE_INACTIVE_
PERIOD
The parameter defines how old an analysis data file must be in order to be
considered an orphan. The file is considered to be an orphan if it's last
modified property is older than the time frame you define as part of this
parameter.
Define a value in milliseconds where the minimum is 3600000 (one hour).
The default value is 86400000 (one day).
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 38 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
OUTPUT_
SANITIZATION_
BY_CLIENT_TYPE
This parameter determines whether output sanitization is invoked by
client type.
The format is <client type name>=true/false;<client type
name>=true/false;...
The default value for any client type that is not defined scpecifically in this
site parameter is true.
PASSWORD_
RESET_DISABLE
This parameter determines whether ALM users can reset their passwords
using the Forgot Password link in the ALM Login window.
If this parameter is not defined or if the parameter is set to 'N', users can
reset their passwords using the Forgot Password link.
If LDAP authentication is enabled, you must set this parameter to 'Y'.
PASSWORD_
RESET_
ELAPSED_
TIME
If a user clicks the Forgot Password link in the ALM Login window, by
default 24 hours have to elapse before the same user can make another
password reset request.
This parameter allows you to change the length of time, in minutes, that
has to elapse before a user can make another password reset request.
PASSWORD_
RESET_SERVER
If a user clicks the Forgot Password link in the ALM Login window, an
email notification is sent to the user with a link to specify a new
password.
This parameter allows you to override the default URL, or parts of the
URL, that is embedded in the reset link.
Use one of the following syntaxes:
l <server>:<port>. Overrides both the default server and port.
l <server>. Overrides the default server.
l <port>. Overrides the default port.
PASSWORD_
RESET_VALID_
PERIOD
If a user clicks the Forgot Password link in the ALM Login window, an
email notification is sent to the user with a link to specify a new
password. By default, the link is valid for 24 hours.
This parameter allows you to change the length of time, in minutes, that
the link is valid.
PPT_KPI_
FAILURES_
PERCENTAGE_
PER_RELEASE_
FUSE
By default, if 10% or more of the KPI calculations within the release fail,
ALM aborts project planning and tracking calculations on a release and
skips to the next release in a project.
The default number is 60.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 39 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
PPT_RECENTLY_
USED_
PROJECTS_
THRESHOLD_
MINUTES
This parameter sets a threshold for controlling which projects are included
in PPT calculations. PPT calculations are not performed for projects to
which no one has logged in for the number of minutes specified
The default is 10080 minutes (7 days).
PROJECT_
SELECTION_
MAX_PROJECTS
By default, cross-project graphs can include up to six projects.
This parameter enables you to set a different number of maximum
projects that cross-project graphs can include. Increasing the number of
projects may reduce the system's performance.
QC_SENSE_
AUTHORIZATION_
DISABLED
This parameter allows you to disable the authorization check for users
that want access to QC Sense reports.
The default value is N (meaning, the authorization check is enabled).
QC_SENSE_
REPORTS_USERS
By default, only site administrator users have access to QC Sense
reports. This parameter enables you to grant permissions to additional
users who are not site administrators.
Enter user names using the following syntax:
<user1>;<user2>;<user3>
REPLACE_TITLE This parameter enables you to change the names of ALM modules across
all your projects.
Rename one or more modules by entering the following parameter value:
<original title1 [singular]>;<new title1 [singular]>;
<original title1 [plural]>;<new title1 [plural]>;
<original title2 [singular]>;<new title2 [singular]>;...
For example, if you want to change the name of the Defects module to
Bugs, and the Requirements module to Goals, enter the following:
Defect;Bug;Defects;Bugs;Requirement;Goal;
Requirements;Goals
Renaming the Releases module does not change the module name in the
following locations:
l The Releases command in the Releases module menu bar.
l The New Release Folder menu command and dialog box.
l The New Release menu command and dialog box.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 40 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
REPORT_MAX_
ALLOWED_SIZE
This parameter defines the estimated maximum number of pages that can
be included in a project report.
The default value is 1000.
Note: While a report it being generated, ALM can only estimate the
number of pages. Therefore it cannot be guaranteed that the final
generated report will not exceed this number of pages.
To leave the maximum number of pages as unlimited, set the parameter
to -1. However, this is not recommended as it may negatively impact on
your server's performance.
REPORT_
RESULTS_
LIFESPAN
When a project report is shared via the Share Analysis Item command in
the Analysis View module, the report retrieves data from a cache. By
default, the cache information is updated every 60 minutes.
This parameter enables you to configure the frequency, in minutes, at
which the cache is updated.
The minimum value you can assign to the parameter is 5 minutes. The
maximum value is 60 minutes.
REPOSITORY_
GC_
DELAY_
CANDIDATE_
TIME
This parameter enables you to create a delay between the time of the
cleaning processes of each project repository and the time the files
without references are actually deleted.
Set a value in days between 0 and 28.
If the parameter does not exist, ALM delays the deletion of obsolete files
in the file system for seven days.
REPOSITORY_
GC_
JOB_PRIORITY
The parameter determines the speed at which the repository cleanup
process is performed.
Set a value between 0 (fastest) and 10 (slowest).
If the parameter does not exist, the speed is set to 3.
REPOSITORY_
GC_
PROJECT_
CLEANUP_
INTERVAL
This parameter defines the time interval in days between cleaning
processes of each project repository.
Set a value in days between 1 and 28.
If the parameter does not exist, ALM scans project repositories once
every seven days.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 41 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
REPOSITORY_
MIGRATION_
JOB_PRIORITY
The parameter determines the speed at which files are copied from the old
to the new project repository.
Set a value between 0 (fastest) and 10 (slowest).
If the parameter does not exist, the speed is set to 3.
REQUIREMENT_
REVIEWED_
FIELD_
AUTOMATIC_
UPDATE
If this parameter is set to Y (default), then any change to a requirement
field automatically sets the Reviewed (RQ_REQ_REVIEWED) field to
Not Reviewed.
If it is set to N, then a change to a requirement field does not affect the
value of the Reviewed field.
REQUIREMENTS_
LIBRARY_FUSE
This parameter indicates the maximum number of requirements for a
library in order to maintain optimal performance.
The default value for this parameter is 3500. A validation of this value is
performed when you create baselines, import libraries, or synchronize
libraries.
For information on a related parameter, see "LIBRARY_FUSE" on page
20.
REST_API_
DEFAULT_PAGE_
SIZE
The number of entities per page returned by default with each GET
operation on a collection using the REST API (unless the API consumer
specifies a different page size for retrieval).
The default is 100 entities.
REST_API_HTTP_
CACHE_
ENABLED
This parameter enables REST API support for server side HTTP caching.
If enabled, the server supports caching using an ETag for the following
resources: 
l customization/entities
l customization/relations
l customization/used-lists
l customization/users
The default is Y.
REST_API_MAX_
BULK_SIZE
The maximum number of entities allowed for a single bulk operation. A
bulk operation over REST means to be able to POST, PUT, or DELETE a
collection of entities of the same type.
The default is 2000 entities.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 42 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
REST_API_MAX_
ENTITY_TREE_
SIZE
REST API provides a tree sub-resource for hierarchical entities. It
retrieves an entity collection sorted as an expanded tree. This parameter
limits the maximum collection size retrieved in a single request.
Note: The tree sub-resource does not support paging, and therefore
the REST_API_MAX_PAGE_SIZE parameter is not relevant.
The default is 100 entities.
Note: Higher values affect performance.
REST_API_MAX_
PAGE_SIZE
The maximum number of entities per page that can be returned with a
single GET operation on a collection using the REST API.
The default is 5000 entities.
REST_SESSION_
MAX_IDLE_TIME
This parameter sets the REST API session maximum idle time (in
minutes). The idle time is the amount of time a REST API session token
remains valid if there is no activity in the session. After this period, the
session (including the licenses and locks that it holds) expire. On the next
call, the REST API recreates a new session.
The default value is 60 minutes.
SA_MAX_DB_
HANDLERS
This parameter enables you to define the maximum number of
connections to the database allowed for the Site Administration schema.
The default value is 50. The value must be 50 or higher.
SD_RUN_
AMOUNT
The amount of runs taken into account when calculating the suggested
duration of a particular test set or build verification suite execution.
The default value for this parameter is 10.
The recommended threshold value is 100. A higher value could potentially
affect performance.
SECURED_QC_
URL
When ALM generates email, it includes a link to ALM in the email.
If this parameter is set to Y, the ALM URL uses an SSL connection
(starting with https:).
If it is set to N (default), SSL is not used.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 43 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
SEND_
EXCEPTION_
DEFAULT_TO
This parameter defines the default email address for sending an error
report in ALM.
For information on a related parameter, see "SEND_EXCEPTION_
 ENABLED" below.
For more information on sending error details, see the HP Application
Lifecycle Management User Guide.
SEND_
EXCEPTION_
ENABLED
If this parameter is set to Y, the Send Error Details option is available on
the Help menu in ALM, enabling you to send details of an error as
attachments to an email.
For information on a related parameter, see "SEND_EXCEPTION_
DEFAULT_TO" above.
SKIP_CLIENT_
PREREQUISITES_
CHECK
This parameter enables you to bypass the prerequisites check performed
in the deployment phase of starting the ALM client.
The default value is N.
Tip: For similar functionality in MSI Generator, check the Skip
Prerequisites Check checkbox.
SMTP_SSL_
SUPPORT
This parameter enables an SSL tunnel to the SMTP server.
The default value is N.
SQL_QUERY_
VALIDATION_
BLACK_LIST
By default, ALM checks that SQL queries for an Excel reports do not
include any of the following commands: INSERT, DELETE, UPDATE,
DROP, CREATE, COMMIT, ROLLBACK, ALTER, EXEC, EXECUTE,
MERGE, GRANT, REVOKE, SET, INTO, or TRUNCATE. This ensures
that you do not inadvertently modify or delete records in the project
database.
You can modify which commands are on this list by adding this
parameter. The parameter's value must be a comma-separated list of
SQL commands that ALM should verify are not included in SQL queries
for an Excel report.
Note that this verification is not performed if the SQL_QUERY_
VALIDATION_ENABLED parameter exists and is set to N. For details,
see "SQL_QUERY_VALIDATION_ENABLED" on the next page.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 44 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
SQL_QUERY_
VALIDATION_
ENABLED
By default, ALM checks SQL queries in Excel reports to ensure that they
are valid and do not alter the project database.
If this parameter is set to N, this validation is not performed. If this
parameter does not exist, is empty, or is set to Y, this validation is
performed.
For information on a related parameter, see "SQL_QUERY_
VALIDATION_BLACK_LIST" on the previous page.
SSO_
EXPIRATION_
TIME
Expiration time of the LWSSO token (the authentication token of the
REST API) in minutes. After this period of inactivity, the REST API
consumer is required to re-authenticate.
The default value is 60 minutes.
STATIC_
CONTENT_
MAX_CACHED_
FILE_SIZE
The maximum file size in MB that can be cached in the Jetty static
content cache. You can reduce the cache file size, or cancel the cache by
setting the parameter value to 0.
SUPPORT_
TESTSET_END
If this parameter is set to "Y", the Automatic Runner dialog box can signal
a remote agent when a test set execution starts and ends. The events are
passed using the Remote Agent's Set_Value method.
SUSPEND_
REPOSITORY_ GC
This parameter relates to the project repository cleaning process..
The parameter stops the cleanup process on the entire site. Use this only
in special circumstances. For example, to check if the cleanup process is
impacting system performance.
Define this parameter and set its value to Y to temporarily stop the project
repository cleaning process. To restart the cleaning process, set the
parameter to N.
SUSPEND_
REPOSITORY_
MIGRATION
This parameter relates to the project repository migration process.
The parameter stops the migration process on the entire site. Use this
only in special circumstances. For example, to back up projects, or to
check if the migration is affecting system performance.
Define this parameter and set its value to Y to temporarily stop the
migration of project files. To restart the migration, set the parameter to N.
TEXT_
ENCODING_
BY_CLIENT_TYPE
This parameter determines whether text encoding of output sanitization is
invoked by client type.
The format is <client type name>=true/false;<client type
name>=true/false;...
The default value for any client type that is not defined scpecifically in this
site parameter is false.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 45 of 154
Parameter (A – Z) Description
TEXT_SEARCH_
TIMEOUT
The length of time, in seconds, that ALM waits before canceling the
operation of enabling and rebuilding the text search indexes. This
operation is activated by clicking the Enable/Rebuild Text Search
button in the Site Projects tab of the Site Administration. The default
timeout value is 20 minutes.
UNIX_SERVER If this parameter is set to Y, it enables direct file access from a testing
tool on a Windows machine to a UNIX based repository.
You must then add a new parameter for each directory on the UNIX
server machine you want to be able to access externally and specify the
corresponding Windows path, as follows:
l Parameter name is FOLDER_MAPPING_n where n is an identifying
number. For example, FOLDER_MAPPING_1
l Parameter value is in the format
UNIXpath->Windowspath
For example,
/opt/Mercury/repository/qc/->netappqcrepository
Note: This parameter applies to HP LoadRunner.
UPGRADE_
EXCEPTION_FILE
This parameter defines the location of the global exception file to be used
when upgrading projects. This file defines exceptions for the ALM
database user schema. By default, the SchemaExceptions.xml file is
saved in the
directory.
UPLOAD_
ATTACH_
MAX_SIZE
Note: This parameter does not affect uploads of attachments in
integration tools.
The default value is blank (meaning, all attachments are uploaded
regardless of size).
VERIFY_REPORT_
FOLDER
This parameter determines where the verification report is saved when
the project verification process completes.
By default, the output is saved in
<ALM repository path>saDomsInfo
MaintenanceDataout on your ALM server machine.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Administration
HP ALM (12.00) Page 46 of 154
Workflow
Reference for ALM Events
This section contains an alphabetical reference of the ALM event functions and subroutines. It
includes the event name, description, syntax, type (Function or Sub), the value returned by a
function, and the entities for which the event procedure is available.
The following event functions are available:
Function Name When the Function is Triggered
"ActionCanExecute" on page 49 before performing a user action
"Attachment_CanDelete" on page 51 before deleting an attachment
"Attachment_CanOpen" on page 51 before opening an attachment
"Attachment_CanPost" on page 52 before updating an attachment
"CanAddTests" on page 53 before adding tests to a test set
"CanCustomize" on page 53 before opening Customization window
"CanDelete" on page 53 before deleting an object from the server
"CanLogin" on page 56 before a user logs in to the project
"CanLogout" on page 57 before a user logs out of the project
"CanPost" on page 57 before posting an object to the server
"CanRemoveTests" on page 59 before removing tests from a test set
"CanAddComponentsToTest" on
page 52
before adding business components to a test of type
Flow or Business-Process
"CanAddFlowsToTest" on page 52 before adding flows to a test of type Business-Process
"CanRemoveComponentsFromTest"
on page 58
before removing business components from a test of
type Flow or Business-Process
"CanRemoveFlowsFromTest" on
page 59
before removing flows from a test of type Business-
Process
"CanDeleteGroupsFromTest" on
page 56
before deleting groups from a test of type Flow or
Business-Process
"CanReImportModels" on page 58 before importing business models
"DefaultRes" on page 59 before resetting project defaults
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 47 of 154
Function Name When the Function is Triggered
"FieldCanChange" on page 61 before changing a field value
"GetDetailsPageName" on page 64 before displaying Defect Details dialog box
"GetNewBugPageName" on page 64 before displaying Add Defect dialog box (for backward
compatibility)
"GetNewReqPageName" on page 65 before displaying New Requirement dialog box (for
backward compatibility)
"GetReqDetailsPageName" on page
65
before displaying Requirement Details dialog box (for
backward compatibility)
The following event subroutines are available:
Subroutine Name When the Subroutine is Triggered
"AddComponentToTest" on the
next page
a component has been added to a test of type Flow or
Business-Process
"AfterPost" on page 50 an object has been posted to the server
"Attachment_New" on page 52 an attachment is added
"DialogBox" on page 60 a dialog box is opened or closed
"EnterModule" on page 60 user switches modules
"ExitModule" on page 60 user exits a module
"FieldChange" on page 62 a field value changes
"MoveTo" on page 66 user changes focus
"MoveToComponentFolder" on
page 68
user moves to the specified component folder in the business
component tree (for backward compatibility)
"MoveToFolder" on page 68 user clicks a folder in the test sets tree (for backward
compatibility)
"MoveToSubject" on page 68 user clicks a subject in the test plan tree (for backward
compatibility)
"New" on page 69 an object is added
"RemoveComponentFromTest"
on page 70
user removes a component from a test of type Flow or
Business-Process
"RunTests" on page 70 user clicks Run in the Test Lab module (provided that Sprinter
is not installed and none of the tests is automated)
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 48 of 154
Subroutine Name When the Subroutine is Triggered
"RunTests_Sprinter" on page
70
user clicks Run in the Test Lab module (provided that Sprinter
is installed and at least one test is automated)
"RunTestSet" on page 71 user clicks RunTest Set in the Test Lab module
"RunTestsManually" on page
71
user clicks Run > Run Manually in the Test Lab module
ActionCanExecute
This event is triggered before ALM performs an action that has been initiated by the user, to check
whether the action can be executed.
You can add code to this event procedure to perform actions when the user has initiated a particular
action, or to prevent the action from being executed in specific cases. For example, see "Example:
Controlling User Permissions" on page 96.
Syntax ActionCanExecute(ActionName)
where ActionName is the action that the user has initiated.
Actions are in the format context.action.
Note: The previous format for this event is supported for purposes of
backward compatibility. We recommend you use ActionCanExecute instead.
User-defined actions start with the prefix UserDefinedActions.
Type Function
Returns True or False
Availability ActionCanExecute (all modules)
Tip: To obtain the name of an action, see the sample code on "Action Object" on page 73.
AddComponentToTest
This event is triggered when the user adds a component to a test of type Flow or Business-Process
in the Test Script tab.
Version Control: Changing components checked in or checked out by another user, using the
AddComponentToTest event, is not supported.
Syntax AddComponentToTest
Type Sub
Availability AddComponentToTest
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 49 of 154
AfterPost
This event is triggered after an object has been posted to the server.
Project fields should not be changed after they have been posted, because then the new value is
not stored in the database.
Syntax <entity>_AfterPost
Type Sub
Availability l AnalysisItem_AfterPost
l AnalysisItemFolder_AfterPost
l Baseline_AfterPost
l Bug_AfterPost
l BusinessModel_AfterPost
l BusinessModelFolder_AfterPost
l BusinessModelPath_AfterPost
l Component_AfterPost
l ComponentFolder_AfterPost
l Cycle_AfterPost
l DashboardFolder_AfterPost
l DashboardPage_AfterPost
l Library_AfterPost
l LibraryFolder_AfterPost
l Release_AfterPost
l ReleaseFolder_AfterPost
l Req_AfterPost
l Resource_AfterPost
l ResourceFolder_AfterPost
l Run_AfterPost
l Step_AfterPost
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 50 of 154
l Test_AfterPost
l TestConfiguration_AfterPost
l TestFolder_AfterPost
l TestSet_AfterPost
l TestSetFolder_AfterPost
Attachment_CanDelete
This event is triggered before ALM deletes an attachment from the server, to check whether that
attachment can be deleted.
Syntax Attachment_CanDelete(Attachment)
where Attachment is the IAttachment interface. For more information, refer to the
HP ALM Open Test Architecture API Reference.
Type Function
Returns True or False
Availability Attachment_CanDelete (all modules)
Attachment_CanOpen
This event is triggered before ALM opens an attachment from the server, to check whether the
attachment can be opened.
Syntax Attachment_CanOpen(Attachment)
where Attachment is the lAttachment interface. For more information, refer to the
HP ALM Open Test Architecture API Reference.
Type Function
Returns True or False
Availability Attachment_CanOpen (all modules)
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 51 of 154
Attachment_CanPost
This event is triggered before ALM updates an existing attachment on the server, to check whether
the attachment can be updated.
Syntax Attachment_CanPost(Attachment)
where Attachment is the lAttachment interface. For more information, refer to the
HP ALM Open Test Architecture API Reference.
Type Function
Returns True or False
Availability Attachment_CanPost (all modules)
Attachment_New
This event is triggered when an attachment is added to ALM.
Syntax Attachment_New(Attachment)
where Attachment is the lAttachment interface. For more information, refer to the
HP ALM Open Test Architecture API Reference.
Type Sub
Availability Attachment_New (all modules)
CanAddComponentsToTest
This event is triggered before ALM adds business components to a test of type Flow or Business-
Process, to check whether the specified components can be added.
Syntax CanAddComponentsToTest(Components)
where Components is an array of component IDs.
Type Function
Returns True or False
Availability CanAddComponentsToTest
CanAddFlowsToTest
This event is triggered before ALM adds flows to a test of type Business-Process, to check whether
the specified flows can be added.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 52 of 154
Syntax CanAddFlowsToTest(Flows)
where Flows is an array of flow IDs.
Type Function
Returns True or False
Availability CanAddFlowstoTest
CanAddTests
This event is triggered before ALM adds tests to a test set, to check whether the specified tests can
be added.
Syntax <entity>_CanAddTests(Tests)
where Tests is an array of Test IDs.
Type Function
Returns True or False
Availability TestSet_CanAddTests
CanCustomize
This event is triggered when a user attempts to open the Customization window, to check whether
the specified user can customize the specified project.
Syntax CanCustomize(DomainName, ProjectName, UserName)
where DomainName is the domain name, ProjectName is the project name, and
UserName is the user name.
Type Function
Returns True or False
Availability CanCustomize (all modules)
CanDelete
This event is triggered before ALM deletes an object from the server, to check if the object can be
deleted.
Syntax <entity>_CanDelete(Entity)
Type Function
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 53 of 154
Returns True or False
Availability l AnalysisItem_CanDelete
l AnalysisItemFolder_CanDelete
l Baseline_CanDelete
l Bug_CanDelete
l BusinessModel_CanDelete
l BusinessModelFolder_CanDelete
l BusinessModelPath_CanDelete
l Component_CanDelete
l ComponentFolder_CanDelete
l Cycle_CanDelete
l DashboardFolder_CanDelete
l DashboardPage_CanDelete
l Library_CanDelete
l LibraryFolder_CanDelete
l Release_CanDelete
l ReleaseFolder_CanDelete
l Req_CanDelete
l Resource_CanDelete
l ResourceFolder_CanDelete
l Test_CanDelete
l TestConfiguration_CanDelete
l TestFolder_CanDelete
l TestSet_CanDelete
l TestSetFolder_CanDelete
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 54 of 154
Additional Syntax for Backward Compatibility
For purposes of backward compatibility, the following syntaxes are also available for certain
objects. However, we recommend you use CanDelete instead.
l The syntax for tests or test subject folders:
Syntax Test_CanDelete(Entity, IsTest)
where:
n Entity is the test or subject folder.
n If IsTest is True, Entity refers to an ITest object.
If IsTest is False, Entity refers to an ISubjectNode object. For more
information on ITest and ISubjectNode, refer to the HP ALM Open Test
Architecture API Reference.
Type Function
Returns True or False
Availability Test_CanDelete
l The syntax for test sets or test set folders:
Syntax TestSet_CanDelete(Entity, IsTestSet)
where:
n Entity is the test set or test set folder.
n If IsTestSet is True, Entity refers to an ITestSet object.
If IsTestSet is False, Entity refers to an ITestSetFolder object. For more
information on ITestSet and ITestSetFolder, refer to the HP ALM Open Test
Architecture API Reference.
Type Function
Returns True or False
Availability TestSet_CanDelete
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 55 of 154
l The syntax for business components or business component folders:
Syntax Component_CanDelete(Entity, IsComponent)
where:
n Entity is the component or component folder.
n If IsComponent is True, Entity refers to an IComponent object.
If IsComponent is False, Entity refers to an IComponentFolder object. For
more information on IComponent and IComponentFolder, refer to the HP
ALM Open Test Architecture API Reference.
Type Function
Returns True or False
Availability Component_CanDelete
CanDeleteGroupsFromTest
This event is triggered when a user removes groups from a test of type Flow or Business-Process,
to check whether the specified groups can be removed.
Syntax CanDeleteGroupsFromTest(Groups)
where Groups is an array of group IDs.
Type Function
Returns True or False
Availability CanDeleteGroupsFromTest
CanLogin
This event is triggered to check whether the specified user can log in to the specified project.
Syntax CanLogin(DomainName, ProjectName, UserName)
where DomainName is the domain name, ProjectName is the project name, and
UserName is the user name.
Type Function
Returns True or False
Availability CanLogin (all modules)
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 56 of 154
CanLogout
This event is triggered to check whether the current user can log out of the current project.
Syntax CanLogout
Type Function
Returns True or False
Availability CanLogout (all modules)
CanPost
This event is triggered before ALM posts an object to the server, to check whether the object can be
posted.
You can add code to this event procedure to prevent an object from being posted in specific cases.
For example, see "Example: Object Validation" on page 93.
Syntax <entity>_CanPost
Type Function
Returns True or False
Availability l AnalysisItem_CanPost
l AnalysisItemFolder_CanPost
l Baseline_CanPost
l Bug_CanPost
l BusinessModel_CanPost
l BusinessModelFolder_CanPost
l BusinessModelPath_CanPost
l Component_CanPost
l ComponentFolder_CanPost
l Cycle_CanPost
l DashboardFolder_CanPost
l DashboardPage_CanPost
l Library_CanPost
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 57 of 154
l LibraryFolder_CanPost
l Release_CanPost
l ReleaseFolder_CanPost
l Req_CanPost
l Resource_CanPost
l ResourceFolder_CanPost
l Run_CanPost
l Step_CanPost
l Test_CanPost
l TestConfiguration_CanPost
l TestFolder_CanPost
l TestSet_CanPost
l TestSetFolder_CanPost
l TestSetTests_CanPost (does not appear in the Scripts Tree)
CanReImportModels
This event is triggered when attempting to import the specified business process models that
already exist in ALM, to check if the business process models can be reimported.
Syntax <entity>_CanReImportModels(Models)
where Models is an array of Model IDs.
Type Function
Returns True or False
Availability CanReImportModels
CanRemoveComponentsFromTest
This event is triggered when a user removes components from a test of type Flow or Business-
Process, to check whether the specified components can be removed.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 58 of 154
Syntax CanRemoveComponentsFromTest(Components)
where Components is an array of component IDs.
Type Function
Returns True or False
Availability CanRemoveComponentsFromTest
CanRemoveFlowsFromTest
This event is triggered when a user removes flows from a test of type Business-Process, to check
whether the specified flows can be removed.
Syntax CanRemoveFlowsFromTest(Flows)
where Flows is an array of flow IDs.
Type Function
Returns True or False
Availability CanRemoveFlowsFromTest
CanRemoveTests
This event is triggered to check whether the specified tests can be removed from a test set.
Syntax <entity>_CanRemoveTests(Tests)
where Tests is an array of Test Instance IDs.
Type Function
Returns True or False
Availability TestSet_CanRemoveTests
DefaultRes
This function is used to determine the default return value for ALM functions, such as
FieldCanChange. All ALM workflow functions call this function (unless explicitly omitted by user) to
determine the default return value. DefaultRes can be used to quickly replace the default return
values of all ALM workflow functions.
Syntax DefaultRes
Type Function
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 59 of 154
Returns True or False
Availability DefaultRes (all modules)
DialogBox
This event is triggered when a dialog box is opened or closed.
Syntax DialogBox(DialogBoxName, IsOpen)
where DialogBoxName is the name of the dialog box, and IsOpen indicates
whether the dialog box is open.
Type Sub
Availability DialogBox (all modules)
Note: For purposes of backward compatibility, this event is also triggered using backward
compatible values for defect details (DialogBoxName="Details") and test instance details
(DialogBoxName="TestInstanceDetails"). These backward compatible values are not
recommended.
EnterModule
This event is triggered when the user enters or switches to an ALM module. It is also triggered when
the user logs in to ALM.
You can add code to this event procedure to perform an action whenever the user switches to the
specified module.
Syntax EnterModule
Type Sub
Availability EnterModule (all modules)
ExitModule
This event is triggered when the user exits the specified module.
Syntax ExitModule
Type Sub
Availability ExitModule (all modules)
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 60 of 154
FieldCanChange
This event is triggered before ALM changes a field value, to determine whether the field can be
changed.
You can add code to this event procedure to prevent a field from being changed in specific cases.
For example, see "Example: Field Validation" on page 94.
Syntax <entity>_FieldCanChange(FieldName, NewValue)
where FieldName is the name of the field and NewValue is the field value.
Type Function
Returns True or False
Availability l AnalysisItem_FieldCanChange
l AnalysisItemFolder_FieldCanChange
l Baseline_FieldCanChange
l Bug_FieldCanChange
l BusinessModel_FieldCanChange
l BusinessModelActivity_FieldCanChange
l BusinessModelFolder_FieldCanChange
l BusinessModelPath_FieldCanChange
l Component_FieldCanChange
l ComponentFolder_FieldCanChange
l ComponentStep_FieldCanChange
l Cycle_FieldCanChange
l DashboardFolder_FieldCanChange
l DashboardPage_FieldCanChange
l DesignStep_FieldCanChange
l Library_FieldCanChange
l LibraryFolder_FieldCanChange
l Release_FieldCanChange
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 61 of 154
l ReleaseFolder_FieldCanChange
l Req_FieldCanChange
l Resource_FieldCanChange
l ResourceFolder_FieldCanChange
l Run_FieldCanChange
l Step_FieldCanChange
l Test_FieldCanChange
l TestConfiguration_FieldCanChange
l TestFolder_FieldCanChange
l TestSet_FieldCanChange
l TestSetFolder_FieldCanChange
l TestSetTests_FieldCanChange
The code for hiding a field that depends on another field should be placed in the FieldChange event
procedure (not in the FieldCanChange event procedure).
FieldChange
This event is triggered when the value of the specified field changes.
Every change of value triggers the field change event when the field loses focus.
You can add code to this event procedure to perform an action when the value of a particular field is
changed. For example, you can hide or display one field depending on the value the user enters into
another field. For example, see "Example: Changing One Field Based on Another Field" on page 92.
Syntax <entity>_FieldChange(FieldName)
where FieldName is the name of the field.
Type Sub
Availability l AnalysisItem_FieldChange
l AnalysisItemFolder_FieldChange
l Baseline_FieldChange
l Bug_FieldChange
l BusinessModel_FieldChange
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 62 of 154
l BusinessModelActivity_FieldChange
l BusinessModelFolder_FieldChange
l BusinessModelPath_FieldChange
l Component_FieldChange
l ComponentFolder_FieldChange
l ComponentStep_FieldChange
l Cycle_FieldChange
l DashboardFolder_FieldChange
l DashboardPage_FieldChange
l DesignStep_FieldChange
l Library_FieldChange
l LibraryFolder_FieldChange
l Release_FieldChange
l ReleaseFolder_FieldChange
l Req_FieldChange
l Resource_FieldChange
l ResourceFolder_FieldChange
l Run_FieldChange
l Step_FieldChange
l Test_FieldChange
l TestConfiguration_FieldChange
l TestFolder_FieldChange
l TestSet_FieldChange
l TestSetFolder_FieldChange
l TestSetTests_FieldChange
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 63 of 154
When a user changes a field value using the Find/Replace command, workflow events are not
triggered. If restrictions implemented in workflow scripts are critical, consider disabling the Replace
command for specific user groups, to ensure that your restrictions cannot be bypassed.
GetDetailsPageName
This event is triggered by ALM to retrieve the name of the page (tab) that has the index number
specified in PageNum in the following dialog boxes:
l The Details dialog box for an entity
l The New <entity> dialog box for an entity
You can add code to this event procedure to customize the tab names for the Details dialog box.
For example, see "Example: Changing Tab Names" on page 91.
Syntax GetDetailsPageName(PageName, PageNum)
where PageName is the default page (tab) name (for example, Page 1) and
PageNum is the page (tab) number.
Note: The page number is the absolute page number, regardless of the page's
relative position in relation to the other displayed pages in the dialog box.
Type Function
Returns String containing the page name
Availability GetDetailsPageName (all modules)
GetNewBugPageName
This event is triggered by ALM to retrieve the name of the New Defect dialog box page (tab) that
has the index number specified in PageNum.
You can add code to this event procedure to customize the tab names on the New Defect dialog
box. For example, see "Example: Changing Tab Names" on page 91.
Syntax GetNewBugPageName(PageName, PageNum)
where PageName is the default page (tab) name (for example, Page 1) and
PageNum is the page (tab) number.
Note: The page number is the absolute page number, regardless of the page's
relative position in relation to the other displayed pages in the New Defect
dialog box.
Type Function
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 64 of 154
Returns String containing the page (tab) name
Availability GetNewBugPageName
Note: The GetNewBugPageName event is not listed in the Scripts Tree of the Script Editor.
This event is triggered for backward compatibility purposes only. GetDetailsPageName should
be used instead.
GetNewReqPageName
This event is triggered by ALM to retrieve the name of the New Requirement dialog box page (tab)
that has the index number specified in PageNum.
You can add code to this event procedure to customize the tab names on the New Requirement
dialog box. For example, see "Example: Changing Tab Names" on page 91.
Syntax GetNewReqPageName(PageName, PageNum)
where PageName is the default page (tab) name (for example, Page 1) and
PageNum is the page (tab) number.
Note: The page number is the absolute page number, regardless of the page's
relative position in relation to the other displayed pages in the New Defect
dialog box.
Type Function
Returns String containing the page name
Availability GetNewReqPageName
Note: The GetNewReqPageName event is not listed in the Scripts Tree of the Script Editor.
This event is triggered for backward compatibility purposes only. GetDetailsPageName should
be used instead.
GetReqDetailsPageName
This event is triggered by ALM to retrieve the name of the Requirement Details dialog box page
(tab) that has the index number specified in PageNum.
You can add code to this event procedure to customize the tab names on the Requirement Details
dialog box. For example, see "Example: Changing Tab Names" on page 91.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 65 of 154
Syntax GetReqDetailsPageName(PageName, PageNum)
where PageName is the default page (tab) name (for example, Page 1) and
PageNum is the page (tab) number.
Note: The page number is the absolute page number, regardless of the page's
relative position in relation to the other displayed pages in the New Defect
dialog box.
Type Function
Returns String containing the page name
Availability GetReqDetailsPageName
Note: The GetReqDetailsPageName event is not listed in the Scripts Tree of the Script Editor.
This event is triggered for backward compatibility purposes only. GetDetailsPageName should
be used instead.
MoveTo
This event is triggered when the user changes focus from one object to another.
You can add code to this event procedure to perform actions when the user changes the focus. For
example, see "Example: Presenting a Dynamic Field List" on page 95.
Tip: When moving from one object to another in a tree, the MoveTo event is not triggered.
However, it is possible to trigger the event for Requirement trees. For details, see "ENABLE_
ENTITY_SELECTION_TREE_REQ_MOVE_TO" on page 30.
Syntax <entity>_MoveTo
Type Sub
Availability l AnalysisItem_MoveTo
l AnalysisItemFolder_MoveTo
l Baseline_MoveTo
l Bug_MoveTo
l BusinessModel_MoveTo
l BusinessModelActivity_MoveTo
l BusinessModelFolder_MoveTo
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 66 of 154
l BusinessModelPath_MoveTo
l Component_MoveTo
l ComponentFolder_MoveTo (formerly MoveToComponentFolder)
l ComponentStep_MoveTo
l Cycle_MoveTo
l DashboardFolder_MoveTo
l DashboardPage_MoveTo
l DesignStep_MoveTo
l Library_MoveTo
l LibraryFolder_MoveTo
l Release_MoveTo
l ReleaseFolder_MoveTo
l Req_MoveTo
l Resource_MoveTo
l ResourceFolder_MoveTo
l Run_MoveTo
l Step_MoveTo
l Test_MoveTo
l TestConfiguration_MoveTo
l TestFolder_MoveTo
l TestSet_MoveTo
l TestSetFolder_MoveTo
l TestSetTests_MoveTo
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 67 of 154
MoveToComponentFolder
This event is triggered when the user moves to the specified component folder in the business
component tree.
Syntax MoveToComponentFolder(Folder)
where Folder is the IComponentFolder interface. For more information, refer to
the HP ALM Open Test Architecture API Reference.
Type Sub
Availability MoveToComponentFolder
Note: The MoveToComponentFolder event is not listed in the Scripts Tree of the Script Editor.
This event is supported for purposes of backward compatibility. We recommend you use
ComponentFolder_MoveTo event instead.
MoveToFolder
This event is triggered when the user moves to the specified test set folder in the test sets tree.
Syntax MoveToFolder(Folder)
where Folder is the ISysTreeNode interface. For more information, refer to the
HP ALM Open Test Architecture API Reference.
Type Sub
Availability MoveToFolder
Note: The MoveToFolder event is not listed in the Scripts Tree of the Script Editor. This event
is supported for purposes of backward compatibility. We recommend you use MoveToFolder
instead.
MoveToSubject
This event is triggered when the user moves to the specified subject in the test plan tree.
Syntax MoveToSubject(Subject)
where Subject is the ISysTreeNode interface. For more information, refer to the
HP ALM Open Test Architecture API Reference.
Type Sub
Availability MoveToSubject
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 68 of 154
Note: The MoveToSubject event is not listed in the Scripts Tree of the Script Editor. This event
is supported for purposes of backward compatibility. We recommend you use MoveToSubject
instead.
New
This event is triggered when an object is added to ALM.
You can add code to this event procedure to perform an action when a new object is added. For
example, see "Example: Customizing a Defects Module Dialog Box" on page 88.
Syntax <entity>_New
Type Sub
Availability l AnalysisItem_New
l AnalysisItemFolder_New
l Baseline_New
l Bug_New
l BusinessModelFolder_New
l BusinessModelPath_New
l Component_New
l ComponentFolder_New
l ComponentStep_New
l Cycle_New
l DashboardFolder_New
l DashboardPage_New
l DesignStep_New
l Library_New
l LibraryFolder_New
l Release_New
l ReleaseFolder_New
l Req_New
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 69 of 154
l Resource_New
l ResourceFolder_New
l Step_New
l Test_New
l TestConfiguration_New
l TestFolder_New
l TestSet_New
l TestSetFolder_New
RemoveComponentFromTest
This event is triggered when the user removes a component from a test of type Flow or Business-
Process in the Test Script tab.
Version Control: Changing components checked in or checked out by another user, using the
RemoveComponentFromTest event, is not supported.
Syntax RemoveComponentFromTest
Type Sub
Availability RemoveComponentFromTest
RunTests
This event is triggered when the user clicks the Run button to run tests in the Test Lab module,
provided that Sprinter is not installed and none of the tests is automated.
Syntax RunTests(Tests)
where Tests is an array of Test Instance IDs.
Type Sub
Availability RunTests
RunTests_Sprinter
This event is triggered:
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 70 of 154
l When the user clicks the Run arrow and chooses Run with Sprinter to run tests in the Test Lab
module.
l When the user clicks the Run button to run tests in the Test Lab module, if Sprinter is installed
and all the tests are manual.
Syntax RunTests_Sprinter(Tests)
where Tests is an array of Test Instance IDs.
Type Sub
Availability RunTests_Sprinter
RunTestSet
This event is triggered when the user clicks the RunTest Set button to run a test set in the Test Lab
module.
Syntax RunTestSet(Tests)
where Tests is an array of Test Instance IDs.
Type Sub
Availability RunTestSet
RunTestsManually
This event is triggered when the user clicks the Run arrow and chooses Run Manually to run tests
in the Test Lab module.
Syntax RunTestsManually(Tests)
where Tests is an array of Test Instance IDs.
Type Sub
Availability RunTestsManually
Workflow Object and Property Reference
Workflow scripts can reference HP Application Lifecycle Management (ALM) objects to obtain
information and to change project values. They can also use properties that return information about
the current module and dialog box. This section lists the ALM objects and properties that are
available to workflow scripts.
About ALM Objects and Properties 72
Actions Object 73
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 71 of 154
Action Object 73
Fields Objects 74
Field Object 76
Lists Object 77
TDConnection Object 78
User Object 78
ALM Properties 79
About ALM Objects and Properties
Workflow scripts can obtain information, make decisions based on that information, and change
values in the project based on those decisions.
You can obtain information such as the user group to which the current user belongs, and the value
of a field, by accessing objects such as the User object or the Field object.
You can also obtain information about the active module and active dialog box using workflow
properties. For more information on these properties, see "ALM Properties" on page 79.
Your script can change the value of a field or field list. To do so, the script modifies the Value
property or the List property of the appropriate Field object.
The following table lists the ALM objects that are available when you write a script.
Object Description
Actions The list of actions that are available. See "Actions Object" on the next page.
Action The Action object is handled by the Actions object. See "Action Object" on
the next page.
Fields Includes the objects that provide access to specific fields. See "Fields
Objects" on page 74.
Field The Field object is handled by the Fields objects. See "Field Object" on page
76.
Lists Includes the lists that are available in an ALM project. See "Lists Object" on
page 77.
TDConnection Provides access to open test architecture (OTA) objects. See "TDConnection
Object" on page 78.
User Includes the properties of the current user. This object is available in all
modules. See "User Object" on page 78.
Note: In some cases, a function returns the object itself instead of the ID property of the
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 72 of 154
object. For example, after the following statement has been executed, testsetf is a
reference to a TestSetFolder object:
Set testsetf = TestSet_Fields("CY_FOLDER_ID").Value.
For each ALM object, this section lists the properties of the object. The list includes the property
name, a description, and the data type of the property. It indicates whether the property is read-only
(R) or whether your script can modify it (R/W).
Version Control: After enabling version control for a project, you should review all its
workflow scripts and make adjustments for each checked in entity. This includes the following
entities: Req, Test, Resource, and Component. For each checked in entity that includes a
Post function in its script, you must modify the script. To modify, add a Checkout function
before every Post function. Making this modification prevents the Check Out dialog box from
opening each time a call to a Post function is made. For more information about the Post and
Checkout functions, see the HP ALM Open Test Architecture Reference.
Actions Object
You can use the Actions object to manipulate toolbar buttons, menu commands, and dialog boxes.
The Actions object has the following property:
Property R/W Type Description
Action R Object Allows access to every action in a list. The index for this property is
the action name.
Action Object
You can use the Action object to verify whether a button or command is enabled, checked, or
visible. You can also use it to execute actions.
For example, to set the Defect Details dialog box to open automatically when the user moves from
one defect to another in the Defects Grid, place the following code in the Bug_MoveTo event
procedure:
Set NewDefectAction=Actions.Action("Defects.DefectDetails")
NewDefectAction.Execute
To obtain the name of an action, add the following lines to the ActionCanExecute event procedure,
perform the action, and note the action name that is printed in the message:
Sub ActionCanExecute(ActionName)
        On Error Resume Next
        MsgBox "You have performed an action named: " & ActionName
        On Error GoTo 0
End Sub
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 73 of 154
This object has the following properties:
Property R/W Type Description
Checked R/W Boolean Indicates whether an action is checked in ALM.
Enabled R/W Boolean Indicates whether an action is enabled. A disabled action cannot be
invoked by the user, but can be invoked from the workflow script.
Visible R/W Boolean Indicates whether an action is visible in ALM.
The Action object includes the following method:
Method Description
Execute Executes the action.
When a workflow script invokes an action using the Execute method of the Action object, the
workflow events that would be triggered if a user initiated the action from a dialog box are by default
not triggered. Therefore, when using Action.Execute, you must ensure that you do not bypass the
site policies you are enforcing with workflow events.
To enable workflow events to be triggered from within a dialog box, set the value of the
AllowReentrancy flag to true. To restore the default settings, so that these events are not
triggered, set the value of the AllowReentrancy flag to false. For example, to set the Add Defect
dialog box to open automatically when a user enters the Defects module, place the following code
in the EnterModule event procedure:
AllowReentrancy=true
Set NewDefectAction=Actions.Action("Defects.DefectDetails")
NewDefectAction.Execute
AllowReentrancy=false
If the value of the AllowReentrancy flag is set to false, the dialog box opens as usual, but
workflow customizations will not work in the dialog because the workflow events for the dialog box
are not triggered.
Caution: Consider carefully the implications of setting the value of this flag to true. If you set
the value of the flag to true, you enable a function to call another function which may call the
original function. This can cause an endless loop. This can also occur when functions call
internal functions which call the original function.
Fields Objects
You can use the following objects in workflow scripts to access the fields of ALM modules:
Object Description
AnalysisItem_Fields Provides access to the fields of the reports and graphs in the Dashboard
module.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 74 of 154
Object Description
AnalysisItemFolder_
Fields
Provides access to the fields of the report and graph folders in the
Dashboard module.
Baseline_Fields Provides access to the fields of the baselines in the Libraries module.
Bug_Fields Provides access to the fields of the defects in the Defects module and
the Manual Runner dialog box.
Component_Fields Provides access to the fields of components in the Business
Components module.
ComponentStep_
Fields
Provides access to the fields of component steps in the Business
Components module.
Cycle_Field Provides access to the fields of cycles in the Releases module.
DashboardFolder_
Fields
Provides access to the fields of dashboard page folders in the
Dashboard module.
DashboardPage_
Fields
Provides access to the fields of dashboard pages in the Dashboard
module.
DesignStep_Fields Provides access to the fields of the design steps in the Test Plan
module.
Library_Fields Provides access to the fields of the libraries in the Libraries module.
LibraryFolder_
Fields
Provides access to the fields of the library folders in the Libraries
module.
Release_Fields Provides access to the fields of the releases in the Releases module.
ReleaseFolder_
Fields
Provides access to the fields of the release folders in the Releases
module.
Req_Fields Provides access to the fields of the Requirements module.
Resource_Fields Provides access to the fields of the resources in the Test Resources
module.
ResourceFolder_
Fields
Provides access to the fields of the resource folders in the Test
Resources module.
Run_Fields Provides access to the fields of the test runs in the Manual Runner
dialog box.
Step_Fields Provides access to the fields of the steps in the Manual Runner dialog
box.
Test_Fields Provides access to the fields of tests in the Test Plan module.
TestSet_Fields Provides access to the fields of the test sets in the Test Lab module.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 75 of 154
Object Description
TestSetTest_Fields Provides access to the fields of the test instances in the Test Lab
module.
For example, to set a certain property for all fields in the Req_Fields object, you can refer to each
field by its ID number (Req_Fields.FieldById). To set all fields to be visible (IsVisible)in a dialog
box, you can use the following code:
For i = 1 to Req_Fields.Count
Req_Fields.FieldById(i).IsVisible = True
Next
These objects have the following properties:
Property R/W Type Description
Count R Long Returns the number of fields in the current object.
Field
(FieldName)
R Object Accesses the fields by field name or field label.
FieldById
(FieldID)
R Object Accesses the fields by the field ID number.
Tip: To avoid errors if your script attempts to access a non-active or a non-existing field,
include On Error Resume Next in the script.
Field Object
You can use the Field object to access the properties of an entity field.
For example, to display a message box when a user does not have permission to change a value in
the Status field, you can use the following code:
Msgbox "You do not have permission to change "_
& "Bug_Fields.Field("BG_STATUS").FieldLabel field."
The Field object has the following properties:
Property R/W Type Description
FieldLabel R String The displayed label of the field.
FieldName R String The logical name of the field.
IsModified R Boolean Specifies whether the value was modified.
IsMultiValue R Boolean Specifies whether the field can contain multiple values from a
lookup list.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 76 of 154
Property R/W Type Description
IsNull R Boolean Specifies whether the field value is absent.
IsReadOnly R/W Boolean Specifies whether the field is read-only.
IsRequired R/W Boolean Specifies whether a field value is required. This enables you to
override field customization information. To modify the
IsRequired property of a field, the IsVisible property must be
True. Changes to IsRequired are ignored if the field is not
visible.
Users must always enter a value for a field that is set as
required by the workflow. This applies whether they are
modifying an existing record or adding a new record, and even if
the field is already empty.
IsVisible R/W Boolean Specifies whether the field is displayed.
List R/W List Sets or retrieves the field list attached to a field of type lookup
list.
PageNo R/W Integer Sets or retrieves the page (tab) on which the field is displayed in
the New Defect and Defect Details dialog boxes.
Value R/W Variant Sets or retrieves the value of the field.
ViewOrder R/W Integer Sets or retrieves the order in which the fields are displayed in
the New Defect and Defect Details dialog boxes. You must set
the value for every field in the dialog box.
Lists Object
You can use the Lists object to limit field input to a specific list of values.
For example, to set the list in the Planned Closing Version field, depending on the Project field
value, you can use the following code:
If Bug_Fields.Field("BG_PROJECT").Value = "Project 1" Then
        Bug_Fields.Field("BG_PLANNED_CLOSING_VER").List _
        = Lists("All Projects")
       ' ...
End If
For more information, see "Example: Presenting a Dynamic Field List" on page 95.
The Lists object can be used only with fields that are defined as the Lookup List type or the String
type in Project Customization of project entities.
The Lists object has the following properties:
Property R/W Type Description
List R ISysTreeNode Accesses the ALM lists.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 77 of 154
Note: When workflow customization has been used to change a list of values for a field that
has transition rules defined, the field may only be modified in a way that satisfies both the
workflow script and the transition rules.
TDConnection Object
In workflow scripts, the only objects that are available are the objects of the module in which the
code is written and a limited number of global objects. One of the global objects is the
TDConnection object. TDConnection provides access to the open test architecture (OTA)
objects.
You can use the TDConnection object to access objects from other modules, and to access
general session parameters. You can access TDConnection properties in any procedure, from any
module.
For more information about the TDConnection object, and a list of TDConnection properties, refer
to the HP ALM Open Test Architecture API Reference.
User Object
You can access the User object to retrieve the user name of the current user and to check whether
the user belongs to a particular user group. You can retrieve or modify the first and last name of the
user.
For example, to have a message box open when the user has project administrator permissions,
use the following code:
If User.IsInGroup("TDAdmin") Then
        MsgBox "The user " & User.FullName & _
        " has administrative permissions for this project."
End If
For more information, see "Example: Changing a Field Based on the User Group" on page 93, and
"Example: Controlling User Permissions" on page 96.
To access user properties that cannot be accessed by the User object, you can use the
TDConnection object of the ALM open test architecture (OTA).
The User object has the following properties:
Property R/W Type Description
FullName R/W String Sets or retrieves the first and last name of the current user.
IsInGroup
(GroupName)
R Boolean Checks whether or not the current user is a member of a
predefined/user-defined group.
UserName R String Returns the user name used when logging in to ALM.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 78 of 154
ALM Properties
You can use the ActiveModule and ActiveDialogName properties to obtain information about the
active module and dialog box.
This section includes:
ActiveModule Property 79
ActiveDialogName Property 80
ActiveModule Property
The ActiveModule property returns the name of the active ALM module. The following values can
be returned:
l Releases
l Libraries
l Analysis
l Dashboard
l Requirements
l Business Models
l Test Resources
l Business Components
l Test Plan
l Test Lab
l Test Runs
l Defects
Example
To open a message box displaying the module name when you move to a new module, use the
following code:
Sub EnterModule
        On Error Resume Next
        msgbox "You have just entered the " & ActiveModule & _
" module."
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 79 of 154
        On Error GoTo 0
End Sub
ActiveDialogName Property
The ActiveDialogName property returns the name of the active dialog box.
Example
To open a message box displaying the dialog box name when you open a new dialog box, use
the following code:
Sub DialogBox(DialogBoxName, IsOpen)
        On Error Resume Next
        msgbox "You have just opened the " & ActiveDialogName & _
" dialog box."
        On Error GoTo 0
End Sub
Workflow Examples and Best Practices
About the Workflow Examples
The workflow examples presented in this section perform several types of tasks. The following
table lists the examples that illustrate each type of task.
Workflow Task See Examples
dialog box customization "Example: Customizing a Defects Module Dialog Box" on
page 88
"Example: Changing Tab Names" on page 91
field value automation "Example: Adding a Template to a Memo Field" on page 92
"Example: Changing One Field Based on Another Field" on
page 92
"Example: Changing a Field Based on the User Group" on
page 93
data validation "Example: Object Validation" on page 93
"Example: Field Validation" on page 94
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 80 of 154
Workflow Task See Examples
dynamic field customization "Example: Presenting a Dynamic Field List" on page 95
"Example: Changing Field Properties when a Field Changes"
on page 96
user permission control "Example: Controlling User Permissions" on page 96
functionality "Example: Adding Button Functionality" on page 97
error handling "Example: Error Handling" on page 97
using OTA to obtain session
parameters
"Example: Obtaining Session Properties" on page 98
sending mail "Example: Sending Mail" on page 99
using the Settings object "Example: Storing the Last Values Entered" on page 100
copying values between modules "Example: Copying Field Values to Another Object" on page
102
Best Practices for Writing Workflow Scripts
This section describes best practices for writing workflow scripts and making sure the scripts run
as expected. In addition to the best practices provided in this section, you can refer to the Microsoft
Developer Network VBScript Language Reference at http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/.
The following best practices are described in this section:
General VBScript Tips and Best Practices
l "Checking Value Types Before Use" on the next page
l "Anticipating Full Evaluation of Logical Expressions" on page 83
l "Defining Default Behavior for Select Case and If-Then-Else Statements" on page 84
l "Setting Return Values in Functions" on page 85
ALM Workflow Tips and Best Practices
l "Making Sure that Entity Properties Are Set Before an Entity Comes into Focus" on page 85
l "Check if a Dialog Box is Open" on page 87
l "Avoid Defining Duplicate Subroutines" on page 88
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 81 of 154
Checking Value Types Before Use
VBScript is a "weakly-typed" programming language. This means that you can create, use, and
access data values without initially declaring their types. However, certain operations can be
performed only on values of a specific type. Therefore, it is important to check the type of the data
before performing any operations on them.
Values of different types behave differently in different statements. Object value behavior is even
more unpredictable because the behavior depends on the object's implementation. For example,
the object in the call <entity>_CanDelete(Entity) can either be text or a subject node.
Recommendations
To avoid unpredictable results:
l Check value types before use, especially for object types. When checking an object type, also
check that the object has the properties you access.
l Assume as little as possible—do not assume that a value is of a certain type. Write scripts that
can handle all possibilities by using Else statements and Select Case statements.
l Always check parameter types before use with various VBScript functions, such as IsArray,
IsDate, IsNull, IsEmpty, IsNumeric, and IsObject.
l Do not assume an object's default property is of a specific type; the type can vary from object to
object.
l Use VBScript built-in conversion functions to achieve a degree of type safety.
l When working with objects, check that the value you receive is neither Null or Empty by calling
the IsNull and IsEmpty functions.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 82 of 154
Examples
For the purposes of the following examples, assume the field values are declared as in the
table below.
Field Values Type
Bug_Fields["BG_BUG_ID"].Value Integer
Bug_Fields["BG_SUMMARY"].Value String
Bug_Fields["BG_SUBJECT"].Value Object implementing the ISysTreeNode interface
In the following example, statement usage is correct. The integer is converted to a string.
If Bug_Fields["BG_BUG_ID"].Value = "10" Then...
In the following example, statement usage is correct. The strings are comparable.
If Bug_Fields["BG_SUMMARY"].Value = "some text" Then...
In the following example, statement usage is incorrect. This code can work only when the
value of BG_SUBJECT field is neither Empty or Null. VBScript also assumes that this objects's
default value (meaning, the default property) is either of string type or is comparable with the
string type, which is not always the case.
If Bug_Fields["BG_SUBJECT"].Value = "My Tests" Then...
Anticipating Full Evaluation of Logical Expressions
The VBScript programming language does not short-circuit evaluation of Boolean conditions.
VBScript evaluates all the terms in a Boolean logical expression, even if the expression can be
established as True or False without evaluating all its terms. For example, in the following example,
both <statement1> and <statement2> are evaluated, even if <statement1> resolves to False:
<statement 1> AND <statement 2>
Recommendations
To avoid errors, check that all values and objects are not Null before attempting to use them.
Examples
The following examples:
l demonstrate incorrect and correct usage of logical expressions
l take into consideration how logical expressions are evaluated
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 83 of 154
Incorrect Usage
value.Name is evaluated even when its value is Null. This causes an error.
Sub namecheck(value)
        If Not IsNull(value) And value.Name = "aName" Then
' ...
End If
End Sub
Correct Usage
The code is correct on the condition that value is an object that contains the Name property.
The code runs without errors.
Sub namecheck(value)
    If Not IsNull(value) And Not IsEmpty(value) Then
        If value.Name = "aName" Then
            ' ...
        End If
    End If
End Sub
Defining Default Behavior for Select Case and If-Then-
Else Statements
Unpredictable results can occur when no default action is defined for Select Case statements or If-
Then-Else statements.
Recommendations
To avoid unpredictable results, always define default behavior when using Select Case of If-Then-
Else statements.
Example
The following are examples of incorrect and correct ways to define default behavior for
situations not covered by the existing Select Case and If-Then-Else statements.
Incorrect Usage
The author of this subroutine intends for the BG_USER_01 field to be visible only if the status of
the defect is Open, New, or Reopen. However, if the IsVisible property of a Closed or Fixed
defect was set to True prior to the instance of this subroutine, that Closed or Fixed defect will
also be visible. This is because there is no case statement defined specifically for Closed and
Fixed defects.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 84 of 154
Sub Bug_FieldChange(FieldName)
    If FieldName="BG_STATUS" Then
        Select Case Bug_Fields(FieldName).Value
            Case "Open", "New", "Reopen" _
Bug_Fields("BG_USER_01").IsVisible = True
        End Select
    End If
End Sub
Correct Usage
This subroutine effectively handles all possible cases.
Sub Bug_FieldChange(FieldName)
    If FieldName="BG_STATUS" Then
        Select Case Bug_Fields(FieldName).Value
            Case "Open", "New", "Reopen"
                Bug_Fields("BG_USER_01").IsVisible = True
            Case Else
                Bug_Fields("BG_USER_01").IsVisible = False
        End Select
    End If
End Sub
Setting Return Values in Functions
If a function ends without a return value, unpredictable and inconsistent results may occur. Also, it
is difficult to debug behavior if a return code is not set.
Recommendations
To avoid unpredictable results, set a default return value at the beginning of each function.
Making Sure that Entity Properties Are Set Before an
Entity Comes into Focus
It is common practice to set entity properties (such as IsVisible, IsRequired, and List) when
creating or modifying a new entity (New or FieldChanged). When writing ALM workflow scripts, it is
also important to set entity properties when the entity comes into focus (meaning, when the user
navigates to that entity in the ALM graphical user interface). When an entity comes into focus, the
MoveTo event is called.
If entity values are not set in the MoveTo event, the end user experience is unpredictable—for
example, incorrect values might be displayed in drop-down lists.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 85 of 154
Recommendations
To avoid unpredictable results, such as a drop-down list not containing the most up-to-date set of
values:
l Make sure that all entity properties are set in the MoveTo event—not just in the New or
FieldChanged events.
l Isolate entity properties customization code into a separate routine and call that routine from all
relevant events.
Example
The following table provides an example of how to make sure that properties of a defect are set
appropriately when the defect is in focus—and not just when it is modified or added.
Sub SetupBugFields(Context1, Context2)
    ' Code for customizing defect properties is entered here,
    ' such as set IsVisible, IsRequired, IsReadonly, Label, List...
    If Context1="Focus" Then
        ' Code for handling the focus event is entered here
    ElseIf Context1="FieldChange" Then
            If Context2="RQ_USER_01" Then
        ' Code for handling the FieldChange event
' is entered here
            ElseIf Context2="RQ_REQ_STATUS" Then
                ' ... Enter your code here
            Else
       ' ... Enter your code here
End If
End If
End Sub
Sub Req_FieldChange(FieldName)
    If FieldName = "RQ_REQ_STATUS" Then
        SetupBugFields("FieldChange", FieldName)
    Else
        ' ...Enter your code here
    End If
End Sub
Sub Req_MoveTo
        SetupBugFields("Focus")
End Sub
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 86 of 154
Check if a Dialog Box is Open
It is helpful to track whether a dialog box is open before performing certain actions. For example:
l Dialog boxes do not need to be refreshed but grid displays do.
l Certain workflow events are not allowed when a dialog box is open.
The DialogBox event can be used to track the visibility of dialog boxes.
Recommendations
To avoid unpredictable results, determine if a dialog box is open before any events occur.
Example
The following example checks whether the dialog box for creating a new defect is open. This is
relevant because the BG_USER_01 field can only be modified for a new defect. If a different
dialog box is open, such as the dialog box for editing a defect, the BG_USER_01 field cannot be
modified.
' Declare a global variable for each dialog box of interest
Dim NewDefectDialogIsOpen
' Initialize the global variable
NewDefectDialogIsOpen = False
Sub DialogBox(DialogBoxName, IsOpen)
    If DialogBoxName="New Bug" Then
        NewDefectDialogIsOpen = True
    Else
        NewDefectDialogIsOpen = False
    End If
End Sub
Function Bug_FieldCanChange(FieldName, NewValue)
' Initialize the function's return value to avoid
' unpredictable behavior.
Bug_FieldCanChange = True
' The BG_USER_01 field can only be modified for a new defect.
If FieldName="BG_USER_01" Then
    If NewDefectDialogIsOpen Then
        Bug_FieldCanChange = True
    Else
       Bug_FieldCanChange = False
    End If
End If
End Function
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 87 of 154
Avoid Defining Duplicate Subroutines
If you define a subroutine in one section and then add another subroutine with the same name in
another section, the subroutines will conflict. One of them will be ignored.
Example: If you define the subroutine, MySub, in the Test Lab module script section, and then
define another subroutine, MySub, in the Manual Runner script section, one of your defined
subroutines will be ignored.
Recommendations
To avoid unpredictable conflicts when defining subroutines, always check if another subroutine with
the same name already exists in your project.
Workflow Examples
Example: Customizing a Defects Module Dialog Box
This example shows how you can customize the field layout and other field properties in the Add
Defect dialog box. You can create similar code to arrange the layout of the Defect Details dialog
box.
This example illustrates a solution that customizes field properties for all user groups. You can also
use the script generators to customize the layout of the Defects module dialog boxes. If you use the
script generators, you must perform customization separately for each user group.
This example involves the following procedures:
l SetFieldApp is a general purpose procedure that receives a field name and its properties as
parameters, and assigns the properties to the field. See "SetFieldApp" on the next page.
l FieldCust_AddDefect calls SetFieldApp for each field in the Add Defects dialog box, to set
the properties of the field. For some of the fields, FieldCust_AddDefect checks the user group
to which the current user belongs, and customizes the field properties accordingly. A call to
FieldCust_AddDefect is placed in the Bug_New event procedure. See "FieldCust_AddDefect"
on the next page.
Note: To implement this example, you can run the Add Defect Field Customization script
generator and then modify the resulting scripts.
n Rename the generated function WizardFieldCust_Add to FieldCust_AddDefect and
modify it as necessary. (Before you modify a generated script, you must rename it so that
it is not overwritten the next time you run the script generator.)
n The script generator places a call to WizardFieldCust_Add in the event procedure Bug_
New.Change this to FieldCust_AddDefect.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 88 of 154
n The function SetFieldApp is generated when you run the script generator. You do not need
to rename or modify this function.
SetFieldApp
The subroutine SetFieldApp receives a field name and its properties as parameters, and assigns
the properties to the field.
The subroutine assigns the following field properties: field visibility, whether the field is required, the
number of the page (tab) on which the field should be displayed, and the view order (from left to right
and from top to bottom).
Add a call to the subroutine SetFieldApp in the user-defined function FieldCust_AddDefect. For
more information on this function, see "FieldCust_AddDefect" below.
Sub SetFieldApp(FieldName, Vis, Req, PNo, VOrder)
    On Error Resume Next
    With Bug_Fields(FieldName)
        .IsVisible = Vis
        .IsRequired = Req
        .PageNo = PNo
        .ViewOrder = VOrder
    End With
    PrintError "SetFieldApp"
    On Error GoTo 0
End Sub
FieldCust_AddDefect
The user-defined function FieldCust_AddDefect calls the function SetFieldApp.
The function first sets all fields to be invisible, not required, and to appear on page 100 at location 0.
This ensures that if you add a new field using the Project Entities link on the Project
Customization window, the layout will not be changed.
Add a call to FieldCust_AddDefect in the Bug_New event procedure so that it will be triggered when
a user adds a new defect:
Sub Bug_New
FieldCust_AddDefect
End Sub
First, the code handles the fields that are common to all user groups. It uses conditional statements
for the fields that will appear in the dialog box only for specific user groups, or that will have different
properties for different users.
Sub FieldCust_AddDefect
        On Error Resume Next
' Initialize the fields of the defect
        For i= 0 To Bug_Fields.Count -1
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 89 of 154
            SetFieldApp Bug_Fields.FieldByID(i).FieldName, _
False, False, 100, 0
        Next
        ViewNum = 0
        PageNum = 0
' Set fields that are in common for all user groups
        SetFieldApp "BG_BUG_ID", True, True, PageNum, ViewNum
        ViewNum = ViewNum + 1
        SetFieldApp "BG_DESCRIPTION", True, False, PageNum, ViewNum
        ViewNum = ViewNum + 1
        SetFieldApp "BG_SUMMARY", True, True, PageNum, ViewNum
        ViewNum = ViewNum + 1
        SetFieldApp "BG_DETECTED_BY", True, True, PageNum, ViewNum
        ViewNum = ViewNum + 1
        SetFieldApp "BG_DETECTION_DATE", _
True, True, PageNum, ViewNum
        ViewNum = ViewNum + 1
        SetFieldApp "BG_DETECTION_VERSION", True, True, PageNum, _
        ViewNum
        ViewNum = ViewNum + 1
        SetFieldApp "BG_SEVERITY", True, True, PageNum, ViewNum
        ViewNum = ViewNum + 1
        SetFieldApp "BG_PRIORITY", True, True, PageNum, ViewNum
        ViewNum = ViewNum + 1
        SetFieldApp "BG_PROJECT", True, False, PageNum, ViewNum
        ViewNum = ViewNum + 1
        SetFieldApp "BG_REPRODUCIBLE", True, False, PageNum, ViewNum
        ViewNum = ViewNum + 1
        SetFieldApp "BG_STATUS", True, False, PageNum, ViewNum
        ViewNum = ViewNum + 1
' Set fields that are different for different user groups.
' Since one user can belong to multiple user groups,
' or none of these groups, there is no need for an Else statement.
        If User.IsInGroup("Developer") Then
            SetFieldApp "BG_PLANNED_CLOSING_VERSION", True, False, _
            PageNum, ViewNum
            ViewNum = ViewNum + 1
            SetFieldApp "BG_PLANNED_FIX_TIME", True, False, PageNum, _
            ViewNum
            ViewNum = ViewNum + 1
        End If
        If User.IsInGroup("QATester") Then
            PageNum = PageNum + 1
            SetFieldApp "BG_USER_01", True, False, PageNum, ViewNum
            ViewNum = ViewNum + 1
            SetFieldApp "BG_USER_02", True, False, PageNum, ViewNum
            ViewNum = ViewNum + 1
        End If
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 90 of 154
        SetFieldApp "BG_ACTUAL_FIX_TIME", True, False, PageNum, _
        ViewNum
        ViewNum = ViewNum + 1
' ...
        PrintError "FieldCust_AddDefect"
        On Error GoTo 0
End Sub
Example: Changing Tab Names
You can change the names of the tabs on the Add Defect dialog box. This example sets the tabs to
General, Environments, and Business Case.
Add the following code to the GetNewBugPageName event procedure, which is triggered before ALM
opens the Add Defect dialog box. To change the tab names on the Defect Details dialog box, add
similar code to the Defects_GetDetailsPageName event procedure.
Sub Bug_New
On Error Resume Next
Bug_Fields.Field("BG_ACTUAL_FIX_TIME").PageNo = 1
Bug_Fields.Field("BG_ESTIMATED_FIX_TIME").PageNo = 2
On Error GoTo 0
End Sub
Function GetDetailsPageName(PageName,PageNum)
On Error Resume Next
if ActiveDialogName = "New Bug" then
Select case PageNum
case "1"
GetDetailsPageName="General"
case "2"
GetDetailsPageName="Environments"
case else
GetDetailsPageName="Business Case"
End Select
end if
On Error GoTo 0
End Function
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 91 of 154
Example: Adding a Template to a Memo Field
You can use workflow scripts to add a default template to a memo field. This example adds text to a
memo field called Business Case to display the following template:
Perform this customization by placing the HTML code for the text into the BG_USER_25 field when
a defect is added. This example assumes that the user-defined field BG_USER_25 stores a
business case string.
Add the code to the Bug_New event procedure, which is triggered when a user adds a new defect.
Sub Bug_New
        On Error Resume Next
        Bug_Fields("BG_USER_25").value = _
        "<html><body><b>Step by step scenario:</b>" & _
        "<br><br><br><b>How it affects the user:</b></body></html>"
        PrintError "Bug_New"
        On Error GoTo 0
End Sub
Example: Changing One Field Based on Another Field
This example demonstrates how you can change a field value based on the value entered into
another field.
For example, you can cause defects to be assigned to user alex_qc when UI Suggestion is typed
into the Category field, and to user alice_qc when Security Issues is typed.
The example assumes that the user-defined field BG_USER_05 is used to store the category.
When the Category field is changed in the Defects module, the BG_RESPONSIBLE field is
assigned the appropriate value.
Add the code to the Bug_FieldChange event procedure so that it is triggered when a user changes a
field value for a defect.
Sub Bug_FieldChange(FieldName)
        On Error Resume Next
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 92 of 154
        If FieldName = "BG_USER_05" then
            Select case Bug_Fields("BG_USER_05").Value
            case "UI Suggestion"
                Bug_Fields("BG_RESPONSIBLE").value="alex_qc"
            case "Security Issue"
                Bug_Fields("BG_RESPONSIBLE").value="alice_qc"
            Case Else
                Bug_Fields("BG_RESPONSIBLE").value="non-assigned"
            End Select
        End If
        PrintError "Bug_FieldChange"
        On Error GoTo 0
End Sub
Example: Changing a Field Based on the User Group
This example demonstrates how you can change a field value according to the user group of the
user entering the defect.
In this example, the user-defined field BG_USER_01 is a detection mode field in which the user
who detected the defect can enter the way in which it was discovered. Possible values are Formal
testing, Informal testing, and BTW.
The example sets the value of the detection mode field to BTW when a defect is opened by a user
who is not in the QA Tester group. If the defect is opened by a user who is in the QA Tester
group, the default value Formal testing is set.
Add the code to event procedure Bug_New, so that it is triggered when a defect is added.
Sub Bug_New
        On Error Resume Next
        If not User.IsInGroup("QATester") then
            Bug_Fields("BG_USER_01").Value = "BTW"
        Else
            Bug_Fields("BG_USER_01").Value = "Formal testing"
        End If
        PrintError "Bug_New"
        On Error GoTo 0
End Sub
Example: Object Validation
This example demonstrates how you can perform validations of all fields by using the CanPost
event procedure. For example, this code segment ensures that a user cannot reject a defect without
adding a comment.
In this example, a user may not post a defect where the defect status (BG_STATUS) has been
changed to Rejected unless some explanatory text has been typed in the R&D Comment field
(BG_DEV_COMMENTS).
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 93 of 154
Add the code to the Bug_CanPost event procedure so that the check is performed when the user
attempts to submit the defect.
Function Bug_CanPost
        ' Initialize the function's return value
' to avoid unpredictable behavior.
        Bug_CanPost = False
        On Error Resume Next
        If Bug_Fields("BG_STATUS").IsModified and _
        Bug_Fields("BG_STATUS").Value = "Rejected" and _
        not Bug_Fields("BG_DEV_COMMENTS").IsModified then
            Bug_CanPost = False
            msgbox "You must enter a comment when rejecting a defect."
        Else
            Bug_CanPost = True
        End If
        PrintError "Bug_CanPost"
        On Error GoTo 0
End Function
Example: Field Validation
This example demonstrates how to validate a single field value. For example, the following code
segment shows how you can ensure that a user in a specific group cannot lower the priority of a
defect.
In this example, if the user is in the QATester group and the BG_PRIORITY field is being modified,
the new value of the BG_PRIORITY field cannot be lower than the current value.
This example assumes that in the Priority field list for the project, lower priorities come first when
the values are sorted in ascending order. For example, the list meets this requirement if the
elements are as follows: 1-Low, 2-Medium, 3-High.
Add the code to the Bug_FieldCanChange event procedure so that it is triggered when the user
attempts to change a defect field value.
Function Bug_FieldCanChange(FieldName, NewValue)
        ' Initialize the function's return value
' to avoid unpredictable behavior.
        Bug_FieldCanChange = True
        On Error Resume Next
        If User.IsInGroup("QATester") and FieldName ="BG_PRIORITY" _
Then
            If NewValue < Bug_Fields("BG_PRIORITY").Value then
                Bug_FieldCanChange = False
                msgbox "You do not have permission to lower " _
& "defect priority."
            Else
                Bug_FieldCanChange = True
            End If
        Else
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 94 of 154
            ' Enter your code here.
        End If
        PrintError "Bug_FieldCanChange"
        On Error GoTo 0
End Function
Example: Presenting a Dynamic Field List
This example demonstrates how you can present a different field list in a field, depending on the
value of another field.
The user-defined function SW_SetLists_Environment checks the value of the Environment
Specification field and assigns the appropriate field list to the Environment Type field.
This example assumes that the field lists have been defined in the project.
Note: To use workflow scripts to change or create lists that can be assigned to fields, you
must use the Open Test Architecture (OTA) interface.
Add code to the Bug_MoveTo event procedure so that the user-defined function SW_SetLists_
Environment is called when the user changes focus in the defects module.
Sub Bug_MoveTo()
        On Error Resume Next
        SW_SetLists_Environment
        PrintError "Bug_MoveTo"
        On Error GoTo 0
End Sub
Add code to the Bug_FieldChange event procedure so that the user-defined function SW_
SetLists_Environment is called when a user changes the value of the Environment Type field in
the Defects module.
Sub Bug_FieldChange(FieldName)
        On Error Resume Next
        If FieldName = "BG_USER_01" then
            SW_SetLists_Environment
        Else
            ' Enter your code here.
        End If
        PrintError "Bug_FieldChange"
        On Error GoTo 0
End Sub
The user-defined function SW_SetLists_Environment checks the value of the Environment
Specification field (BG_USER_02) and assigns the appropriate field list to the Environment Type
field (BG_USER_01).
Sub SW_SetLists_Environment()
        Dim listName
        On Error Resume Next
        Select Case Bug_Fields("BG_USER_01").Value
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 95 of 154
        Case "Browser"
            listName = "Browsers"
        Case "Database Type"
            listName = "Database Type"
        Case "Operating System"
            listName = "Platform"
        Case "Web Server"
            listName = "Web Server"
        Case Else
            listName = "Environment Specification"
        End Select
        Bug_Fields("BG_USER_02").List = Lists(listName)
        PrintError ("Set Environment List")
        On Error GoTo 0
End Sub
Example: Changing Field Properties when a Field
Changes
This example demonstrates how you can change the properties of a field when a different field is
changed.
In this example, if the status of the defect (BG_STATUS) is changed to Closed, the user must
provide a value in the field Closed in Build (BG_CLOSING_VERSION).
Add the code to the Bug_FieldChange event procedure, to make the Closed in Build field a
required field if the status is changed to Closed.
Sub Bug_FieldChange(FieldName)
        On Error Resume Next
        If FieldName= "BG_STATUS" then
            If Bug_Fields("BG_STATUS").value="Closed" then
                Bug_Fields("BG_CLOSING_VERSION").IsRequired=True
            Else
                Bug_Fields("BG_CLOSING_VERSION").IsRequired=False
            End If
        Else
            ' Enter your code here.
        End If
        PrintError "Bug_FieldChange"
        On Error GoTo 0
End Sub
Example: Controlling User Permissions
This example demonstrates how you can prevent members of specific user groups from performing
an action.
The code allows a user to replace a defect field value only if the user belongs to the Admin user
group.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 96 of 154
Add the code to the ActionCanExecute event procedure so that the check is performed when a user
attempts to execute an action.
Function ActionCanExecute(ActionName)
        ' Initialize the function's return value
' to avoid unpredictable behavior.
        ActionCanExecute = False
        On Error Resume Next
        If ActionName = "UserDefinedActions.BugReplaceAction1" _
            And Not User.IsInGroup("Admin") then
            ActionCanExecute = False
            msgbox "You do not have permission to perform this action"
        Else
            ActionCanExecute = True
        End If
        PrintError "ActionCanExecute"
        On Error GoTo 0
End Function
Example: Adding Button Functionality
This example opens a calculator when a user clicks a button defined with action name Calculator.
Add the code to the ActionCanExecute event procedure, so that it is triggered when a user
initiates an action.
For information about the Wscript.Shell object, refer to the Microsoft documentation. To access
help for the VBScript language, choose Help > VBScript Home Page in the Script Editor.
Function ActionCanExecute(ActionName)
        ' Initialize the function's return value to
' avoid unpredictable behavior.
        ActionCanExecute = DefaultRes
        On Error Resume Next
        If ActionName = "UserDefinedActions.Calculator" Then
            Set shell = CreateObject("Wscript.Shell")
shell.Run "Calc"
            Set shell = Nothing
        End If
        ActionCanExecute = DefaultRes
        PrintError "ActionCanExecute"
        On Error GoTo 0
End Function
Example: Error Handling
This example demonstrates how you can display a standard error message. Error handling should
be added to each workflow script that you write, because errors that are not detected by the
workflow code can cause the user's browser to crash.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 97 of 154
The user-defined function PrintError receives the name of the calling procedure as a parameter. If
an error has occurred, PrintError prints out the error number, description and severity, and the name
of the procedure in which the error occurred.
You do not need to create an Err object, because it is intrinsic to VBScript. For more information
about the Err object, refer to the Microsoft documentation.
Sub PrintError(strFunctionName)
        If Err.Number <> 0 Then
            MsgBox "Error #" & Err.Number & ": " & Err.Description, _
            vbOKOnly+vbCritical, _
            "Workflow Error in Function " & strFunctionName
        End If
End Sub
The following code segment illustrates how you can add error handling to your subroutines.
Sub <sub_name>()
        On Error Resume Next
        ...
[Your code here]
        ...
        PrintError "<sub_name>"
End Sub
The following code segment illustrates how you can add error handling to your functions.
Function <function_name>()
        On Error Resume Next
        ...
[Your code here]
        ...
        PrintError "<function_name>"
End Function
Example: Obtaining Session Properties
This example demonstrates how to use the TDConnection object to obtain the properties of the
current session. Add the code to the procedure where these properties are needed. The properties
do not depend on each other, so each of the properties can be retrieved separately.
The following are examples of session properties:
TDConnection.ServerName
TDConnection.ServerTime
TDConnection.DomainName
TDConnection.ProjectName
User.UserName
Note that there is no need to use TDConnection to retrieve the user name because the workflow
has a predefined User object. For more information, see "TDConnection Object" on page 78.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 98 of 154
The example below tests the first five characters of the server URL to determine whether the user
is connected to the server using HTTP or HTTPS:
If Left(UCase(TDConnection.ServerName), 5) = "HTTPS" Then
        MsgBox "You are currently connected to the server using SSL."
Else
        MsgBox "You are not using SSL."
End If
Example: Sending Mail
These examples demonstrate how to use the TDConnection object to send mail when a defect is
submitted, and to send mail when a field value changes in the Test Plan module.
Sending Mail when a Defect is Submitted
This example sends mail when a defect is submitted.
Add a call to the SendDefect procedure in the Bug_AfterPost event procedure.
Note: If the SendDefect procedure is called before the defect is submitted, the values that
were changed in the current modification will not be included. The database is updated with the
new values only after the defect is posted.
Sub SendDefect (iObjectId, strTo, strCc, strSubject, strComment)
        On Error Resume Next
        Dim objBugFactory, objBug
        Set objBugFactory = TDConnection.BugFactory
        Set objBug = objBugFactory.Item(iObjectId)
        objBug.Mail strTo, strCc, 2, strSubject, strComment
        Set objBug = Nothing
        Set objBugFactory = Nothing
        PrintError "SendDefect"
        On Error GoTo 0
End Sub
The constant 2 in the call to objBug.Mail indicates that the history should be included with the
mail. For a list of the constants that can be used to customize email, refer to the tagTDMAIL_FLAGS
enumeration in the HP ALM Open Test Architecture API Reference. In workflow scripts, use
numeric constants and not the enumeration values.
Sending Mail when a Test Plan Module Field Value Changes
The example below demonstrates mail notification when the value of the status field is changed in
the Test Plan module.
The code is added to the Test_FieldChange event procedure. It constructs a subject and
comment for the email, and calls a user-defined function, SendTest. SendTest sends mail from the
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 99 of 154
Test Plan module. You can code SendTest similarly to the SendDefect subroutine shown in
"Sending Mail when a Defect is Submitted" on the previous page.
Sub Test_FieldChange(FieldName)
        On Error Resume Next
        Dim strSubject, strComment
        If FieldName = "TS_STATUS" Then
            strSubject = "Test Change Notification" & _
                " for project " & TDConnection.ProjectName & _
                " in domain " & TDConnection.DomainName
            strComment = "The user " & User.FullName & _
                " changed the status of the test " & _
Test_Fields("TS_NAME").Value & _
                " to " & Test_Fields("TS_STATUS").Value
SendTest Test_Fields("TS_TEST_ID").Value, _
                Test_Fields("TS_RESPONSIBLE").Value, "[QA Testers]", _
                strSubject, StrComment
        End If
End Sub
Example: Storing the Last Values Entered
This example shows how to use the TDConnection object to implement persistent data between
actions. The lifetime of a variable in a routine is only for the routine run. Therefore, persistent data
must be stored if it must be available later. It is recommended that you use the ALM API to store
persistent data whenever possible instead of using external objects, files, or the registry.
In this example, a user-defined function SW_KeepLastValue uses the Settings object to save the
values typed into the fields BG_DETECTION_VERSION, BG_USER_01, and BG_USER_03
when a user posts a defect. These values are retrieved and assigned as default values when this
user adds a new defect.
The user-defined function is called with the SET action from Bug_CanPost, before a new defect is
posted by the user. The values in the fields are stored.
Function Bug_CanPost()
        ' Initialize the function's return value to
' avoid unpredictable behavior.
        Bug_CanPost = True
        If Bug_Fields("BG_BUG_ID").Value = "" Then
            SW_KeepLastValue ("SET")
        End If
End Function
The function is called with the GET action from the Bug_New event procedure. When a user adds a
new defect, the values stored in the fields for this user are entered into these fields.
Sub Bug_New()
SW_KeepLastValue ("GET")
End Sub
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 100 of 154
Depending on the action passed as a parameter, the user-defined function SW_KeepLastValue
stores the values of the fields in the common settings table for the current user, or reads the values
from the Settings object and assigns the values to the appropriate fields.
Sub SW_KeepLastValue(action)
Dim tdc, vals, flds
Dim uset, pairs, pair
Dim bld
On Error Resume Next
        bld = ""
        Set tdc = TDConnection
        Set uset = tdc.UserSettings
        If action = "SET" Then
            flds = Array("BG_DETECTION_VERSION", _
            "BG_USER_01", "BG_USER_03")
            vals = ""
            For i = 0 To UBound(flds)
                If vals <> "" Then vals = vals & ";"
                vals = vals & flds(i) & "=" & _
Bug_Fields(flds(i)).Value
            Next
            'Open category KeepLValueSetting
            uset.Open ("KeepLValueSetting")
            'Setting KeepValueFields in category KeepLValueSetting
            uset.Value("KeepValueFields") = vals
            uset.Close
        End If 'SET
        If action = "GET" Then
            uset.Open ("KeepLValueSetting")
            vals = uset.Value("KeepValueFields")
            If vals <> "" Then
                pairs = Split(vals, ";")
                For i = 0 To UBound(pairs)
                    pair = Split(pairs(i), "=")
                    If UBound(pair) = 1 Then
                        Select Case pair(0)
                            Case "BG_USER_03"
                                bld = pair(1)
                            Case Else
                                If Bug_Fields(pair(0)).Value = "" Then
                                   Bug_Fields(pair(0)).Value = pair(1)
End If
                        End Select
                        If Bug_Fields("BG_DETECTION_VERSION").Value _
<> ""
                        And bld <> "" Then
                            SW_SetLists_VersionsBuilds _
                            "BG_DETECTION_VERSION", _
                            "BG_USER_03"
                            Bug_Fields("BG_USER_03").Value = bld
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 101 of 154
                            If Err.Number <> 0 Then Err.Clear
                        End If 'Bug_Fields
                    End If 'UBound(pair)
                Next
            End If 'vals <> ""
        End If 'GET
        uset.Close
        PrintError ("Keep Last Value (" & action & ")")
        On Error GoTo 0
End Sub
Example: Copying Field Values to Another Object
This example shows how to use the TDConnection object to copy the value from the Build
Number field of a Run (RN_USER_02) to the Last Ran On Build field of a Test in a Test Set (TC_
USER_03).
Add the code to the Run_AfterPost event procedure.
Sub Run_AfterPost
        On Error Resume Next
        Dim tdc
        set tdc = TDConnection
        Dim TSFact 'As TestSetFactory
        Set TSFact = tdc.TestSetFactory
        Dim TstSet 'As TestSet
        Set TstSet = TSFact.Item(Run_Fields("RN_CYCLE_ID").Value)
        MsgBox TstSet.Name
        Dim TSTestFact 'As TSTestFactory
        Set TSTestFact = TstSet.TSTestFactory
        Dim TSTst 'As TSTest
        Set TSTst = _
TSTestFact.Item(Run_Fields("RN_TESTCYCL_ID").Value)
        MsgBox TSTst.Name
        TSTst.Field("tc_user_03").value = _
Run_Fields("RN_USER_02").Value
        TSTst.Post
        PrintError ("Run_AfterPost")
        On Error GoTo 0
End Sub
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Workflow
HP ALM (12.00) Page 102 of 154
Installation
Prerequisites
Pre-Installation Checklist
Review and verify the following checklist before installing ALM. This checklist outlines the
information that you must supply during the installation process. For detailed prerequisite
information, see the chapters in this part that are relevant to your installation.
Check Information Required
Installation
Machine
l Operating system version
l CPU type
l Free disk space
l Free memory
For the list of supported system environments, refer to the Readme.
Note: The supported environment information in the Readme is accurate
for the ALM12.00 release, but there may be subsequent updates. For the
most up-to-date supported environments, refer to the HP Software Web
site using the following URL: http://www.hp.com/go/TDQC_SysReq.
Setup Paths l Installation path
l Deployment path
Note:
l You can accept the default paths offered by the Installation and
Configuration wizards, or enter alternative paths.
l The installation path must not include folders with accented characters
(for example, ä, ç, ñ).
l The installation path and the deployment path cannot contain non-
English characters.
l You must have full permissions on the installation and deployment
directories.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 103 of 154
Check Information Required
License Key License file
Cluster
Description
l Is clustering used?
l Cluster hosts
Encryption
Passphrases
l Communication security passphrase
l Confidential data passphrase
Note: In a cluster, use the same passphrase on all nodes.
Application
Server
The port number
Mail Server l Server type
l Server host
l Server port
Demo Project Do you require the Web-based demo application for work with the HP
Application Lifecycle Management Tutorial?
Database
Server
l Database type
l Database version
l Database server name
l Database administrator user name
l Database administrator user password
l Database port
l Database SID (Oracle only)
l Default tablespace (Oracle only)
l Temp tablespace (Oracle only)
Site
Administration
l Site administrator user name
l Site administrator password
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 104 of 154
Check Information Required
Existing
ALM/Quality
Center
Installation
If there is an existing Site Administration schema, provide the following
information for the existing version:
l ALM/Quality Center version
l ALM/Quality Center host
l Confidential data passphrase
l Database server name
l Database administrator user name
l Database administrator password
l Site Administration database schema name
l Site Administration database schema password
l Repository folder location
l Site administrator user name
l Site administrator password
Repository Repository folder location
Prerequisites: Windows Operating Systems
System Configurations: Windows
Verify that your server machine meets the ALM system configurations. For the recommended and
supported system configurations for your ALM server machine, refer to the Readme.
Note: The supported environment information in the Readme is accurate for the ALM 12.00
release, but there may be subsequent updates. For the most up-to-date supported
environments, refer to the HP Software Web site using the following URL:
http://www.hp.com/go/TDQC_SysReq.
ALM can be deployed on a VMware ESX/ESXi server according to the VMWare guest operating
system compatibility matrix.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 105 of 154
Required Permissions: Windows
Verify that you have the required permissions to install ALM on a server machine.
Note: Some permissions require access to the ProgramData folder. This folder is hidden by
default. To show hidden files and folders, perform the relevant steps for your operating system.
l If you are upgrading from a previous version of ALM/Quality Center with a remote repository, the
ALM/Quality Center application server user account must have network access to the remote
repository. For more information, contact your network administrator.
l You must be logged on as a local or domain user with administrator permissions. Your user
name cannot include a pound sign (#) or accented characters (such as, ä, ç, ñ).
l You must disable User Account Control (UAC) during the ALM installation and configuration.
Note: In Windows 8, UAC cannot be completely disabled. Instead, use the Run as
Administrator option during installation and configuration.
l The Distributed Link Tracking Client service must be stopped during the ALM installation and
configuration.
l We recommend disabling anti-virus software during the ALM installation and configuration.
l You must have the following file system and registry key permissions:
n Full read permissions to all the files and directories under the directory in which ALM is
installed. The installation directory path is specified by the user during installation. By default,
ALM writes the installation files to: C:Program FilesHPHP Application Lifecycle
Management.
n Full read, write, and execute permissions to the directory on which ALM is deployed. The
deployment directory is specified by the user during installation. By default, ALM is deployed
in C:ProgramDataHPALM.
n Full read and write permissions to the repository directory, which contains the sa and qc
directories. The repository path is specified by the user during installation. By default, it is
located under the ALM deployment directory. For more information on the repository, refer to
the HP Application Lifecycle Management Administrator Guide.
n Full read permissions to the system root (%systemroot%) directory. If you do not have these
permissions, you can still install ALM, but you cannot install any patches.
n Full read and write permissions to the installation and configuration log files directory.
Installation and configuration log files are written to C:ProgramDataHPALMlog.
n Full read and write permissions to all the keys under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREMercury Interactive.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 106 of 154
Clustering: Windows
Check with your system administrator whether you are installing ALM on a single node or as a
cluster.
If you are installing ALM on cluster nodes, verify which machine to use as the first node to start the
installation and the number of machines you should use. This depends on the number of users and
availability considerations.
When installing on additional nodes:
l ALM version. You must install the same version of ALM on all nodes.
l Operating System. You must install the same version of the operating system, including all
patches, updates, or hot fixes, on all nodes.
l Site Administration schema. All nodes must point to the Site Administration schema.
l Database details. Configure all nodes with the same database information.
l Confidential Data Passphrase. You must use the same Confidential Data Passphrase on all
nodes.
l Repository path. All nodes must point to the repository path that is defined on the first node. It
is important that you enter the repository path using the exact same characters on all nodes. For
example, you cannot have the path on the first server node defined as c:almrepository and on
additional nodes defined as server1c$almrepository—the server1c$almrepository
path must appear on every node.
ALM Repository Path: Windows
The location of the repository directory is specified by the user during installation. The default
location is: C:ProgramDataHPALMrepository. You must have full control permissions to the
ALM repository path as described in "Required Permissions: Windows" on the previous page.
Prerequisites: Linux/Oracle Solaris Operating Systems
System Configurations: Linux
Verify that your server machine meets the ALM system configurations. For the recommended and
supported system configurations for your ALM server machine, refer to the Readme.
Note: The supported environment information in the Readme is accurate for the ALM12.00
release, but there may be subsequent updates. For the most up-to-date supported
environments, refer to the HP Software Web site using the following URL:
http://www.hp.com/go/TDQC_SysReq.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 107 of 154
Consider the following for implementing ALM configurations:
l Verify that you have a supported kernel by running uname -a.
l ALM can be deployed on a VMware ESX/ESXi server according to the VMWare guest operating
system compatibility matrix.
Installing ALM for Non-Root Users
By default, the ALM installer for the Linux operating systems requires a root user.
If you are unable to work with ALM using the root user because of security concerns, speak to your
system administrator about using a non-root user with sudo permissions to install and run ALM.
Note: Installing ALM as non-root user without sudo permissions is not supported and causes
installation problems.
To use a non-root user with sudo permissions to install and run ALM:
Note: The sudo package is included by default on some systems. These instructions assume
that sudo is installed on the target machine. If sudo is not included by default, it can be
downloaded and installed from http://www.gratisoft.us/sudo/download.html.
1. Create an ALM_Admin user.
2. Edit the sudoers file to grant sudo permissions to the ALM_Admin user within the ALM
installation directory. This allows the ALM_Admin user to run the installation file with root
privileges.
Example
If the administrator decides that the ALM installation directory is /user/Install/ALM, the
following line should be added to the sudoers file: qcadmin
ALL=NOPASSWD:/user/Install/ALM
3. Check if the /var/opt/HP folder exists. If it does not exist, create it.
4. Give the ALM_Admin user Read/Write/Execute permissions to the /var/opt/HP folder.
5. Move the ALM installation file to the installation directory, /user/Install/ALM.
6. Use the ALM_Admin user to run the installation script and start ALM.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 108 of 154
Required Permissions: Linux
The following permissions are required:
l Verify that you have the required permissions to install ALM on a server machine.
l If you are upgrading from a previous version of ALM/Quality Center with a remote repository, the
ALM/Quality Center application server user account must have network access to the remote
repository. For more information. contact your network administrator.
l You must be logged on as a local or domain user with administrator permissions. Your user
name cannot include a pound sign (#) or accented characters (such as, ä, ç, ñ).
l To install ALM, you must have the following file system permissions:
n Full read and write permissions for all the files and directories under the directory on which
ALM is installed. The installation files are used for configuring the server. By default, the ALM
installation files are written to: /var/opt/HP/HP_ALM_Server.
n Full read and write permissions to the directory on which ALM is deployed. The deployment
directory is specified by the user during installation. By default, ALM is deployed on:
/var/opt/HP/ALM.
n Full read and write permissions to the repository directory, which contains the sa and qc
directories. The repository path is specified by the user during installation. By default, it is
located under the ALM deployment directory. For more information on the repository, refer to
the HP Application Lifecycle Management Administrator Guide.
n Full read and write permissions to the installation and configuration log files directory.
Installation and configuration log files are written to: /var/opt/HP/ALM/log.
n Full read and write permissions to the file delivery logs. The log files are written to: /var/log.
n If the file repository is located on a remote machine:
o On the file server machine, share the file repository directory so that the user running the
installation is the owner of the files.
o On the ALM machine, or on each cluster node, create a mount directory that points to the
file repository directory.
Minimum Disk Space Requirements
The following partitions have minimum disk space requirements:
l /opt. Requires at least enough free space to accommodate the size of ALM after it has been
installed. The approximate size of an installation is 300MB, though the exact amount of space
may vary from installation to installation.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 109 of 154
l /var. Requires at least enough free space equal to the space on the installation DVD,
approximately 150MB. A copy of the installation is stored in this partition.
l /tmp. Requires a large amount of free space. The exact amount cannot be specified as this
partition is also consumed by the operating system. It is advisable that the amount of free space
is equal in size to ALM after it has been installed, which is approximately 300MB.
Clustering: Linux
Check with your system administrator whether you are installing ALM on a single node or as a
cluster.
If you are installing ALM on cluster nodes, verify which machine to use as the first node to start the
installation and the number of machines you should use. This depends on the number of users and
availability considerations.
When installing on additional nodes:
l ALM version. You must install the same version of on all nodes.
l Operating System. You must install the same version of the operating system, including all
patches, updates, or hot fixes, on all nodes.
l Site Administration schema. All nodes must point to the Site Administration schema.
l Database details. All nodes must be configured with the same database information.
l Confidential Data Passphrase. You must use the same Confidential Data Passphrase on all
nodes.
l Repository path. You must mount the file system repository before you start the installation
process. The mount should not use any cache mechanisms. For details, contact your network
administrator.
All nodes must mount the shared file server with the same mount name. For example, if the file
server is some.server.org, and it is mounted on /mnt/some_server on the first node, it should
be mounted with /mnt/some_server on all nodes.
ALM Repository Path: Linux
The location of the repository directory is specified by the user during installation. The default
location is: /var/opt/HP/ALM/repository. You must have full control permissions to the ALM
repository path as described in "Required Permissions: Linux" on the previous page.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 110 of 154
Prerequisites: Oracle Database Servers
Connecting ALM to an Oracle Database Server
User Permissions for Connecting ALM to an Oracle Database
Server
Database Administrative User Privileges
Following are the privileges required by the ALM database administrative user. Additional
explanations about these privileges can be found in the notes at the end of the table.
Privilege Description
CREATE
SESSION WITH
ADMIN OPTION
(1)
ALM uses this privilege to connect to the database as the ALM database
administrative user.
CREATE USER Required to create a new project user schema when creating a new ALM
project.
DROP USER When deleting an ALM project, ALM attempts to remove the Site
Administration database schema from the database server. If there is an
insufficient privileges error, ALM ignores the error and requests that the user
notify the database administrator to delete (drop) the database user schema.
CREATE
TABLE WITH
ADMIN OPTION
(1)
Required for granting this permission to a newly created ALM project user
schema.
CREATE VIEW
WITH ADMIN
OPTION (1)
Required to create views for ALM projects.
CREATE
TRIGGER WITH
ADMIN OPTION
(1)
Required to create triggers for ALM projects. ALM uses database triggers to
collect change history for specific tables.
CREATE
SEQUENCE
WITH ADMIN
OPTION (1)
Required to create sequences for ALM projects.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 111 of 154
Privilege Description
CREATE
PROCEDURE
WITH ADMIN
OPTION (1)
Required to create stored packages for ALM projects. ALM uses packages
to collect change history for specific tables.
CTXAPP ROLE
WITH ADMIN
OPTION (1)
Enables ALM to use the Oracle text searching feature. This role exists only if
the Oracle text search component was installed and enabled on the database
server.
SELECT ON
DBA_FREE_
SPACE (2)
Required to check free space on the database server prior to creating a new
Site Administration database schema or a new project.
SELECT ON
SYS.DBA_
TABLESPACES
(2)
Required to collect a list of tablespaces that exist on the database server
prior to creating a new Site Administration database schema or a new
project.
SELECT ON
SYS.DBA_
USERS (2)
Required to verify the existence of specific database project users. For
example, you might want to verify the existence of an Oracle CTXSYS user
before creating a new ALM project.
SELECT ON
SYS.DBA_
REGISTRY (2)
Required to verify that the text search component is installed on the
database server.
SELECT ON
SYS.DBA_
ROLES (2)
Required to verify that the text search role (CTXAPP) is installed on the
database server.
SELECT ANY
TABLE WITH
ADMIN OPTION
(1)
and
INSERT ANY
TABLE
Required for various administrative operations when upgrading the Site
Administration database schema during installation using the copy and
upgrade method, and for enhancing performance when copying a project that
has the same source and target database server.
Note:
l
(1) An ALM database administrative user must have privileges with Admin Option.
l
(2) The SELECT ON SYS privileges can be given directly by the table owner, or through a
database application role. To avoid giving these privileges each time, you can grant this role
to the ALM database administrative user. The recommended name for this role is QC_
SELECT_ON_SYS_OBJECTS. You can create this role using the qc_sys_db___
oracle.sql example script, which is located in the UtilitiesDatabases_scripts directory
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 112 of 154
on the installation DVD. You should run this script before you run the qc_admin_db___
oracle.sql script.
Project User Privileges
When creating a new project, ALM creates a project user schema. This user schema hosts all the
tables that are used by the project for storing and retrieving data. Following are the required
privileges for an ALM project user schema:
Project User
Schema
Privilege
Description
QUOTA
UNLIMITED ON
<default
tablespace>
Required for creating database objects that are owned by the ALM project
user schema. This privilege allows users to create tables in the default
tablespace. It replaces the UNLIMITED TABLESPACE system privilege
that gave users system privileges to create tables in any tablespace,
including the SYSTEM tablespace.
CREATE
SESSION
ALM uses this privilege to connect to the database user schema to perform
required operations. For example creating database objects such as tables,
and using them to insert, retrieve, and delete data.
l CREATE
TABLE
l CREATE
VIEW
l CREATE
TRIGGER
l CREATE
SEQUENCE
l CREATE
PROCEDURE
l CTXAPP
Role
For a description of these privileges, see "Database Administrative User
Privileges" on page 111.
Tip: The installation DVD contains an example script that describes the recommended
permissions required for the ALM database project user schema. This script contains
information and does not need to be run. It is located at UtilitiesDatabases_scriptsqc_
project_db_oracle.sql.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 113 of 154
Site Administration Database Schema
Considerations: Oracle
Be aware of the following schema name and password considerations:
l The default Site Administration database schema name is qcsiteadmin_db. If you want to
rename the schema, you can change the name when configuring the ALM installation.
l You can create your own ALM user password for accessing the Site Administration database
schema.
l If there is an existing Site Administration database schema, you can create a copy of the
existing schema and upgrade the copy. This enables you to work with ALM 12.00 and previous
versions of ALM/Quality Center simultaneously.
Note: This scenario does not apply to working with Performance Center projects. After you
upgrade LAB_PROJECT, you must then upgrade Performance Center projects before they
can be used.
Oracle RAC Support
Oracle RAC is a way to enhance Oracle database availability and scalability, allowing it to interact
with more than one database instance.
ALM RAC support includes:
l Load balancing between Oracle instances.
l Failover between all specified Oracle RAC nodes at initial connection.
ALM RAC support does not include:
l TAF (Transparent Application Failover) support. A user failing to complete a request upon an
Oracle instance crash is required to perform the activity again with a working Oracle instance.
To enable Oracle RAC support:
1. Verify that a file containing information of Oracle database addresses is saved on your ALM
machine. The file is named tnsnames.ora. The file should contain information similar to the
following examples:
a. This first example shows an RAC TNS Alias using all cluster nodes in the ADDRESS sub-
section and a sample of utilizing the Load balance and Failover features:
OrgRAC =
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 114 of 154
(DESCRIPTION =
(ADDRESS_LIST=
(FAILOVER = on)
(LOAD_BALANCE = on)
(ADDRESS= (PROTOCOL = TCP)(HOST = server1)(PORT = 1521))
(ADDRESS= (PROTOCOL = TCP)(HOST = server2)(PORT = 1521))
(ADDRESS= (PROTOCOL = TCP)(HOST = server3)(PORT = 1521))
)
(CONNECT_DATA=
(SERVICE_NAME = myrac.yourcompany.com)
)
)
b. This second example shows an RAC TNS Alias using Single Client Access Name
(SCAN). This enables Oracle 11gR2 clients to connect to the database with the ability to
resolve multiple IP addresses, reflect multiple listeners in the cluster and handle public
client connections. For more information on working with RAC SCAN, refer to the Oracle
documentation.
OrgRAC_Scan =
(DESCRIPTION =
(ADDRESS_LIST=
(FAILOVER = on)
(LOAD_BALANCE = on)
(ADDRESS= (PROTOCOL = TCP)(HOST = myrac-cluster-scan)(PORT = 1521))
(CONNECT_DATA=
(SERVICE_NAME = myrac.yourcompany.com)
)
)
2. Verify that you have the address of the TNS server to which ALM should refer, for example,
OrgRAC.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 115 of 154
Prerequisites: Microsoft SQL Database Servers
Connecting ALM to a Microsoft SQL Database Server
Verify the following:
Database type and version Verify that ALM supports your database type
and version. For the list of supported
databases, refer to: refer to the Readme.
Note: The supported environment
information in the Readme is accurate for
the ALM12.00 release, but there may be
subsequent updates. For the most up-to-
date supported environments, refer to the
HP Software Web site using the following
URL: http://www.hp.com/go/TDQC_
SysReq.
Database server name Verify the name of the database server.
Database user permissions Verify that you have the database permissions
required to connect ALM to the Microsoft SQL
database server (not applicable for Windows
Authentication). For a list of required
permissions, see "User Permissions for
Connecting ALM to a Microsoft SQL Database
Server" on the next page.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 116 of 154
Site Administration database schema To install ALM on an existing Site
Administration database schema (second node
or upgrade), you must have:
l The existing database schema name and
the database administrator permissions
required to connect ALM to the database
server.
l Full read/write permissions on the existing
repository.
l ALM must have access to the previous Site
Administration schema repository path.
l Full read/write permissions for the ALM user
to the previous schema repository path.
l The Confidential Data Passphrase that was
used to create the existing schema.
For schema name and password
considerations, see "Site Administration
Database Schema Considerations: SQL" on
page 119.
Text Search Verify that the text search component is
installed on the server, even if you do not
intend to use it.
User Permissions for Connecting ALM to a Microsoft
SQL Database Server
To connect ALM to a Microsoft SQL database server, the installing database user must have
sufficient permissions to perform certain administrative tasks in SQL.
If you have the SQL sa login, you can use it to install ALM. If you are unable to use the SQL sa login
due to security reasons, it is recommended that your database administrator create an ALM
database administrative login, for example td_db_admin, with the specific privileges required to
install ALM.
The td_db_admin login must have the Database Creators role. You must also grant the td_db_
admin login the Security Administrators role. This allows the td_db_admin login to create and add
the td user with only those privileges required for running ALM, and to run the Maintain Project
activities, such as Verify, Repair, and Update.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 117 of 154
To create an ALM database administrative login on a Microsoft SQL Server:
1. Open the SQL Server Management Studio.
2. In the Object Explorer pane, under the ALM database server, expand the Security folder.
3. Right-click the Logins folder, and select New Login.
4. Type td_db_admin as the login name, and select the authentication type (enter password if
necessary).
5. Click the Server Roles tab, and select the dbcreator and securityadmin options.
6. Click OK.
To test the ALM database administrative login after connecting via this login (SQL Server
Authentication):
1. Verify the select sysdatabases table permission in the master database:
SELECT name FROM sysdatabases where name=<db_name>
2. Verify the create database permission:
CREATE DATABASE <dbName> -- the database name must not already exist
3. Verify the drop database permission:
DROP DATABASE <database_name> -- the database name must exist
4. Verify the select syslogins permission:
SELECT COUNT(*) FROM master..syslogins WHERE name=<dbOwnerName>
Note: The dbOwnerName must be set to td.
To test the ALM database administrative login permissions after connecting via this login
(Windows Authentication):
1. Verify the change database context permission:
USE <dbName>
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 118 of 154
2. Verify the create database permission:
CREATE DATABASE <dbName> -- the database name must not already exist
3. Verify the select on syslogins permission:
SELECT COUNT(*) FROM master..syslogins WHERE name='<dbOwnerName>'
4. Verify the select on sysusers permission:
SELECT COUNT(*) FROM master..sysusers WHERE name='<dbOwnerName>'
Site Administration Database Schema Considerations:
SQL
Be aware of the following schema name and password considerations:
l The default Site Administration database schema name is qcsiteadmin_db. If you want to
rename the schema, you can change the name when configuring the ALM installation.
l You can create your own ALM user password for accessing the Site Administration database
schema.
l If there is an existing Site Administration database schema, you can create a copy of the
existing schema and upgrade the copy. This enables you to work with ALM 12.00 and previous
versions of ALM/Quality Center simultaneously.
Note: This scenario does not apply to working with Performance Center projects. After you
upgrade LAB_PROJECT, you must then upgrade Performance Center projects before they
can be used.
Prerequisites: Miscellaneous
License File
Verify that you have the ALM license file.
To activate your license, visit the HP Software Licensing Portal
(http://www.hp.com/software/licensing) and enter your Entitlement Order Number.
The license file has a .dat file extension by default. Make a note of where you save the file, as
during the ALM configuration process you need to specify a path to it.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 119 of 154
If you do not have a license, visit the HP Software Licensing Portal and click the Contact
Licensing Support link.
Security Passphrases
Verify that you have passphrases for confidential data and communication security encryption.
For secondary cluster nodes, verify that you have the confidential data encryption passphrase that
you used to install the primary cluster.
When upgrading from an ALM 11.00 or later version of the Site Administration database schema,
you must use the same confidential data passphrase as was used for the previous installation.
Performance Center: You must use the same communication security passphrase for the
ALM and Performance Center server configurations.
Mail Server Information
A mail server enables ALM users to send emails to other users in a project. You select which server
to use as part of the installation configuration process.
Before installing ALM, decide which mail server to use. Ask your system administrator for
assistance. If you are using an SMTP Server, check that you have the SMTP Server name and
port. The installer checks that the specified mail server name and port are valid and that the mail
server is running.
Conflicting Applications
To work with ALM, you may need to disable conflicting applications that are running on the ALM
machine. For a list of these applications, see HP Software Self-solve knowledge base article
KM176429 (http://h20230.www2.hp.com/selfsolve/document/KM176429). (Requires HP Passport
sign-in credentials.)
Prerequisites: Client-side
System Configurations
Required Software
The following must be installed on client machines:
l Microsoft .NET Framework 4.5
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 120 of 154
Additional Considerations
The following considerations must also be taken into account:
l If you are integrating ALM with other HP testing tools, you must modify the DCOM permissions
on your client machine. For more information, see HP Software Self-solve knowledge base
article KM187086 (http://h20230.www2.hp.com/selfsolve/document/KM187086). (Requires HP
Passport sign-in credentials.)
ALM Edition: Modifying DCOM permissions is not required for running Functional test sets
(server-side test execution).
l You can work with the ALM client using a remote desktop.
l For customers using remote or mass distribution mechanisms, ALM client components can be
deployed locally on client machines by running a self-extracting msi file. You build the msi file
by running the HP ALM Client MSI Generator, available from the HP Application Lifecycle
Management Add-ins page (Help > Add-ins).
Permissions Required to Download ALM Client
Components
To enable ALM to work with HP testing tools as well as various other integrations and third-party
tools, you need to log in to the client machine with administrator privileges. These privileges are
required to install the HP ALM Client Registration add-in, which you use to register ALM client
components and Site Administration client components on your client machine.
File System Permissions
You must have the following file system permissions:
l Full read and write permissions on the HPALM-Client deployment folder. This is located at
%ALLUSERSPROFILE%.
l Full read and write permissions to the Temp (%TEMP% or %TMP%) directory. The installer
program writes installation and log files to this directory. This is generally located at
C:Users<username>AppDataLocalTemp.
Internet Explorer Configuration
Before you download Application Lifecycle Management on a client machine, you must perform the
following configurations to the Internet Explorer browser on the client machine.
l Configure the Custom Level security settings. The Custom Level security setting should be
configured for the specific zone of the ALM server.
l Set Internet Explorer as the default Web browser. This ensures that external links to ALM
entities can open in ALM.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 121 of 154
To configure security settings on the client machine:
1. In Internet Explorer, select Tools > Internet Options. The Internet Options dialog box opens.
2. Click the Security tab. The Web content zone of the ALM server (Internet or Local intranet) is
automatically selected. Click Custom Level.
3. In the Security Settings dialog box, configure the following settings:
Under .NET Framework-reliant components:
n Set Run components not signed with Authenticode to Enable.
n Set Run components signed with Authenticode to Enable.
Under ActiveX controls and plug-ins:
n Set Run ActiveX controls and plug-ins to Enable.
n Set Download signed ActiveX controls to Enable or Prompt.
Note: You do not need to enable Download signed ActiveX controls if you install the
ALM client using the HP ALM Client MSI Generator Add-in. This allows you to install all
ALM modules on a client machine without downloading them through a browser.
4. On Windows 7:
n It is suggested that you add the ALM server site to the Trusted Sites security zone. This is
not mandatory.
n Disable the Protected Mode for the Trusted Sites security zone.
5. Click OK.
To set Internet Explorer as the default web browser:
1. In Internet Explorer, select Tools > Internet Options. The Internet Options dialog box opens.
2. Click the Programs tab.
3. Under Default web browser, make sure that Internet Explorer is set as the default browser. If
not, click the Make default button.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 122 of 154
Enabling User Account Control (UAC)
If you enable UAC on a Microsoft Windows 7, 2008R2, or 2012 operating system, be aware of the
following considerations:
l To register ALM client components, you must run Internet Explorer as the administrator.
l To register ALM client components on a shared location of a client machine, you must run
Internet Explorer as the administrator.
l Administrator permissions are required to run the ClientMSIGenerator.exe file. In addition, you
must run the .exe file as the administrator.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 123 of 154
Troubleshooting the ALM Installation
Disabling Validation Checks for the Installation Wizard
The ALM Installation Wizard automatically performs validation checks to verify that particular
system configurations requirements are met. If the ALM configuration does not complete due to a
failed validation, you can fix the problem or disable selected validation checks, and rerun the
installation.
Note:
l You should disable validation checks only if you decide to take responsibility for the ALM
server installation.
l To resolve failures that occur during the ALM Installation Wizard, see "Checking the
Installation and Configuration Log Files" on page 128, or "ALM Installation Already Exists"
on page 129.
l For troubleshooting tips on database validations, see "Database Validator Fails" on page
129.
To disable configuration validators and rerun the ALM Installation Wizard in Linux:
Note: These instructions also apply when running the Windows silent installation.
1. In the ALM installation directory, locate the validations.xml file, which is near the installation
executable ( ALM_installer.bin).
2. Edit the validations.xml file by changing the validation value from true to false as required.
Following is an example of the file with all configuration validators active.
<validations>
<os enabled="true" />
<memory enabled="true" threshold="8" />
<installation_disk_space enabled="true" threshold="8" />
<sa-schema enabled="true" />
<db enabled="true" />
<mail enabled="true" />
<license-key enabled="true" />
<repository enabled="true" />
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 124 of 154
<sa-user enabled="true" />
<security enabled="true" />
<alm-services enabled="true" />
<web-server enabled="true" />
</validations>
3. Save the file and rerun the installation.
Configuration Validators
Validator Checks To Disable
os Checks that the operating system is supported.
For the list of supported system environments, refer to the
Readme.
Note: The supported environment information in the
Readme is accurate for the ALM12.00 release, but there
may be subsequent updates. For the most up-to-date
supported environments, refer to the HP Software Web
site using the following URL:
http://www.hp.com/go/TDQC_SysReq.
<os
enabled="false"
/>
memory Checks that the customer machine has at least x GB of
memory (x is defined by the threshold value, the default is 8
GB).
<memory
enabled="false"
/>
installation_
disk_space
Checks that the installation location has at least x GB of free
disk space (x is defined by the threshold value, the default is 8
GB).
Note: This validation is related only to the installation
location. If the installation fails because of a lack of free
space in the temporary folder, changing the threshold
value or disabling this validation does not affect the failure.
<installation_
disk_space
enabled="false"
/>
sa-schema Checks Site Administration database settings. <sa-schema
enabled="false"
/>
db Checks database connectivity. <db
enabled="false"
/>
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 125 of 154
Validator Checks To Disable
mail Checks that the mail server is valid. <mail
enabled="false"
/>
license-key Checks the license file key. <license-key
enabled="false"
/>
repository Checks that the repository folder is accessible, and has
sufficient space.
<repository
enabled="false"
/>
sa-user Checks site administrator user settings. <sa-user
enabled="false"
/>
security Checks encryption passphrases. <security
enabled="false"
/>
alm-
services
Checks Windows service settings. <alm-services
enabled="false"
/>
web-server Checks that the HTTP port and web server deployment folder
is accessible, and has sufficient space
<web-server
enabled="false"
/>
To disable configuration validators and rerun the ALM Installation Wizard in Windows:
Note: These instructions do not apply when running the Windows silent installation. For
Windows silent installation, follow the Linux instructions above.
1. In the ALM installation directory, locate the validations.xml file, which is near the installation
executable ( ALM_installer.exe).
2. Edit the validations.xml file by changing the validation value from true to false as required.
Following is an example of the file with all configuration validators active.
<validations>
<os enabled="true" />
<memory enabled="true" threshold="8" />
<installation_disk_space enabled="true" threshold="8" />
<sa-schema enabled="true" />
<db enabled="true" />
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 126 of 154
<mail enabled="true" />
<license-key enabled="true" />
<repository enabled="true" />
<sa-user enabled="true" />
<security enabled="true" />
<alm-services enabled="true" />
<web-server enabled="true" />
</validations>
3. Only the following configuration validators are used in the Windows installation wizard:
Validator Checks To Disable
os Checks that the operating system is supported.
For the list of supported system environments, refer to the
Readme.
Note: The supported environment information in the
Readme is accurate for the ALM12.00 release, but
there may be subsequent updates. For the most up-
to-date supported environments, refer to the HP
Software Web site using the following URL:
http://www.hp.com/go/TDQC_SysReq.
<os
enabled="false"
/>
memory Checks that the customer machine has at least x GB of
memory (x is defined by the threshold value, the default is
8 GB).
<memory
enabled="false"
/>
installation_
disk_space
Checks that the installation location has at least x GB of
free disk space (x is defined by the threshold value, the
default is 8 GB).
Note: This validation is related only to the installation
location. If the installation fails because of a lack of
free space in the temporary folder, changing the
threshold value or disabling this validation does not
affect the failure.
<installation_
disk_space
enabled="false"
/>
db Checks database connectivity. <db
enabled="false"
/>
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 127 of 154
4. Save the file and rerun the installation.
5. On the Installation Summary page, before clicking Done, edit the run_configuration.bat file,
located under the <installation folder>, to disable validations.
Validator Checks To Disable
Existing
installation
Checks if an older version of ALM or
Quality Center is installed.
-
wPreviousInstallationValidator
License file Checks license file key. -wLicenseTypeValidator
Security
passphrases
Checks encryption passphrases. -wEncryptionStepValidator
Mail server Checks that the mail server name is
valid.
wMailServerValidator
Database
settings
Checks Site Administration database
settings.
-wSaSchemaValidator
Site
administrator
Checks site administrator user settings. -wSiteAdminUserValidator
repository
folder
Checks that the repository folder is
accessible, and has sufficient space.
-wRepositoryValidator
6. Save the run_configuration.bat file and click Done to continue the installation.
Checking the Installation and Configuration Log Files
If you encounter problems installing ALM, check for errors in the following log files:
Windows File Delivery Logs
Log Path
Install
Completed
<installation folder>log
Install Failed on the desktop:
HP_Application_Lifecycle_Management_Install_<mm_dd_yyyy_hh_mm_
ss>.log
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 128 of 154
Linux File Delivery Logs
Log Path
Install
Completed
<installation folder>/log
Install Failed in the user's home folder:
HP_Application_Lifecycle_Management_Install_<mm_dd_yyyy_hh_mm_
ss>.log
Application Logs
Log Path
Configuration logs l Windows. <ALM deployment
folder>log
l Linux. <ALM deployment folder>/log
Site Administration database schema creation
logs
l Windows. <ALM deployment
folder>logsa
l Linux. <ALM deployment folder>/log/sa
ALM Installation Already Exists
If an error message displays during the installation indicating that an ALM installation already
exists, uninstall the existing ALM installation and remove all traces of it from the server machine.
Database Validator Fails
During the ALM Server configuration, the database validator performs the following checks:
l Check that the input parameters are correct.
l Check that the Site Administration database schema name was provided.
l Check whether the same authentication type was used as the one used in the previous
installation.
Perform the following steps:
1. Check whether the parameters are correct:
n Read the error message that displays during installation and try to understand and resolve
the problem from the root cause.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 129 of 154
n For further clarifications, check with your database administrator.
n If no error was found and you are sure that the parameters are correct, disable the DB
parameters validator. For details, see "Disabling Validation Checks for the Installation
Wizard" on page 124.
2. Check that the Site Administration Database Schema name was provided:
a. Open a database query tool.
b. Make sure the PROJECTS table exists in the Site Administration Database Schema. This
table does not exist in the project schema.
3. To check the authentication type of a previous installation:
a. Navigate to C:Program FilesHPALM_Server on Windows, and /opt/HP/HP_ALM_
Server on Linux and open the application folder.
b. Extract the contents of qcbin.war into a temp file, and open the siteadmin.xml file in a
text editor.
c. Search for the native property. If its value is set to Y, Windows authentication was used.
Make sure that the new installation uses the same authentication type (Microsoft SQL
Server authentication or Windows authentication) as the previous installation.
Monitoring ALM Server Fails
When running one of the Java-based tools to monitor ALM you receive the following message:
"Not enough storage is available to process this command."
This problem is caused because the JVM running ALM Server is running with a service account.
Choose one of the following solutions, depending on which tool you are running:
l jmap and jstack. See the suggestion in the following link:
http://stackoverflow.com/questions/906620/jstack-and-not-enough-storage-is-available-to-
process-this-command
You will be required to download the pstools tool from the following address:
http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/sysinternals/bb897553
l jconsole and jvisualvm. Download the following tool from the following address:
http://www.iopus.com/guides/srvany.htm
Also refer to the following Microsoft article: http://support.microsoft.com/kb/137890
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 130 of 154
Upgrade Preparation Troubleshooting
General Validation
Supported Database Version
The verification process checks that the project schema is stored in a supported database server. If
the verification process detects that the database server version is not supported, it displays a
warning. For details about the database servers versions supported by ALM, refer to the Readme.
Note: The supported environment information in the Readme is accurate for the ALM12.00
release, but there may be subsequent updates. For the most up-to-date supported
environments, refer to the HP Software Web site using the following URL:
http://www.hp.com/go/TDQC_SysReq.
Valid Database User Schema Name
The upgrade mechanism does not support databases that include special characters in the
database name. If the verification process finds special characters, you must remove them. For
SQL databases, periods are also not supported in the database user schema name.
To remove special characters from database names:
1. Deactivate the project.
2. Ask your database administrator to rename the database user schema to a name that does not
include special characters, or periods for SQL databases.
3. Remove the project from Site Administration.
4. Update the Dbid.xml file to point to the new database user schema name.
5. Restore the project by using the updated Dbid.xml file.
6. Run the verification process again to make sure the problem is resolved.
Mixed Table Ownership
ALM can connect to Microsoft SQL server by using SQL authentication or Windows authentication.
For each of these methods, a different user owns the tables of a project:
l SQL Authentication. Table owner is the user td.
l Windows Authentication. Table owner is the user dbo (a user mapped to the operating system
user that runs the ALM server).
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 131 of 154
If you create a project with one type of authentication (for example, SQL), and then restore it with
the other type of authentication (for example, Windows), these tables cannot be accessed. In this
case, new tables are created with owners that are different from those of the old tables. You will not
be able to work with the project. It is likely that the upgrade will fail.
To prevent this problem, the duplicate ownership validator checks that the owner of all of the tables
in the project database user schema matches the connection method that ALM is using to connect
to the server.
To fix table ownership manually, do one of the following:
l SQL Authentication: Run the following query to make td the table owner:
EXEC sp_changeobjectowner '<table name>', 'td'
l Windows Authentication: Run the following query to make dbo the table owner:
EXEC sp_changeobjectowner 'td.<table name>', 'dbo'
Repository over Database Feature
The Repository over Database feature is not supported in Quality Center 10.00 or in ALM versions
11.00 and later.
If you use this feature in Quality Center 9.2, you should migrate the repository from the database to
the file system (available from Quality Center 9.2 Patch 12) before upgrading the project to Quality
Center 10.00, and then upgrade the project to ALM 11.00.
For more information about the tool for migrating the project repository from the database to the file
system, see the ReadMe files for Quality Center 9.2 Patch 12. The verification process checks
whether the project is using the Repository over Database feature. If the project is using the
feature, the validator displays a warning.
Version Control Validation
l Legacy version control projects. Integration with external version control tools is not
supported in ALM12.00. Quality Center version 10.00 and ALM include a built-in version control
functionality to support your projects. To work with projects from Quality Center 9.2 that use
version control, you must first upgrade to ALM 11.00, migrate legacy version control data, and
then upgrade to ALM12.00.
l Version control enabled projects. Version control enabled projects cannot be upgraded to
ALM12.00 while there are checked out entities. The verification process checks that there are no
checked out entities. If there are checked out entities, they must be checked in. To determine if
there are checked out entities, see HP Software Self-solve knowledge base article KM00470884
(http://h20230.www2.hp.com/selfsolve/document/KM00470884). (Requires HP Passport sign-
in credentials.)
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 132 of 154
Database Permissions
To enable an upgrade to the current ALM version, the project schema requires a set of minimum
required permissions. The verification process makes sure that both the project user and the
administrator user have all the privileges needed to perform the upgrade.
Text Search Configuration
Quality Center versions 9.0 and later support the database text search feature. However, not all
databases are configured to support this feature. If your database does support text search, ALM
installs the required components when creating a new project database. ALM also activates the
text search for the new database. The verification process checks whether your project has the text
search feature enabled, and that it is configured correctly.
The verification process validates the following:
Validity of the Text Search Configuration
The verification process checks that text search components are installed and are valid on the
database server. If a database server is text search-enabled in the DB Servers tab in Site
Administration, text search must also be enabled on the Oracle or SQL database server. If the
verification process detects that text search is not enabled or configured incorrectly on the Oracle or
SQL database server, the upgrade process does not run until you manually repair the problem.
We recommend that you ask your database administrator to reconfigure text search on the Oracle
or SQL database server. Alternatively, as a workaround, you can disable text search for the
database server from Site Administration.
To disable the text search for the database server:
1. Run the following query on your Site Administration schema:
update <SA Schema>.dbservers set db_text_search_enabled = null where dbserve
r_name = '<DB logical name>'
2. Restart the ALM server.
3. Run the repair process for your projects.
4. When the repair process completes, run the following query:
update <SA Schema>.dbservers set db_text_search_enabled = 'Y' where dbserver_
name = '<DB logical name>'
5. Restart the ALM server.
Only Valid Fields Configured Under "Text Search"
The verification process checks that only valid fields are defined as searchable. You can enable the
text search only for specific entities, and only on fields of the type string or memo. The following
entities are supported: BUG, COMPONENT, COMPONENT_STEP, DESSTEPS, REQ, TEST,
BPTEST_TO_COMPONENT, and CYCLE. Any other configuration could cause functionality
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 133 of 154
problems during upgrade or customization. This problem is fixed automatically by the repair
process.
Text Search Validation for Oracle Database Server
For an Oracle Database server, the verification process checks the following:
l Validity of Text Search Indexes. The verification process checks that database text search
indexes are valid. Invalid text search indexes can cause functionality problems and even
upgrade failure in ALM. If the verification process detects an invalid index, try to recreate the
index by dropping it from the schema and creating it again. In Site Administration, click the Site
Projects tab. Select the relevant project and click the Enable/Rebuild Text Search button. If
this procedure returns an error, consult your database administrator or contact HP Support.
l Validity of Project Database User Permissions. The verification process checks that the
project database user has the required permissions to work with text search. When text search
is installed on the database, the role CTXAPP is created automatically. ALM requires that this
role be granted to all projects database users that support text search. (ALM grants the CTXAPP
role automatically when creating the project or enabling the text search for a project.) If this role
is not granted to the project database user (configured to support text search), the verification
process returns a warning. In these cases, ask your database administrator to grant the required
role to the project database user.
Text Search Validation for Microsoft SQL Database Server
The verification process checks that the project database user schema enables the text search
feature. To work with text search on SQL project, you need to enable the text search on the
database.
To enable text search on the database:
1. Select the database from the SQL server Enterprise Manager.
2. Right-click the database name.
3. Select Properties/Files.
4. Select Use Full-Text Indexing.
Schema Validation
The verification process helps to ensure that the project database user schema is correct and
configured as expected.
The verification process performs two types of schema verifications:
l Schema Correctness. Checks that the project database schema includes all of the required
schema objects, as defined in the expected database user schema for the project. This
verification ensures that all of the required entities exist and are defined as expected. It also
ensures that there are no extra entities defined on top of the schema.
l Alignment to the current version. Notifies you about differences in the project database user
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 134 of 154
schema caused by internal changes made in Quality Center or ALM. In this way, the verification
process aligns the schema with the latest internal changes to the schema made in preparation
for the upgrade.
The verification process displays warnings in the verification report if it finds the following:
l Extra entities defined. For example, Table, Column, Trigger, View, and Sequence.
l Differences from the expected definitions. For example, Column Size and Index Attributes.
l Missing objects.
Schema differences found by the verification process can cause upgrade failures or usage
problems. As long as the verification process still finds these differences, an upgrade to the current
ALM version will not start.
Note: Many of the schema changes can be fixed automatically by the repair process.
The following sections contain possible warnings, grouped by the different database objects, that
the verification process can display in the verification report:
Tables 135
Columns 136
Indexes and Constraints 138
Triggers 141
Sequences 141
Internal Quality Center Changes 142
Tables
Database tables can contain the following warnings:
Extra Table
The ALM schema should contain only the tables that are defined in the schema configuration file.
Adding extra tables on top of the schema is not supported and might cause future problems with
ALM.
Problem: If the verification process finds extra tables that were added manually to the schema, it
generates an Extra Table warning.
Note: This problem requires manual repair. The repair process cannot fix it.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 135 of 154
Solution: Do one of the following:
l Change the Schema. If you use the table, copy it to a different schema. If you do not use the
table, delete it. Before taking either action, back up the schema and consult your database
administrator. For details, see "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149.
l Use the Exception File.
Note: If the project database is case sensitive, the table name must be the same in both the
database and the exception file.
Note: Not recommended: Instruct the upgrade to ignore this problem.
Missing Table
The verification process checks that all of the tables defined for the project schema actually exist
(according to the tables of each Quality Center/ALM version).
Problem: If a table is missing, the verification process generates a Missing Table warning.
Solution: Do one of the following:
l See "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149.
l Run the repair process to create the missing table. Although you can use the repair process to
add these objects, we recommend that you contact HP Support to make sure that the missing
objects are not just symptoms of a bigger problem.
Columns
Database columns can contain the following warnings:
Extra Column
The verification process checks that each table includes the required columns, as defined for the
expected database user schema and version. The schema should not include extra columns. Extra
columns in a table might cause upgrade failure or functionality problems.
Problem: If the verification process detects an extra column (that does not exist in the database
user schema definitions) in one of the tables, it generates an Extra Column warning.
Note: This problem requires manual repair. The repair process cannot fix it.
Solution: Do one of the following:
l Change the Schema. If you have an internal implementation that requires extra table columns,
move the extra columns to a different table in a different schema. If you do not use a particular
column, delete it. Before taking either action, back up your schema and consult your database
administrator. For a more detailed explanation, see "Changing the Database User Schema" on
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 136 of 154
page 149.
l Use the Exception File.
Note: Not recommended: Instruct the upgrade to ignore this problem.
Column Size Mismatch
The verification process checks that all the table columns are defined as expected. This validation
ensures that the column size matches the expected size as defined for each table column. This
verification excludes user-defined fields, whose size can be customized through project
customization.
Some column mismatch warnings are caused by internal changes made in Quality Center 10.00
that are fixed by the repair process automatically. For details, see "Internal Quality Center
Changes" on page 142.
Problem A: Size is bigger than expected. If the column size is bigger than expected, decrease the
column size to the required size manually. Because this operation can cause data loss, it is not
performed automatically by repair process.
Note: This problem requires manual repair. The repair process cannot fix it.
Solution A: Consult your database administrator to resolve this issue. For risks involved in
changing the database user schema, see "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149.
Problem B: Size is smaller than expected. If the column size is smaller than expected, the repair
process fixes the problem automatically by increasing the column size to the expected size.
Solution B: Run the repair process to increase the current size to the required size.
Column Precision Mismatch
In an Oracle Database, "precision" is the term used to define the size of fields with the INTEGER
type.
Problem: The verification process generates a warning if the precision defined for a certain column
is smaller than expected.
Solution: Run the repair process to increase the current precision to the required precision.
Column Type Mismatch
Changing a column type causes the upgrade to fail, and can cause major functionality problems.
Problem: The verification process generates a Column Type warning if the column type has
changed.
Note: This problem requires manual repair. The repair process cannot fix it.
Solution: Consult your database administrator to resolve this issue. For risks involved in changing
the database user schema, see "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 137 of 154
Column Nullability Mismatch
One of the attributes that is defined for a column is whether it can accept null values. A null is the
absence of a value in a column of a row. Nulls indicate missing, unknown, or inapplicable data. If
you have defined a NOT NULL or PRIMARY KEY integrity constraint for a particular column, you
cannot insert rows into the column without adding a value.
Problem: The verification process compares the required definitions for each column in the
expected database user schema to the project database user schema. If it encounters differences
in the column NULL attribute definition, it generates a Column Nullable warning.
Solution: Run the repair process. The repair process runs a query to modify the column attributes
to the expected attributes.
If the column includes NULL values, the repair process cannot update the column attribute to NOT
NULL (if this is the required attribute) for the column. Ask your database administrator how to
remove the NULL values from the column. After removing the NULL values, run the repair process
again. For details, see "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149.
Identity Column
The IDENTITY property is one of the attributes defined for columns in Microsoft SQL server.
Problem: As part of the verification for the columns attributes, the verification process might find a
column IDENTITY property that is not configured as expected.
Note: This problem requires manual repair. The repair process cannot fix it.
Solution: Change the IDENTITY property of the column to the expected configuration (according
to the output from the verification process report) manually. Consult your database administrator to
resolve this issue. For details, see "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149.
Missing Column
If a column is missing from a table, run the repair process or contact HP Support.
Problem: If the verification process finds that a column is missing from one of the tables, it
generates a Missing Column warning.
Solution: Do one of the following:
l Run the repair process to fix the problem.
l See "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149.
Indexes and Constraints
A database index is a data structure that improves the speed of operations in a table. You can
create indexes using one or more columns, providing the basis for both rapid random lookups and
efficient ordering of access to records. Database Constraints are constraints on the database that
require relations to satisfy certain properties.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 138 of 154
Database indexes and constraints can cause the following validation warnings:
Extra Index
The ALM schema should include only those indexes defined in the required schema configurations.
Problem: If the verification process finds an index that is not defined in the required schema
configuration, it generates an Extra Index warning.
Note: This problem requires manual repair. The repair process cannot fix it.
Solution: Remove the extra indexes manually. Consult with your database administrator to resolve
this issue. For details, see "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149.
Some Extra Index warnings are caused by internal changes made in Quality Center 10.00. These
extra indexes are no longer used by ALM, and are removed by the repair process. For details, see
"Internal Quality Center Changes" on page 142.
Extra Constraint
The ALM schema should include only those constraints defined in the required schema
configurations.
Problem: If the verification process finds a constraint that is not defined in the required schema
configuration, it generates an Extra Constraint warning.
Note: This problem requires manual repair. The repair process cannot fix it.
Solution: Remove the extra constraint manually. Consult with your database administrator to
resolve this issue. For details, see "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149.
Index Uniqueness Mismatch
A unique index guarantees that the index key contains no duplicate values. As a result, every row in
the table is unique. Specifying unique indexes on ALM data tables ensures data integrity of the
defined columns. In addition, it provides helpful information that is used as a query optimizer.
Problem: If the index uniqueness attribute does not have the expected value, the verification
process generates an Index Uniqueness Mismatch warning.
You cannot create a unique index, unique constraint, or PRIMARY KEY constraint if duplicate key
values exist in the data. The verification process performs these data validations. If a table has
duplicate values or IDs, based on the index definitions on that table, the verification process also
displays the duplication in the verification report. In this case, the repair process automatically fixes
the duplication problem before creating the unique index.
Solution: Run the repair process to fix the problem.
Index Clustered
In Microsoft SQL, index type can be classified as clustered or non-clustered. The verification
process compares the required definitions for each index in the expected database user schema to
the project database user schema.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 139 of 154
Problem: If the verification process finds differences in the index clustered attribute definition, it
generates an Index Clustered warning.
Solution: Run the repair process to fix the problem.
Missing Constraint
Constraints are rules that the database enforces to improve data integrity.
Problem: If the verification process finds a constraint that should be defined as missing, it
generates a Missing Constraint warning.
Solution: Run the repair process to fix the problem.
Missing Index
The verification process checks that all the required indexes (as defined in the expected database
user schema) exist in the projects database user schema.
Problem: If the verification process does not find all the required indexes in the projects database
user schema, it generates a Missing Index warning.
Solution: Run the repair process to fix the problem.
Index Changed
The verification process checks that the indexes are defined according to the expected database
user schema.
Problem: If the verification process finds an index that is not defined according to the expected
database user schema, it generates an Index Changed warning.
This warning can indicate the following problems:
l Function in a function-based index is different than expected.
l Index is not defined on the expected columns.
Solution: Run the repair process to fix the problem. The repair process removes the index, and
then recreates it, based on the required definitions for this index.
Index Order Changed
The verification process checks that the order of the columns in the index definition has not
changed.
Problem: If the order of the columns in the index definition has changed, the verification process
generates an Index Order Changed warning.
Solution: Run the repair process to fix the problem. The repair process removes the index, and
then recreates it, based on the required definitions for this index.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 140 of 154
Triggers
A database trigger is procedural code that is automatically executed in response to certain events
on a particular table in a database.
Database triggers can contain the following warning:
Extra Trigger
Extra triggers can cause upgrade failures and functionality problems.
Problem: If the verification process finds an extra trigger, it generates an Extra Trigger warning.
Note: This problem requires manual repair. The repair process cannot fix it.
Solution: Before upgrading, back up your database schema and remove the extra triggers
manually.
Because extra triggers can cause upgrade failures, the upgrade process cannot ignore this warning
by using the Exception file. For details, see "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149.
Sequences
A sequence is an Oracle object that acts as a generator that provides a sequential series of
numbers.
Database sequences can contain the following warnings:
Extra Sequence
ALM schemas should contain only the sequences that are defined in the schema configuration file.
Problem: If the verification process finds an extra sequence, it generates an Extra Sequence
warning.
Note: This problem requires manual repair. The repair process cannot fix it.
Solution: Do one of the following:
l Change the Schema. Move the sequence to a new database user schema. Before doing so,
consult with your database administrator. For details, see "Changing the Database User
Schema" on page 149.
l Use the Exception File.
Note: Not recommended: Instruct the upgrade to ignore this problem.
Missing Sequence
Problem: If the verification process finds that one of the sequences that should be defined on the
ALM schema is missing, it generates a Missing Sequence warning.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 141 of 154
Solution: Do the following:
l Run the repair process to fix the problem.
l See "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149.
Incorrect Sequences
Problem: Sometimes the Oracle object sequence numbers become incorrect, for example, if an
export of the database is done on a live activated project, in which users are still modifying tables. If
the verification process finds that Oracle sequences objects are not fully synchronized with ALM
schema table IDs, the verification process generates an Incorrect Oracle sequences found
warning.
Solution: Run the repair process to fix the problem.
Internal Quality Center Changes
For upgrade from Quality Center 9.2: As a result of internal changes in Quality Center 10.00, a
set of updates needs to be applied to the schema as part of the preparation for the upgrade to ALM.
To apply the updates to the schema, perform the following processes: 
Verification Process
If the verification process finds any internal differences, it generates warnings in the verification
report. The repair process fixes them automatically.
The verification process checks for the following internal changes:
Type Problem Element Comment
Column Size
mismatch
COMMON_
SETTINGS.CSET_NAME
Expected column size is
240. Actual size is 70.
Column Size
mismatch
REQ.RQ_REQ_PRIORITY Expected column size is
255. Actual size is 70.
Column Size
mismatch
REQ.RQ_REQ_TYPE Expected column size is
255. Actual size is 70.
Column Size
mismatch
REQ.RQ_REQ_AUTHOR Expected column size is
255. Actual size is 70.
Column Size
mismatch
REQ.RQ_REQ_PRODUCT Expected column size is
255. Actual size is 70.
Column Size
mismatch
REQ.RQ_REQ_REVIEWED Expected column size is
255. Actual size is 70.
Column Size
mismatch
REQ.RQ_REQ_STATUS Expected column size is
255. Actual size is 70.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 142 of 154
Type Problem Element Comment
Index Missing ALL_LISTS.AL_ABS_
PATH_COV_IDX
Index Missing BUG.BG_COMPOUND_IDX
Index Missing CYCLE.CY_FOLDER_IDX
Index Missing REQ.RQ_REQ_STATUS_
IDX
Index Missing RUN.RN_CYCLE_IDX
Index Missing STEP.ST_RUN_IDX
Index Missing TEST.TS_SUBJECT_IDX
Index Extra BUG.BG_DETECTED_BY_
LWR_IDX
Index Extra BUG.BG_STATUS_LWR_
IDX
Index Extra BUG.BG_PRIORITY_
LWR_IDX
Index Extra BUG.BG_RESPONSIBLE_
LWR_IDX
Index Index
changed
REQ_COVER.RC_
ENTITY_ID_IDX
Index Index
changed
RUN.RN_TEST_ID_IDX
Index Index
changed
RUN.RN_TESTCYCLE_
IDX
Function-
based indexes - relevant
only for SQL server.
Extra
index
COMMON_SETTINGS.CS_
COVER_LWR_IDX
Function-
based indexes - relevant
only for SQL server.
Extra
index
HOSTS.HOSTS_LWR_IDX
Function-
based indexes - relevant
only for SQL server.
Extra
index
HOSTS_IN_GROUP. HG_
COVER_LWR_IDX
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 143 of 154
Type Problem Element Comment
Function-
based indexes - relevant
only for SQL server.
Extra
index
HOST_GROUP. GH_LWR_
IDX
Function-
based indexes - relevant
only for SQL server.
Extra
index
USERS.US_USERS_LWR_
IDX
Repair Process
The repair process fixes these internal differences in the following way:
l Column Size. Increases the size of columns to the required size.
l Index Definition. Removes extra indexes. It also recreates missing indexes and indexes that
were defined differently.
l Extra Function-based Indexes. Microsoft SQL Server only. Removes obsolete function-based
indexes.
Before beginning the upgrade, run the repair process on each project.
Data Validation
Duplicate Values
Some fields (or a combination of fields) must be unique in given tables. This constraint is enforced
by the creation of a unique index on these fields. For example, the combination of fields TS_
SUBJECT and TS_NAME, which represent the ID of the test's parent folder and test name, must
be unique. It is not possible to create two tests with the same name under the same folder. In rare
cases, a corrupted database contains duplicate values in these fields.
Problem: The verification process checks that all unique indexes exist (and therefore enforce
unique values). If the verification process finds duplicate values, it does not permit the upgrade to
run on the project.
The verification report specifies the fields in which there are duplications and number of duplicate
values found, as shown below.
Solution: Automatic Repair. Run the repair process to automatically handle the duplicate values.
The repair process renames the duplicate values to resolve the problem.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 144 of 154
Duplicate IDs
Most tables have a unique primary key, usually a unique single column. If there are duplicate values
in this field, the primary key is not created.
For example, in a table called test, the column TS_TEST_ID represents the test ID, which is
unique. In rare cases, a corrupted database contains duplicate IDs.
Problem: The verification process checks that all IDs in a table are unique. If it finds duplicate IDs,
it does not permit the upgrade to run on the project.
The verification report specifies the fields in which there are duplicate items and values, as shown
below.
Solution: Automatic Repair. The repair process automatically deletes one of the records with a
duplicate ID.
Caution:
This option assumes that the entire record is duplicated, and that the duplicated record is not
accessible from the ALM user interface. Because there can be exceptions, we recommend
that you use this option only after verifying manually that this record deletion will not cause
data loss.
Tree Inconsistencies
The verification process checks four different entity trees (hierarchical representation of entities):
l Test Plan tree
l Business Components tree
l Requirement tree
l Test Lab tree
The verification process checks that the data in the tree tables is correct.
Caution: Do not manually fix any problems related to tree data. The repair process fixes them
automatically.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 145 of 154
Problem: The verification process checks for the following types of problems:
l Corrupted Path. This is an internal ALM field that contains a string that represents the order of
each node in the tree.
l Wrong Number of Children. This is an internal ALM field that contains the number of children
for each node in the tree.
l Orphan Records in Trees. By definition, orphan records do not have parent records. As a
result, you cannot access them through the ALM user interface.
Solution: Automatic Repair. Run the repair process to automatically fix any problems related to
tree data.
Caution: Before beginning the automatic repair, review each orphan record carefully. If the
verification process finds an orphan record, it deletes it (and all its descendants) from the tree
automatically.
Views
Database views can contain the following warning:
Extra Views
ALM schemas should contain only the views that are defined in the schema configuration file.
Problem: If the verification process detects extra views that were added manually to the schema,
it displays an Extra Views warning. Adding extra views on top of the schema is not supported and
could cause problems.
Note: This problem requires manual repair. The repair process cannot fix it.
Solution: Do one of the following:
l Change the Schema. If you use the view, copy it to a different schema. If you do not use the
view, delete it. Before taking either action, back up your schema and consult your database
administrator. For details, see "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149.
l Use the Exception File.
Note: Not recommended: Instruct the upgrade to ignore this problem.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 146 of 154
Orphaned Entities
The verification process checks for entity data that is missing corresponding parent data. For
example, the following entities might be missing corresponding test configurations or test criteria:
l Test configuration coverage
l Criteria coverage
l Run criteria
l Runs
l Test instances
Caution: Do not manually fix any problems related to orphaned entities. The repair process
fixes them automatically.
Problem: In version-controlled projects, deleting a test configuration or test criteria did not delete
corresponding entities after checking in. This caused incorrect coverage calculation.
Solution: Automatic Repair. Run the repair process to automatically fix any problems related to
orphaned entities created by this problem.
Missing Entities
The verification process checks for data that is missing. For example, the following entities might
be missing:
l Test configurations
l Test criteria
Caution: Do not manually fix any problems related to missing entities. The repair process
fixes them automatically.
Problem: The upgrade process can detect that certain entities are missing based on information
that exists in related tables.
Solution: Automatic Repair. Run the repair process to automatically fix any problems related to
missing entities created by this problem.
Missing Lists and/or List Values
The verification process checks that all of the fields of List type are associated with a list.
Problem: If a list and/or its values are missing, the verification process generates a warning about
missing lists or missing list values.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 147 of 154
Solution:
Run the repair process to create the missing list and/or its values.
Missing lists are re-created with the name: AUTO_GENERATED_LIST_NAME_<unique_
number>
After running the repair process, do the following in Customization > Project Lists: 
l Rename any lists whose names are prefixed by AUTO_GENERATED_LIST_NAME_.
l If necessary, add any list values that are missing.
Tip: Although you can use the repair process to add these objects, we recommend that you
contact HP Support to make sure that the missing objects are not just symptoms of a bigger
problem.
Encrypted Values
Some fields are saved in the database in an encrypted state. Encryption is done using confidential
data passphrases.
Note: This is an issue with Performance Center and Lab Management projects.
Problem: The verification process checks that all encrypted data can be decrypted with the current
confidential data passphrases. If the verification process finds encrypted values that cannot be
decrypted, the project is not upgraded.
The verification report specifies the fields that cannot be decrypted.
Solution: If verifying the LAB_PROJECT fails due to a problem with the Confidential Data
Passphrase, do one of the following: 
l Make sure that the same Confidential Data Passphrase is defined on the original server on
which the LAB_PROJECT was located, as well as on the server to which it is being restored.
l Perform the following steps:
a. In Site Administration: Before attempting to verify the LAB_PROJECT again, navigate to the
Lab Management tab and clear all encrypted field values from the project by running the
following queries:
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 148 of 154
o For a Microsoft SQL Database
update td.LAB_DIAGNOSTICS_SERVERS set DIAG_SVR_PASSWORD = ''
update td.LAB_AUT_HOSTS set AUTHOST_PASSWORD = ''
ALTER TABLE td.LAB_HOSTS DISABLE TRIGGER ALL
update td.LAB_HOSTS set HOST_PASSWORD = ''
ALTER TABLE td.LAB_HOSTS ENABLE TRIGGER ALL
o For an Oracle Database
update <schema name>.LAB_DIAGNOSTICS_SERVERS set DIAG_SVR_
PASSWORD = ' '
update <schema name>.LAB_AUT_HOSTS set AUTHOST_PASSWORD = ' '
update <schema name>.LAB_HOSTS set HOST_PASSWORD = ' '
b. Proceed with the verify, repair, and upgrade of your LAB_PROJECT.
c. Login to Lab Management and update the passwords of the AUT Hosts, Diagnostics Server
and Standalone Unix Load Generators. For information on working in Lab Management, refer
to the HP ALM Lab Management Guide.
Changing the Database User Schema
This section describes the problems that require manual repair (cannot be fixed automatically by the
repair process), and recommends solutions for these problems. If you encounter any of the
problems mentioned below, consult with your database administrator or contact HP Support for
further guidelines to resolve these problems before upgrading.
The stability of the new database upgrade component depends on the database user schema
validity. We recommend that you not use the Exception file to change the database user schema.
This section includes:
Missing Database Objects 150
Missing List Warning 150
Sequences Warning 150
Changed Database Objects 150
Extra Database Objects 151
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 149 of 154
Missing Database Objects
Missing database objects can be symptoms of a bigger problem.
Problem: Missing database objects (for example, tables and indexes) can yield unexpected and
unwanted behavior.
Solution: Although you can use the repair process to add these objects, we recommend that you
contact HP Support to make sure that the missing objects are not just symptoms of a bigger
problem.
Missing List Warning
User-defined fields of List type must be associated with lists.
Problem: If a list is missing for a user-defined field, the verification process generates a Missing
List warning.
Solution: Contact HP Support for instructions on changing the data type of the user-defined field
from List to String in the SYSTEM_FIELD table.
Caution: Contact HP Support before attempting to fix the problem manually.
Sequences Warning
An internal mechanism manages IDs and other system numerators. The table SEQUENCES holds
the name of the table or other entity whose numeration is being tracked as well as its highest
current value.
Problem: If one of the records is missing in this table, or if one of the values is incorrect, the
verification process generates a Sequences warning.
Solution: The repair process fixes the problem automatically.
Caution: We strongly recommend that you not attempt to fix the problem manually.
Changed Database Objects
Any of the following cases is defined as a Changed Database Object:
l Data type of a column was changed
l Length of a column was changed
l Nullability of a column was changed
l Column is defined as identity although it should not be defined as such, or vice versa
Problem: A changed column data type can result in incorrect behavior on the server side.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 150 of 154
Solution: To avoid this behavior, make sure that you have resolved all data type and length
concerns before beginning the upgrade.
For every changed database object that is found, do the following:
1. Create a new column with the required attributes as originally defined by the ALM server.
2. Move the data from the old column to the new one.
If you cannot move the data (for example, move strings to numeric columns, or move large
data to smaller fields), contact HP Support.
3. Remove the old column.
4. Rename the new column to the original column name.
Extra Database Objects
ALM has various customization options. One option is to add user-defined fields (UDFs). You can
add a UDF by using either the project customization user interface or through OTA (Open Test
Architecture).
Problem: Any other addition to the database user schema (for example, defining extra objects on
top of ALM schema) can result in a failure, such as the following:
l Name Conflict. If the later version happens to include a name that you added for a proprietary
database object (for example, a table, view, or column), the two names will be in conflict.
l Copy and Synchronize Failure. If the database user schema contains extra or missing
database objects, some ALM mechanisms for copying and synchronizing might fail.
l Extra Triggers. If the database contains extra triggers, some update operations might fail.
Solution:
For each extra database object that is found, perform the corresponding solution:
l Move extra columns to newly created tables.
To make sure a new table has a one-to-one relationship with the original table, define the primary
key of the new column in the new table with the value of the primary key of the original column in
the original table.
l Move extra tables to a different database user schema.
These extra tables include those tables created above. You might need to amend the proprietary
application data access of these tables. You can still access these tables from within the ALM
database connection by specifying the full name.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 151 of 154
Examples:
n Oracle
<schema name>.<table name>
n SQL Server
<database name>.td.<table name>
To be able to see these tables, you must grant the necessary permissions for the
database user schema.
l Move extra views to a different database user schema.
Like extra tables, these views can be moved to a different database user schema. In addition,
you must grant reading permissions to the newly created database user schema on the
database user schema objects.
l Remove referential integrity between customer database objects and ALM database
objects.
This removal includes no data loss.
l Remove extra triggers before the upgrade, and, only if truly necessary, restore them
after the upgrade.
No data loss is involved. The upgrade process includes data upgraders that perform some data
manipulations (for example, removing duplicate values, fixing tree structures, and so on).
Your triggers will not be invoked on these update events.
As a result, you need to do the following:
a. Ask HP Support for information about the data upgrader activity.
b. Review the information about the data upgrader activity.
c. Decide on which proprietary updates you need to perform.
l Remove extra indexes.
You can log all indexes before the upgrade, and (only if necessary) restore them after the
upgrade. No data loss is involved.
l Oracle Database only: Move extra sequences to a newly created database user schema.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 152 of 154
To access the extra sequences from the database user schema, you must grant ALM the
required permissions. When moving these sequences, set them to start with the number they
reached at the time of the move.
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation
HP ALM (12.00) Page 153 of 154
Page 154 of 154HP ALM (12.00)
HP ALM Docs on Tap
Installation

More Related Content

PPTX
Alm 11.0 qa training
PPT
HP ALM, HP QC 11,QC 11, Quality Center 11, SAP TAO, SAP TAO 3.0, SAP TAO 4.0,...
PPTX
Agile Development using HP Agile Manager and HP Quality Center / ALM
PPS
Requirements Management with HP ALM
PPT
Alm qc 11_training
PDF
Testing SAP HANA applications with SAP LoadRunner by HP
PDF
Performance Testing for SAP Applications
PDF
Alm 11.0 qa training
HP ALM, HP QC 11,QC 11, Quality Center 11, SAP TAO, SAP TAO 3.0, SAP TAO 4.0,...
Agile Development using HP Agile Manager and HP Quality Center / ALM
Requirements Management with HP ALM
Alm qc 11_training
Testing SAP HANA applications with SAP LoadRunner by HP
Performance Testing for SAP Applications

What's hot (20)

PPTX
HP ALM; HP ALI 2.5
PDF
Performance tesing coding standards & best practice guidelines v1
PDF
Accelerate your CRM deployments by automating your end-to-end CRM test cycles
PDF
SAP performance testing & engineering courseware v01
PPTX
Software Archaeology with RDz and RAA
PPT
WebSphere sMash June Product Review
PPTX
Tips for Developing and Testing IBM HATS Applications
PDF
Enhancement framework the new way to enhance your abap systems
PPTX
Eliminate up to 70% of Your Test Automation Costs
PPSX
HP LoadRunner
PPTX
Modeling and Testing Dovetail in MagicDraw
PDF
Sap Solution Manager - Charm Urgent Correction
PPT
Best Practices for Applications Performance Testing
PPTX
Release 12 features work arounds and Upgrade
PPTX
Amq Overview Continuous Quality Assurance
PDF
Introducing enhancement framework.doc
PDF
VMworld 2013: Best Practices for Application Lifecycle Management with vCloud...
PDF
Workflow Management Software with IBM Lotus Notes, Business Process Managemen...
PDF
IBM Rational Developer for System z Quick Start Sales Presentation
PPT
Resources slides
HP ALM; HP ALI 2.5
Performance tesing coding standards & best practice guidelines v1
Accelerate your CRM deployments by automating your end-to-end CRM test cycles
SAP performance testing & engineering courseware v01
Software Archaeology with RDz and RAA
WebSphere sMash June Product Review
Tips for Developing and Testing IBM HATS Applications
Enhancement framework the new way to enhance your abap systems
Eliminate up to 70% of Your Test Automation Costs
HP LoadRunner
Modeling and Testing Dovetail in MagicDraw
Sap Solution Manager - Charm Urgent Correction
Best Practices for Applications Performance Testing
Release 12 features work arounds and Upgrade
Amq Overview Continuous Quality Assurance
Introducing enhancement framework.doc
VMworld 2013: Best Practices for Application Lifecycle Management with vCloud...
Workflow Management Software with IBM Lotus Notes, Business Process Managemen...
IBM Rational Developer for System z Quick Start Sales Presentation
Resources slides
Ad

Similar to Alm docs ontap (20)

PPTX
Why Upgrade from QC to ALM?
PPTX
Calidad en entornos SAP
PDF
Webinar "Gestión de la calidad en entornos SAP"
PPSX
HP ALM
PDF
ALM Value Brief
PDF
Hp application performance center software
PDF
IT Management for the Successful Enterprise
DOCX
FY17 ADM Suites Quick Sheets
PDF
Qc tutorial
PPSX
HP ALM QC
DOCX
hp_alm.docx
PDF
Sa*ple
PDF
HP's ALM11 Guides Companies Through Shifting Landscape of Application Develop...
PDF
HP Software Performance Tour 2014 - Enterprise Agility in the age of Applicat...
PPTX
Test Management Tool HP ALM- Quality Center Part 1
PPTX
Test Management Tool HP ALM- Quality Center Part 2
PPSX
HP Quality Center
PPTX
Quality Center
PDF
Introducing AppPulse
PDF
Hp application portfolio management software
Why Upgrade from QC to ALM?
Calidad en entornos SAP
Webinar "Gestión de la calidad en entornos SAP"
HP ALM
ALM Value Brief
Hp application performance center software
IT Management for the Successful Enterprise
FY17 ADM Suites Quick Sheets
Qc tutorial
HP ALM QC
hp_alm.docx
Sa*ple
HP's ALM11 Guides Companies Through Shifting Landscape of Application Develop...
HP Software Performance Tour 2014 - Enterprise Agility in the age of Applicat...
Test Management Tool HP ALM- Quality Center Part 1
Test Management Tool HP ALM- Quality Center Part 2
HP Quality Center
Quality Center
Introducing AppPulse
Hp application portfolio management software
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
Mega Projects Data Mega Projects Data
PDF
Business Analytics and business intelligence.pdf
PPTX
IB Computer Science - Internal Assessment.pptx
PPTX
Acceptance and paychological effects of mandatory extra coach I classes.pptx
PPTX
Data_Analytics_and_PowerBI_Presentation.pptx
PPTX
iec ppt-1 pptx icmr ppt on rehabilitation.pptx
PDF
[EN] Industrial Machine Downtime Prediction
PPTX
Introduction to Knowledge Engineering Part 1
PDF
Introduction to Data Science and Data Analysis
PDF
Capcut Pro Crack For PC Latest Version {Fully Unlocked 2025}
PDF
Galatica Smart Energy Infrastructure Startup Pitch Deck
PPTX
climate analysis of Dhaka ,Banglades.pptx
PDF
annual-report-2024-2025 original latest.
PPTX
Introduction to Firewall Analytics - Interfirewall and Transfirewall.pptx
PPTX
Computer network topology notes for revision
PDF
Transcultural that can help you someday.
PDF
168300704-gasification-ppt.pdfhghhhsjsjhsuxush
PPT
Miokarditis (Inflamasi pada Otot Jantung)
PDF
22.Patil - Early prediction of Alzheimer’s disease using convolutional neural...
PPTX
STUDY DESIGN details- Lt Col Maksud (21).pptx
Mega Projects Data Mega Projects Data
Business Analytics and business intelligence.pdf
IB Computer Science - Internal Assessment.pptx
Acceptance and paychological effects of mandatory extra coach I classes.pptx
Data_Analytics_and_PowerBI_Presentation.pptx
iec ppt-1 pptx icmr ppt on rehabilitation.pptx
[EN] Industrial Machine Downtime Prediction
Introduction to Knowledge Engineering Part 1
Introduction to Data Science and Data Analysis
Capcut Pro Crack For PC Latest Version {Fully Unlocked 2025}
Galatica Smart Energy Infrastructure Startup Pitch Deck
climate analysis of Dhaka ,Banglades.pptx
annual-report-2024-2025 original latest.
Introduction to Firewall Analytics - Interfirewall and Transfirewall.pptx
Computer network topology notes for revision
Transcultural that can help you someday.
168300704-gasification-ppt.pdfhghhhsjsjhsuxush
Miokarditis (Inflamasi pada Otot Jantung)
22.Patil - Early prediction of Alzheimer’s disease using convolutional neural...
STUDY DESIGN details- Lt Col Maksud (21).pptx

Alm docs ontap

  • 1. General Helpful Links This sections contains a list of useful websites and references. Some of the links require an HP Passport account. ALM Supported Environments Integrations Matrix ALM 12.00 HP Software Support Online HP ALM Resources Site
  • 2. ALM Functionality by Edition HP Application Lifecycle Management is also available in several editions which provide subsets of ALM functionality—HP ALM Essentials Edition, HP Quality Center Enterprise Edition, and HP ALM Performance Center Edition. HP ALM Edition Description HP ALM A unified platform for managing and automating processes, activities, and assets for building, testing, delivering, and maintaining applications. It includes modules for requirements, test, defect, and development management, and overall release and project planning. HP ALM helps organizations drive consistent processes, shared best-practices, and asset sharing across projects. HP ALM Essentials Edition Provides a subset of HP ALM product functionality, and is designed to help smaller teams get up and running quickly. It provides core functionality for requirements management, test management, and defect management. HP Quality Center Enterprise Edition Resides on the same unified platform as HP ALM. It delivers core functionality for quality management. It supports building a quality center of excellence through tight integrations with HP Unified Functional Testing, HP Business Process Testing, and HP Sprinter. HP ALMPerformance Center Edition Functionality for the complete management, scheduling, running, and monitoring of performance test scripts. It resides on the same platform as HP ALM and integrates directly with HP ALM and HP LoadRunner. The following table indicates the availability of ALM functionality according to edition. Further information on each function is provided below. Functionality HP ALM Edition HP ALM Essentials Edition HP Quality Center Enterprise Edition HP ALM Performance Center Edition "Licensing" on page 4 "Release Management" on page 4 "Project Planning and Tracking (PPT) Releases" on page 5 HP ALM (12.00) Page 2 of 154
  • 3. Functionality HP ALM Edition HP ALM Essentials Edition HP Quality Center Enterprise Edition HP ALM Performance Center Edition "Multiple Requirement Types" on page 5 "Requirement to Requirement Traceability" on page 5 "Risk-Based Quality Management" on page 5 "Business Models Module" on page 5 "Test Authoring and Execution" on page 5 (partial) "Test Resources" on page 5 "Test Configurations" on page 5 "HP Sprinter" on page 5 "Lab Management" on page 5 "Automatic Provisioning of Cloud Test Hosts" on page 6 HP ALM Docs on Tap General HP ALM (12.00) Page 3 of 154
  • 4. Functionality HP ALM Edition HP ALM Essentials Edition HP Quality Center Enterprise Edition HP ALM Performance Center Edition "Versioning" on page 6 "Baselining" on page 6 "Sharing Requirements and Tests" on page 6 "Sharing Defects" on page 6 "Cross Project Customization" on page 6 "Cross Project Reporting" on page 6 "Export Data to Excel" on page 6 "Business Process Testing" on page 6 "Extensions" on page 7 (partial) (partial) (partial) "Upgrading Editions" on page 7 -- Licensing ALM licensing is determined according to your purchase agreement. The site administrator can manage and monitor the license usage from Site Administration. For more details, see the HP Application Lifecycle Management Administrator Guide. Release Management You organize and track your upcoming releases in the Releases module. Performance Center HP ALM Docs on Tap General HP ALM (12.00) Page 4 of 154
  • 5. Edition does not support release management. If you are working with Performance Center Edition, fields and commands related to cycles and releases are not available. For example, Target Cycle and Target Release are not available. Project Planning and Tracking (PPT) Releases ALM project planning and tracking (PPT) functionality enables quality assurance managers to track application readiness by defining goals for activities of an application release. PPT is available for ALM Edition only. Multiple Requirement Types You can assign each requirement in the Requirements module to a default ALM requirement type. In addition, you can customize the default types and create your own requirement types. Requirement to Requirement Traceability Requirements traceability defines a relationship between two or more requirements, assisting you when analyzing the impact of a change proposed in a specific requirement. Risk-Based Quality Management The risk-based quality management feature enables you to calculate at which level to test each requirement, based on the nature of the requirement and the resources you have available. In the ALM Essentials Edition, the Risk tab is unavailable in the Requirements module. In addition, any risk related fields are unavailable. Business Models Module The Business Models module enables you to import business process models from standard modeling tools, and test their quality in ALM. The Business Models module is not available in ALM Essentials Edition or Performance Center Edition. Test Authoring and Execution You can build test plans and design tests based on your project requirements, and then execute those tests to diagnose and resolve problems. ALM Performance Center Edition supports performance testing only. Test Resources The Test Resources module enables you to manage resources used by your tests. Test Configurations Test configurations enable testing of various use-cases, each time with a different set of data. HP Sprinter HP Sprinter provides enhanced manual testing functionality and a variety of tools to assist in the manual testing process. Sprinter is available for ALM Edition and Quality Center Enterprise Edition. Lab Management Lab Management allows users to manage the lab resources and systems they use for functional and performance testing in ALM. Lab Management is available for functional and performance testing with ALM Edition and for performance testing with Performance Center Edition. HP ALM Docs on Tap General HP ALM (12.00) Page 5 of 154
  • 6. For more details, refer to the HP ALM Lab Management Guide. Automatic Provisioning of Cloud Test Hosts Cloud provisioning is currently available only for provisioning of load generators. For more details, refer to the HP ALM Lab Management Guide. Versioning Version control enables you to create and manage ALM entities while maintaining previous versions of those entities. ALM Essentials Edition does not support single entity versioning of your ALM projects. Baselining You can create a baseline to store a snapshot of multiple entities in your project, at a specific point in time. ALM Essentials Edition does not support baselining. Sharing Requirements and Tests The Libraries module enables you to create and compare baselines of requirements, tests, test resources, and business components. You can also reuse an existing set of entities by importing, synchronizing and comparing libraries across multiple projects. Quality Center Enterprise Edition: You can use the Libraries module to create and compare baselines in a project. Quality Center Enterprise Edition does not include importing, synchronizing and comparing libraries across multiple projects. Sharing Defects You can share and synchronize defects across multiple ALM projects using the HP ALM Synchronizer. Defect sharing is available for ALM Edition only. For more details, see the HP ALM Synchronizer User Guide, available from the HP Application Lifecycle Management Adds-ins page. Cross Project Customization Cross project customization enables you to work with template projects to standardize policies and procedures across projects in your organization. Cross project customization is not available for Quality Center Enterprise Edition. For more details, see the HP Application Lifecycle Management Administrator Guide. Cross Project Reporting When you create graphs in ALM, you can combine and compare data from multiple projects. Cross project reporting is unavailable for some entities. Cross project reporting is not available for Quality Center Enterprise Edition. Export Data to Excel All editions enable exporting ALM data to Excel for reporting. Exporting functionality is unavailable for some entities. Business Process Testing Business Process Testing enables non-technical subject matter experts to build and work with HP ALM Docs on Tap General HP ALM (12.00) Page 6 of 154
  • 7. business components in a script-free environment and to create application-quality business process tests. Business Process Testing is not available for ALM Essentials Edition or Performance Center Edition. Each user with the proper permissions who logs into an ALM server with a Business Process Testing license uses up both a Business Process Testing license and an ALM license. Note: You can run test sets containing business process tests in the Test Lab module and you can also edit automated components in Unified Functional Testing, even if no Business Process Testing license is available in ALM. For more information on Business Process Testing, refer to the HP Business Process Testing User Guide. Extensions ALM extensions provide added functionality to ALM. Various extensions are available, depending on the edition with which you are working. If you have a license for an ALM extension, you can utilize the added functionality by enabling the extension on a per project basis. For more details on enabling extensions, refer to the HP Application Lifecycle Management Administrator Guide. To view the list of extensions available with ALM 12.00 or to download documentation for the extensions, access the HP ALM Add-ins Page. You can access the Add-ins page in ALM from Help > Add-ins. Upgrading Editions You can upgrade your current edition to another edition. For example, you can upgrade from HP ALM Essentials Edition 12.00 to HP ALM Edition 12.00. For more information on upgrading, refer to the HP Application Lifecycle Management Installation and Upgrade Guide. HP ALM Docs on Tap General HP ALM (12.00) Page 7 of 154
  • 8. System Requirements ALM Server-Side System Requirements This section includes the server-side system requirements and configurations for installing HP ALM 12.00 on Windows and Linux. ALM Server-Side Hardware Requirements The following table includes hardware requirements for installing ALM on a server machine. CPU Windows: Quad Core AMD64 processor or equivalent x86-compatible processor Linux: Quad Core AMD 64 bit or equivalent x86 compatible processor Memory (RAM) Minimum: 8 GB Free disk Space Minimum: 8 GB Recommended ALM Server-Side Environments The following table includes recommended configurations for each operating system. Operating System Database Server Web Server Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise SP1 64 Bit Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 SP2 Microsoft IIS 7.5 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.4 64 Bit Oracle 11.2.0.3 Apache 2.2 Supported ALM Server-Side Configurations The following applications are supported for installing ALM on a server machine. You may use any combination of these applications. To ensure best performance and quick support resolutions, we recommend using the recommended environments described in the section "System Requirements " above. HP ALM Docs on Tap General HP ALM (12.00) Page 8 of 154
  • 9. Operating Systems l Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise SP1 64 Bit l Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Standard 64 Bit l Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.3 64 Bit l Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.4 64 Bit l Oracle Enterprise Linux 6.3 64 Bit l Oracle Enterprise Linux 6.4 64 Bit l SUSE Linux 11.0 Note: l It is strongly recommended that ALM be deployed only on 64 bit systems in Windows production environments. l Localized editions of ALM are supported only on Windows operating systems. l Oracle Enterprise Linux versions are supported provided they are compatible with the supported versions of Red Hat Linux. Database Servers l Oracle 10.2.0.5 l Oracle 11.2.0.3 l Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 SP2 l Microsoft SQL Server 2012 SP1 Note: l All database servers, unless otherwise stated, have been validated on 64 bit configurations. l HP ALM is certified to work with Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) for Microsoft and Oracle databases. Implementation of TDE does have an impact on system performance, for details reach out to the database vendor providing encryption. Applications Servers The Application server functionality is now built in to the ALM platform and there is no need to install a third party application server (WebLogic, WebSphere, and JBoss) from version 11.50 and later. The HP ALM application server uses JDK7 (1.7) and supports 64 bit JVM. HP ALM Docs on Tap General HP ALM (12.00) Page 9 of 154
  • 10. Web Servers l Apache 2.2 l Microsoft IIS 7.5 l Microsoft IIS 8.0 Note: l By default, application servers include HTTP servers. If you need additional functionality a web server can be added. l HP will certify the major and minor releases of Apache (e.g. Apache 2.2) while all minor-minor releases of Apache (e.g. version 2.2.x) will not undergo specific certifications as it is expected that minor-minor software releases from Apache will maintain full compatibility. Virtual Environments VMWare ESX/ESXi Server 5.0 and later Note: HP ALM is certified to work with VMWare ESX/ESXi. Due to the rapidly evolving architectures provided by virtualization vendors as long as the above stated vendor guarantees full compatibility of the virtualized environment to the HP ALM approved system requirements for physical hardware, HP ALM will function as designed. Full Disk Encryption Full disk encryption (FDE) is supported for all system components, including database, server, repository server, and client machines. Implementation of FDE, does have an impact on system performance. For details, contact the vendor that provides the encryption. ALM Client System Requirements This section describes the client system requirements for installing ALM on client machines. CPU Dual Core 1.6 Ghz (or higher) or equivalent compatible Memory (RAM) Minimum: 2 GB Free Disk Space Minimum: 2 GB HP ALM Docs on Tap General HP ALM (12.00) Page 10 of 154
  • 11. Recommended ALM Client Environments The following section includes recommended configurations for each operating system. Operating System Browsers Office Suites Microsoft Windows 7 SP1 32 Bit Microsoft Internet Explorer 10 Microsoft Office 2010 SP2 32 Bit ALM Desktop Client Supported Environments This section describes the ALM desktop client supported environments. Prerequisites l Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 / Microsoft .NET Framework 4.5 l Microsoft Office 2010 / Microsoft Office 2013 Operating System l Microsoft Windows 7 SP1 32 Bit l Microsoft Windows 7 SP1 64 Bit l Microsoft Windows 8 32 Bit (Requires Microsoft Fix 449677. For more details, see http://support.microsoft.com/kb/2870007. l Microsoft Windows 8 64 Bit (Requires Microsoft Fix 449677. For more details, see http://support.microsoft.com/kb/2870007. l Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 64 Bit Note: l If you are integrating Quality Center with other HP testing tools, you must modify the DCOM permissions on your client machine. l DCOM is not required for running Functional test sets (server-side execution). l Functional test sets are available only in ALM Edition. l HP ALM Client on Windows 64 bit runs in WOW64 mode. l You can work with the HP ALM desktop client using a remote desktop. HP ALM Docs on Tap General HP ALM (12.00) Page 11 of 154
  • 12. Browsers l Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 l Microsoft Internet Explorer 9 l Microsoft Internet Explorer 10 Note: For customers who have restrictions on plugins in their browsers, such as ActiveX, HP ALM can be loaded in the HP ALM Explorer Add-In. For more information on downloading and installing the Add-In, see the HP Application Lifecycle Management Installation and Upgrade Guide. Office Suites l Microsoft Office 2010 SP2 32 Bit l Microsoft Office 2013 32 Bit Note: Only 32 bit versions of Microsoft Office are supported. Virtual Environments l Citrix XenApp 6.0 or higher l Microsoft Terminal Services l Remote Desktop Services Note: HP ALM is certified to work with Citrix XenApp, Microsoft Terminal Services and Remote Desktop Services. Due to the rapidly evolving architectures provided by Virtualization vendors as long as the above stated vendor guarantees full compatibility of the virtualized environment to the HP ALM approved system requirements for physical hardware, then HP ALM will function as designed. Other Configuration Settings l Screen Resolution (Minimum): 1024x768 l DPI Setting: 100% HP ALM Docs on Tap General HP ALM (12.00) Page 12 of 154
  • 13. ALM Web Client Supported Environments This section describes the ALM Web client supported environments. Operating System l Microsoft Windows 7 SP1 32 Bit l Microsoft Windows 7 SP1 64 Bit l Microsoft Windows 8 32 Bit l Microsoft Windows 8 64 Bit l Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.3 64 Bit l Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.4 64 Bit l Oracle Enterprise Linux 6.3 64 Bit l Oracle Enterprise Linux 6.4 64 Bit l Ubuntu 12.04 LTS l Apple Mac OS X (On Macbook Pro only) Browsers l Microsoft Internet Explorer 10 (On Microsoft Windows only) l Google Chrome 31 (On Microsoft Windows and Apple Mac OS only) l Mozilla Firefox 26 (On Microsoft Windows, Linux OS only) l Apple Safari 6.1 (On Mac OS only) Virtual Environments l Citrix XenApp 6.0 or higher l Microsoft Terminal Services l Remote Desktop Services Note: HP ALM is certified to work with Citrix XenApp, Microsoft Terminal Services and Remote Desktop Services. Due to the rapidly evolving architectures provided by Virtualization vendors as long as the above stated vendor guarantees full compatibility of the virtualized environment to the HP ALM approved system requirements for physical hardware, then HP ALM will function as designed HP ALM Docs on Tap General HP ALM (12.00) Page 13 of 154
  • 14. Other Configuration Settings l Screen Resolution: 1024x768 (minimum); 1600x1050 (maximum) l DPI Setting: 100%,125% HP ALM Lab Service for Remote Test Execution System Requirements This section describes the system requirements for installing HP ALM Lab Service for remote test execution. Processor CPU Type: Intel Core, Pentium, AMD or compatible Speed: 2 GHz or higher recommended, 1 GHz minimum Memory (RAM) Minimum: 1GB Note: Memory needs depend on the number of add-ins. Disk Space Minimum: 1GB Note: You must also have an additional 120 MB of free space on the system disk. Operating System l Windows Server 2008 (SP2) 32 or 64 bit l Windows Server 2008 R2 (SP1) 64 bit l Windows 7 (SP1) 32 or 64 bit l Windows 8 32 or 64 bit l Windows Server 2012 64 bit Operating Systems Supporting Auto Login l Windows 7 (SP1) 32 or 64 bit l Windows Server 2008 R2 (SP1) 64 bit HP ALM Performance Center System Requirements This section describes the system requirements for installing ALM for Performance Center, and Performance Center components. Performance Center Server Configurations HP ALM Docs on Tap General HP ALM (12.00) Page 14 of 154
  • 15. This section describes the system requirements for installing a Performance Center Server. Processor CPU Type:: Intel Core, Pentium, Xeon, AMD or compatible Speed: 2 GHz or higher recommended, 1 GHz minimum. Memory (RAM) Minimum: 4GB Available Hard Disk Space Minimum: 5 GB Screen Resolution Minimum: 1024 x 768 Operating System l Windows Server 2008 R2 (SP1) 64 bit (Recommended) l Windows Server 2012 64 bit Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 8, 9, or 10 Web Server IIS 7.5 or 8.0 Recommended ALM and Performance Center Configurations The following table describes the recommended configuration for Performance Center server components. They should be used along with the recommended ALM server configurations above. Performance Center Server Operating System Windows 2008 R2 (SP1) 64 bit Host Operating System Windows 2008 R2 (SP1) 64 bit Host and Windows Standalone Load Generator Configurations This section describes the system requirements for installing a Performance Center Host and a standalone Load Generator on Windows. Processor CPU Type: Intel Core, Pentium, Xeon, AMD or compatible Speed:1.6 GHz minimum. 2 GHz or higher recommended Note for Pentium Processors: Intel Hyper-Threading technology is not supported. Hyper-Threading can be disabled in the BIOS. For more information, see: http://www.intel.com/support/processors/pentium4/sb/CS-017371.htm Memory (RAM) Recommended: 4 GB or higher Minimum: 2GB HP ALM Docs on Tap General HP ALM (12.00) Page 15 of 154
  • 16. Available Hard Disk Space Minimum: 40 GB Screen Resolution Minimum: 1024 x 768 Operating System l Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit l Windows 7 SP1 32 and 64-bit l Windows 8 64-bit l Windows Server 2012 64 bit Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 8, 9 or 10 Linux Standalone Load Generator Configurations This section describes the supported operating systems and CPU types for installing a standalone Load Generator on Linux systems. Processor CPU Type: Intel Core, Pentium, Xeon, AMD or compatible Operating System l Red Hat Linux Enterprise Linux 5.8 or 6.0, 32 bit l Red Hat Linux Enterprise Linux 5.8 or 6.4, 64 bit l Ubuntu Server 10.04LTS, 32 or 64 bit l Ubuntu Server 12.04LTS, 32 or 64 bit l Oracle Enterprise Linux 5.0 RH, 32 or 64 bit l Oracle Enterprise Linux 6.0 RH, 6.0UEK, 32 bit l Oracle Enterprise Linux 6.0 RH, 6.4UEK, 64 bit l Amazon Linux AMI 2012.03 or later, 32 or 64 bit Note: Oracle Enterprise Linux versions are supported as long as they are compatible with the supported versions of Red Hat Linux. HP ALM Docs on Tap General HP ALM (12.00) Page 16 of 154
  • 17. Standalone VuGen and Standalone Analysis Configurations This section describes the system requirements for installing Standalone VuGen and Standalone Analysis. Processor CPU Type: Intel Core, Pentium, Xeon, AMD or compatible Speed:2 GHz or higher recommended, 1.6 GHz minimum. Memory (RAM) Recommended: 4 GB or higher Minimum: 2GB Available Hard Disk Space Minimum:40 GB Screen Resolution Minimum: 1024 x 768 Operating System l Windows 7 (SP1) 32 and 64-bit l Windows Server 2008 R2 (SP1) 64 bit l Windows 8 64 bit l Windows Server 2012 64 bit (On Standalone Analysis only) Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 8, 9, or 10 MI Listener System Requirements This following table describes the system requirements for the MI Listener. Processor CPU Type: Intel Core, Pentium, Xeon, AMD or compatible Speed: 2 GHz minimum, 4 GHz or higher recommended Memory (RAM) Minimum: 2GB Note:Memory needs depend on the number of Load Generators and Controllers connected to the MI Listener. Operating System l Windows Server 2008 R2 (SP1) 64 bit l Windows 7 (SP1) 32 and 64-bit l Windows 8 64-bit l Windows Server 2012 64 bit HP ALM Docs on Tap General HP ALM (12.00) Page 17 of 154
  • 18. Administration Default ALM Parameters You can set the following default site configuration parameters: Parameter Description ADD_NEW_ USERS_FROM_ PROJECT (formerly CUSTOM_ ENABLE_ USER_ ADMIN) If this parameter is set to N, you can add new ALM users from Site Administration (Site Users tab) only. If this parameter is set to Y (default), new ALM users can also be added from Project Customization. In the Project Users page, click Add User. The Add User to Project dialog box opens. If this parameter is set to Y, a New button is available for adding new ALM users. ATTACH_ MAX_SIZE The maximum size (in kilobytes) of an attachment that can be sent with email from ALM. If the attachment size is greater than the specified value, the email is sent without the attachment. By default, the maximum email attachment size is 3,000 KB. ATTACH_ TOTAL_ MAX_SIZE The maximum size (in kilobytes) of all attachments that can be sent with email from ALM, taking into account the value of "ATTACH_ MAX_SIZE" above. If the size of all the attachments is greater than the specified value, the email is sent without the attachments. By default, the maximum email attachment size is 10,000 KB. AUTO_MAIL_ WITH_ ATTACHMENT (formerly SAQ_MAIL_ WITH_ ATTACHMENT) If this parameter is set to Y (default), defect email is sent with attachments. This applies only if you select Send mail automatically in the Site Projects tab. Note: The former parameter name is supported for purposes of backward compatibility. AUTO_MAIL_ WITH_ HISTORY (formerly SAQ_MAIL_ WITH_ HISTORY) If this parameter is set to Y (default), defect email is sent with the history. This applies only if you select Send mail automatically in the Site Projects tab. Note: The former parameter name is supported for purposes of backward compatibility. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 18 of 154
  • 19. Parameter Description BASE_ REPOSITORY_ PATH The base repository path. The ALM and Site Administration repositories are sub-folders of this repository. If you change this parameter value, new projects you create are stored in this location. After you change the value of this parameter, you must restart all servers in the cluster. The initial repository path is set during ALM server configuration. COMMUNICATION_ SECURITY_ PASSPHRASE Communication between HP ALM and other HP BTO applications is enabled after authentication by a Single Sign-On (SSO) token through REST API. This parameter contains the passphrase that ALM uses to encrypt the SSO token. The initial parameter value is the SSO communication security passphrase that was entered during the ALM server configuration. Changing the COMMUNICATION_SECURITY_PASSPHRASE parameter on ALM requires that the equivalent value on other servers will be updated as well, for example, on Performance Center server and Host machines. CREATE_ HTTP_ SESSION You can use this parameter if you are working with load balancing over a cluster of application servers. If the parameter is set to Y, ALM creates an HTTP session. This causes the load balancer to operate in sticky mode, meaning that after a request sent by a client is directed to a particular node in the cluster, all subsequent requests sent by that client are directed to the same node. By default, this parameter is set to N. DISABLE_ VERBOSE_ ERROR_ MESSAGES This parameter is a security feature that controls the level of detail that error messages display. If the parameter is set to N, the user can view system details connected to the error. By default, this parameter is set to Y. EVENT_ LOG_PURGE_ PERIOD_ DAYS Performance Center: The time interval in days that deletable events remain in the EVENT_LOG database table. By default, the value is set to 60. If you set the value to -1, the events period is unlimited. LDAP_ SEARCH_ USER_ CRITERIA A comma-separated list of ALM user properties to be used as LDAP search criteria, if the Domain Authentication property does not contain the user's distinguished name (DN). The order of the properties defines their priority if multiple results are found. The following are the possible values: username, email, fullname, phone, description. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 19 of 154
  • 20. Parameter Description LIBRARY_ FUSE The parameter value indicates the base number for calculating the maximum number of entities for a library, in order to maintain optimal performance. By default, the value is 2500. Calculation is performed as follows: l Maximum number of tests in a library = LIBRARY_FUSE * 1 (2500 by default) l Maximum number of resources in a library = LIBRARY_FUSE * 0.25 (625 by default) l Maximum number of business components in a library = LIBRARY_FUSE * 0.25 (625 by default) A validation of this value is performed when you create baselines, import libraries, or synchronize libraries. Business Process Testing: We recommend you set this parameter to a high value, such as 300000. For information on a related parameter, see "REQUIREMENTS_ LIBRARY_FUSE" on page 42. LICENSE_ ARCHIVE_ PERIOD The time interval in days during which license usage is archived. License usage information before this period is removed from the archive. By default, the value is set to 365 days. If you set the value to -1, the license archive period is unlimited. LOCK_ TIMEOUT The maximum number of hours that ALM objects can remain locked. After this time, the lock is removed. By default, the value is set to 10 hours. MAIL_ FORMAT The format ALM uses to send email. By default, the format is set to HTML. To instruct ALM to send email as plain text, change the value to Text. MAIL_ INTERVAL The time interval in minutes for sending a defect email according to your mail configuration settings. By default, the value is set to 10 minutes. Note that this applies only if you select Send mail automatically in the Site Projects tab. MAIL_ MESSAGE_ CHARSET The character set used by ALM to send email to users. By default, the value is set to UTF-8. MAIL_ PROTOCOL Displays the mail service used to send email messages to users. To configure the mail protocol, use the Settings button. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 20 of 154
  • 21. Parameter Description MAIL_ SERVER_ HOST Displays the server name used by the SMTP mail service. To configure the server name, use the Settings button. For information on a related parameter, see "MAIL_SERVER_PORT" on page 36. MAIL_SHOW_ SITE_NAME Indicates whether the site name is displayed in the subject of the mail. This parameter can be either a project parameter or a site parameter. If the parameter is defined in both site and project tables, the project value is considered. The default value is N. REPORT_ QUERY_ RECORDS_ LIMIT The maximum number of records that can be retrieved from the database for an Excel report. If you set the value to -1, the number is unlimited. REPORT_ QUERY_ TIMEOUT The maximum length of time in seconds that ALM waits for an SQL query for an Excel report to be executed. If the query takes longer than this time to be executed, the query is canceled. RESTRICT_ SERVER_ FOLDERS This parameter enables you to access restricted-access server directories using the OTA ExtendedStorage.ServerPath property. If this parameter does not exist, or is set to Y, you can only use the ExtendedStorage.ServerPath property to access the following directories: l the Site Administration (SA) directory l the root directory for a project l the attach subdirectory for a project l the baseline subdirectory for a project l the checkouts subdirectory for a project l the components subdirectory for a project l the hist subdirectory for a project l the resources subdirectory for a project l the StyleSheets subdirectory for a project l the tests subdirectory for a project If this parameter is set to N, you can access all server directories using the ExtendedStorage.ServerPath property. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 21 of 154
  • 22. Parameter Description SITE_ ANALYSIS If this parameter is set to Y (default), you can track ALM license usage over time from the Site Analysis tab. If this parameter is set to N, the Site Analysis tab is unavailable. SUPPORT_ TESTSET_ END If this parameter is set to Y (default), UFT closes automatically when a test set is finished running. UPLOAD_ RESULTS_ AFTER_ TEST_RUN Test results are, by default, saved in ALM. When running an automated test from within ALM you can avoid saving large test results. Large test results might be produced when runnning UFT GUI tests, UFT API tests, or automated business process tests. ALWAYS. Default. Always save test results. NEVER. Never save test results. ON_FAILURE. Save test results if run failed. WAIT_ BEFORE_ DISCONNECT The time interval in minutes that the ALM client can be inactive before it is disconnected from the ALM server machine. Disconnecting the client enables the license to be used by another ALM user. By default, the value is set to 600 minutes. For performance reasons, it is recommended to set a value of at least 60 minutes. If you set the value to -1, ALM is not disconnected, regardless of how long the client is inactive. For more information, see "AUTO_LOGOUT_ON_ SERVER_DISCONNECT" on page 24. Optional ALM Parameters You can add the following optional site configuration parameters: Parameter (A – Z) Description ALLOW_ MULTIPLE_ VALUES This parameter determines whether the Allow Multiple Values check box is visible in the Project Entities page in Project Customization. If this parameter is set to N, then the Allow Multiple Values check box is unavailable. If this parameter does not exist or is set to "Y", then the Allow Multiple Values check box is available. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 22 of 154
  • 23. Parameter (A – Z) Description ALLOW_UPDATE_ USER_ PROPERTIES_ FROM_ CUSTOMIZATION User details are set in Site Administration. A project administrator cannot change details of project users in Project Customization. If this parameter is set to Y, the project administrator is able to change the details of project users in Project Customization. This option may cause a security risk, as it allows the project administrator to replace a user's e- mail address with his own. By doing so, the project administrator can then use the Forgot Password link to reset and change a user's password. If this parameter does not exist, or is set to N, only the user can change his details in Project Customization. ALLOW_WEBUI_ ACCESS This parameter determines whether to allow access to Web UI client. Access is allowed only to users who belong to at least one group with Allow Web UI Project Access permission. If this parameter is set to Y or is not defined, ALM can be accessed through a web-based client user interface. If this parameter is set to N, ALM can only be accessed through a desktop-based client user interface. The default is Y. ASYNC_ MAIL_ENABLED If this parameter is set to Y (default), emails are sent asynchronously. This means that the email is queued to be sent, and you can continue working. If an email is undeliverable: l An email notification is sent to you, if the mail server is up. l A warning is added to the Site Administration log. If this parameter is set to N, emails are sent synchronously—meaning, emails are sent immediately and you continue working only when the mail is sent successfully. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 23 of 154
  • 24. Parameter (A – Z) Description AUTO_LOGOUT_ ON_SERVER_ DISCONNECT The ALM server can disconnect an ALM client session. This occurs if: l The site administrator disconnects the session. l The session is automatically disconnected, according to the inactivity time interval setting. For more information on setting a timeout, see "WAIT_BEFORE_DISCONNECT" on page 22. The ALM client machine displays a message, informing the user that the session has been disconnected. If this parameter is set to Y, the client machine also automatically performs logout actions and returns the user to the ALM Login window. This ensures that the user does not continue to work in a session which is no longer connected to the server. If this parameter is set to N, no logout action is performed on disconnect. Note: If this parameter is set to Y in external authentication mode, the client machine returns the user to the ALM Connect to project window. AUTO_MAIL_ SUBJECT_ FORMAT (formerly SAQFORMAT This parameter enables you to customize the subject line of defect email sent automatically to users. For example, you can define a subject line such as Defect no. 4321 has changed by providing the value Defect no. ?BG_BUG_ID has changed , where Defect no. and has changed are strings, and BG_ BUG_ID is an ALM field name. Note: The former parameter name is supported for purposes of backward compatibility. AUTO_ MAIL_USER_ NOTIFICATION This parameter enables you to prevent ALM sending automatic email notification to project administrators when users are assigned or removed from a project in Site Administration. If this parameter is set to N, then automatic notification is not sent to project administrators. If this parameter does not exist, is empty, or is set to Y, then automatic notification is sent. BACKWARD_ SUPPORT_ ALL_DOMAINS_ PROJECTS This parameter enables the use of DomainsList and ProjectsList properties for the purposes of backward compatibility. If this parameter is set to Y, then the DomainsList and ProjectsList properties are supported. If the parameter does not exist or is empty, the default value is N, and these properties are not supported. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 24 of 154
  • 25. Parameter (A – Z) Description BV_EXCEL_ REPORT_ MAX_ROWS This parameter defines the maximum number of rows that can be included in a Business View Excel Report. The default value is 100000. CLEAN_ ORPHAN_ ANALYSIS_ DATA_ JOB_SLEEP_ INTERVAL This parameter defines how often orphan analysis data is cleaned up off the file repository. The data is cleaned up by the Orphan Analysis Data File Cleanup job. Define a value in minutes where the minimum is 10080 (one week). The default value is 43200 (one month). COPY_ CHANGES_ USER_FIELDS (formerly COPY_PASTE_ CHANGES_ OWNER) This parameter enables you to specify that the user who copies a record is listed in the specified User List fields of the copy. The value of this parameter is a comma-separated list of User List fields. For example, set the value of the parameter to BG_DETECTED_BY. Assume defect 10 is detected by user Cecil_qc, and user Shelly_qc copies defect 10. ALM creates a copy of the defect with Shelly_qc as the user who detected the defect, not Cecil_qc. CUSTOM_HELP_ MENU_LINK This parameter enables you to add a custom entry to the Help menu that links to a URL address. For example, if you want to allow users local access to ALM product movies, you can save the movies on the server, and create a link to a movies index page. Use the following syntax to enter a parameter value: <link alias>;<URL>, where the values of both <link alias> and <URL> are surrounded by quotation marks, and separated by a semicolon. For example, set the value of the parameter to "MyBusiness - Online Help Page";"http://mybusiness/ALMHelp". The above example adds the MyBusiness - Online Help Page entry to the Help menu. Clicking the entry opens a custom Web page located at http://mybusiness/ALMHelp. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 25 of 154
  • 26. Parameter (A – Z) Description CUSTOM_ PREREQUISITES_ PAGE_URL This parameter enables you to handle missing prerequisites during the deployment phase of starting the ALM client. The value of this parameter is either: l A valid URL to a page that contains links for downloading alternate prerequisites. l NO_URL or blank. The deployment phase opens the default URL. The default value is blank. Note: Setting a separate URL for each prerequisite is not supported. The page must contain information for all prerequisites. DASHBOARD_ PAGE_ITEM_ LIMIT By default, dashboard pages can include up to four graphs. This parameter enables you to set a different number of maximum graphs that dashboard pages can include. Increasing the number of graphs may reduce the system's performance. DEBUG_ CLOSURE_ LOG_DOM_PROJ This parameter enables the creation of a server log for debugging issues related to closure. This can be helpful when investigating missing or redundant results of closure queries, or suspected performance related issues. Caution: This parameter should not be enabled unless debugging is required by support for specific reasons. Delete this parameter if not in use for a specific debugging purpose. The closure log can be enabled per project, per domain, or per site. Use one of the following formats for the parameter value: l Per project: <domain name>;<project name> For example, DEFAULT;project1 For more than one project in a domain, separate the projects with a semi-colon. For example, for two projects named project1 and project2 in the DEFAULT domain, use: DEFAULT;project1; DEFAULT;project2 l Per domain: <domain name>;___DEBUG_ALWAYS___ to indicate all projects in the specified domain For example, for the DEFAULT domain, use: DEFAULT;___DEBUG_ ALWAYS___ For more than one domain, separate the domains with a semi-colon. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 26 of 154
  • 27. Parameter (A – Z) Description l Per site:___DEBUG_ALWAYS___;___DEBUG_ALWAYS___ to indicate all domains, and all projects in each domain Note: The DEBUG_ALWAYS value uses three underscores as a prefix and suffix. The log files are saved to the location for server log files, as specified in the Site Administration Server tab > Client Log File Settings. The log files are not purged automatically. You must delete the closure log files manually when the closure log is no longer required. DISABLE_ ASYNC_ CUSTOMIZATION_ LOAD This parameter affects customization loading by OTA. If this parameter is set to N, customization is loaded asynchronously. If this parameter is set to Y, customization is loaded synchronously. The default is N. DISABLE_ COMMAND_ INTERFACE If this parameter is set to Y (default), only users belonging to the TDAdmin group can use the OTA Command object. If it is set to N, any user can use it. If it is set to ALL, no users can use it. DISABLE_ CONSOLE_ DEBUG_INFO This parameter enables you to access the ALM debug info console page (access to it is disabled by default). The console, if enabled, is accessible using http://<qcserver>/qcbin/tdservlet?method=debuginfo or http://<qcserver>/qcbin/debug. If this parameter exists and is set to N, the debug info console page can be accessed. DISABLE_ DEFAULT_ VALUES If this parameter is set to Y, default values for certain entities (such as defects, tests, and test configurations) cannot be set per user per project. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 27 of 154
  • 28. Parameter (A – Z) Description DISABLE_ EXTENDED_ STORAGE This parameter controls user access to the OTA ExtendedStorage object. This is a security feature that can be used to limit access to the file system of the project. If this parameter is set to Y (default), the ExtendedStorage object cannot be accessed from TDConnection. Users can access the object from a specific entity for read-only, but no changes can be made. If it is set to N, the ExtendedStorage object can be accessed by all users, from a specific entity or from TDConnection. Note: This parameter can impact how certain add-ins run, such as the HP Screen Recorder. For details, see the documentation for the individual add-ins, available from the HP Application Lifecycle Management Add-ins page (Help > Add-ins) or the HP Application Lifecycle Management Tools page (Help > ALM Tools). DISABLE_GET_ CHILDREN_ LISTS_WITH_ VERSIONING If this parameter is set to Y, this parameter disables certain performance enhancements that improve the speed at which various modules display data (such as entity trees). This parameter is relevant for version controlled projects. The default is N. DISABLE_HTTP_ COMPRESSION By default, the data transferred from the ALM server to clients is compressed to improve performance. If this parameter exists and is set to Y, the data compression is disabled. DISABLE_ PASSWORD_ OTA_ ENCRYPTION By default, the OTA TDConnection.Password property is encrypted. If this parameter exists and is set to Y, encryption for this property is disabled. Note: Setting this parameter has no effect on password encryption during transport to the server machine. DISPLAY_ LAST_USER_ INFO This parameter enables you to add additional security to the client ALM Login window. By default, ALM displays the last user login information (user name, domain and project). If this parameter is set to N, the last user login information is not saved on the client machine and is not displayed in the ALM Login window. To activate this parameter, you must log in to ALM, log out, and log in again. If this parameter is set to Y or does not exist, the last user information is displayed. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 28 of 154
  • 29. Parameter (A – Z) Description DOWNLOAD_ REST_ ATTACHMENTS This parameter determines whether attachments are downloaded automatically in REST. If the value is Y, attachments are downloaded only after the browser prompts the user to open or save the attachment. If the value is N, the browser downloads the attachment automatically The default is Y. EI_DELETE_ INTERVAL This parameter defines the interval, in hours, between jobs that delete execution items from the database. If an execution item was marked as Deleted for more than 10 hours, it is deleted by the job. The default is 10. ENABLE_ COLUMN_ VISIBILITY_ TRACKING This parameter defines whether fields can be made invisible in the GUI. The available options are: l Y. Fields can be made invisible in the GUI. l N. Fields cannot be made invisible in the GUI By default, the parameter is set to N. ENABLE_ CREATE_ DOCGEN This parameter enables or disables the Document Generator menu item in the masthead menu. The available options are: l Y. Document Generator is enabled.. l N. Document Generator is disabled. By default, the parameter is set to N. ENABLE_ CREATE_ DOCGEN_ FAVORITE This parameter defines whether new project documents can be added to your favorites list. The available options are: l Y. Project documents can be added to the favorites list. l N. Project documents cannot be added to the favorites list. By default, the parameter is set to N. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 29 of 154
  • 30. Parameter (A – Z) Description ENABLE_ CREATE_ LEGACY_ EXCEL_ REPORT This parameter defines whether Microsoft Excel reports can be created in the Analysis View module. The available options are: l Y. Reports can be created. l N. Reports cannot be created. The default setting is N. ENABLE_ CREATE_ STANDARD_ REPORT This parameter defines whether standard reports can be created in the Analysis View module. The available options are: l Y. Reports can be created. l N. Reports cannot be created. Only existing reports are available. The default setting is N. ENABLE_ ENTITY_ SELECTION_ TREE_REQ_ MOVE_TO By default, the MoveTo event is not triggered when navigating up/down in a tree. However, in Quality Center version 10.00, the MoveTo event was triggered when navigating up/down in a Requirements tree. For backward compatibility, this parameter enables you to define whether the MoveTo event is triggered in when navigating up/down in a Requirements tree. The available options are: l Y. The MoveTo event is triggered. l N. The MoveTo event is not triggered. The default setting is N. ENABLE_JMX_ CONSOLE By default, JMX Console is disabled. This parameter allows you to enabled JMX Console for debugging purposes. The available options are: l Y. JMX Console is enabled. l N. JMX Console is disabled. The default setting is N. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 30 of 154
  • 31. Parameter (A – Z) Description ENABLE_ OUTPUT_ SANITIZATION This parameter determines whether REST output sanitization is available. The available options are: l Y. REST output sanitization is enabled. l N. REST output sanitization is disabled. The default setting is Y. ENABLE_ PERFORMANCE_ MONITOR_BIRT_ REPORTS By default, QC Sense reports are disabled. This parameter allows you to generate QC Sense reports for debugging purposes, The available options are: l Y. QC Sense reports are enabled. l N. QC Sense reports are disabled. The default setting is N. ENABLE_XSRF_ VALIDATION This parameter enables or disables the XSRF token validation sent from the client on request The available options are: l Y. The XSRF token validation is enabled. l N. The XSRF token validation is disabled. The default setting is Y. ENTITY_LINK_ HOST This parameter enables you to set the mail server host name used in the link to an entity when ALM mails an entity. By default, ALM uses the default host name specified during installation. For details, see MAIL_ SERVER_PORT. ENTITY_LINK_ PORT This parameter enables you to set the mail server port number used in the link to an entity when ALM mails an entity. By default, ALM uses the default port number specified during installation. ENTITY_LINK_ SCHEMA This parameter enables you to set the schema used in the link to an entity when ALM mails an entity. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 31 of 154
  • 32. Parameter (A – Z) Description ENTITY_TABLE_ NAMES_FOR_ FIXING_UPDATE_ PERMISSIONS_ INCONSISTENCY This parameter determines which database tables are checked by the verifier to find potential permission inconsistencies that are then fixed by the repairer. Permission inconsistencies occur when a user group has permission to modify specific fields of an entity, but does not have permission to modify the entity itself. EXTENDED_ MEMO_ FIELDS This parameter extends the maximum number of memo-type user-defined fields per entity to 15 instead of five. The default value is N. To extend the number of memo-type fields, set the parameter to Y. FAST_ RECONNECT_ MODE This parameter defines options for reconnecting after a user session expires. This parameter is not valid for external authentication, since the user must always be certified when reconnecting. Values include: 0. Disables the reconnect option that bypasses reload of customization if no major change has been made. Users must manually log out and log in again when the session expires. 100 (default). Password authentication is required. The user must enter a password to reconnect and continue working in ALM. 200. The user does not need to enter password information to reconnect to ALM. User authentication is performed using the current password. If the user's password has been changed since the last log in, the user cannot reconnect. The user must log out and log in again using the new password. Note: If the user has been removed from the ALM Users list, the user cannot reconnect. FAVORITES_ DEPTH Defines the number of most recently used favorite views displayed on the Favorites menu. By default, ALM displays the four most recently used views on the menu. To hide the list of recently used views completely, set the parameter to 0. FETCH_LIMIT To optimize performance, the maximum number of records retrieved and displayed in ALM grids is limited. This parameter enables you to change the default limit. If this parameter does not exist, the maximum number of records displayed is limited to 500. If the value of this parameter is set to 0, all results are displayed. For information on a related parameter, see "GROUP_FETCH_LIMIT" on page 34. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 32 of 154
  • 33. Parameter (A – Z) Description FILE_ EXTENSION_ BLACK_LIST_ DOWNLOAD The value is the semicolon delimited string with the file extensions that are not allowed to be downloaded via open attachments, REST API, or FTP Explorer. Note: l Imported or restored projects are not blocked even if their repository contains files of blocked file types. l Projects upgraded from previous versions still contain files of blocked file types that already exist in the repository. l During optimized repository migration, files of blocked file types are not blocked. FILE_ EXTENSION_ BLACK_LIST_ UPLOAD The value is the semicolon delimited string with the file extensions that are not allowed to be uploaded via open attachments, extended storage, REST API, or FTP Explorer. Note: l Imported or restored projects are not blocked even if their repository contains files of blocked file types. l Projects upgraded from previous versions still contain files of blocked file types that already exist in the repository. l During optimized repository migration, files of blocked file types are not blocked. FORCE_LOGIN_ SSL_MODE If this parameter is set to Y, only the login process is sent over SSL (HTTPS). All other communication is sent without SSL (using HTTP). Note: ALM must be configured to work with SSL. For information on a related parameter, see "LOGIN_SSL_PORT" on page 36. FROM_EMAIL_ ADDRESS If a user clicks the Forgot Password link in the ALM Login window, an email notification is sent to the user with a link to specify a new password. This parameter enables you to change the email address in the email From field. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 33 of 154
  • 34. Parameter (A – Z) Description FTP_PORT The port number of the FTP service that enables you to browse ALM project repositories. . Recommended values are 21 or 2121. Note: l Defining the parameter starts the FTP service on the specified port. l Reconfiguring the parameter restarts the FTP service. l Deleting the parameter stops the FTP service. GET_COVERAGE_ FROM_BL_FOR_ PINNED_TESTSET This parameter enables you to get coverage from the baseline (and not from current view) when selecting tests for a requirement to be added to a pinned test set. The default value is N. GRAPH_RESULT_ LIFESPAN When a graph is shared via the Share Analysis Item command in the Analysis View module, the graph retrieves data from a cache. By default, the cache information is updated every 60 minutes. This parameter enables you to configure the frequency, in minutes, at which the cache is updated. The minimum value you can assign to the parameter is 5 minutes. The maximum value is 60 minutes. GROUP_FETCH_ LIMIT To optimize performance, the maximum number of records retrieved and displayed per group when a group by filter is applied to ALM grids is limited. This parameter enables you to change the default limit. If this parameter does not exist, the maximum number of records displayed per group is limited to 100. If the value of this parameter is set to 0, all results are displayed for each group. For information on a related parameter, see "FETCH_LIMIT" on page 32. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 34 of 154
  • 35. Parameter (A – Z) Description INHERIT_ MODULE_ ACCESS_ TO_VIEWS Some modules are logically connected to views in other modules. For example, the Business Models module is related to business linkage in the Requirements module and the Test Plan module. Project managers can hide access to modules for certain users/groups. This parameter indicates whether such related views should be hidden if their "parent" modules are hidden. Note: This parameter affects only views related to the Business Models module. Default: N (meaning, related views are not hidden) INPUT_ VALIDATION_ LOGPATH This parameter contains the input validation framework log folder location. If the parameter is not defined, the input validation error log is created in repository/log/InputValidation. INPUT_ VALIDATION_ MODE This parameter controls the input validation framework mode. The available options are: l OFF. No input validation is performed. l LOG. Perform hidden validation. Do not throw exceptions but log all errors. l ON. Full input validation is performed. The default setting is ON. LAB_MAX_DB_ HANDLERS This parameter enables you to define the maximum number of connections to the database allowed for LAB_PROJECT. The default value is 100. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 35 of 154
  • 36. Parameter (A – Z) Description LDAP_IMPORT_ ATTRIBUTE_ MASK This parameter enables you to define a regular expression that can be used to distinguish between different values for an LDAP attribute when importing users from an LDAP directory. When importing users, ALM chooses a value for the attribute that matches the regular expression. The parameter should be of the format: <LDAP attribute name> = <regular expression>, where <LDAP attribute name> is the name of the LDAP attribute whose value you want to choose, and <regular expression> is a regular expression. This regular expression should conform to the standard Java syntax for regular expressions. For example, a parameter value uid=^Dw+$ would choose values for the LDAP attribute uid consisting of a non-digit followed by any number of word characters (letters, numerals or the underscore character). LDAP_RESULT_ SIZE_LIMIT The maximum number of results that LDAP returns for a filtered query. The default value is 1000. A value less than the recommended minimum value of 100 can slow LDAP imports and searches. A value greater than the recommended maximum value of 10000 can cause the server to run out of memory. LDAP_TIMEOUT (formerly DIRECTORY_ TIME_LIMIT_ CONSTRAINT) The length of time, in milliseconds, that ALM waits before canceling an LDAP operation. The time limit on LDAP operations prevents a situation where LDAP encounters a problem and causes ALM to wait indefinitely. The default timeout value is 10 minutes. LOGIN_SSL_PORT If the FORCE_LOGIN_SSL_MODE parameter exists and is set to Y, this parameter enables you to configure the port used for SSL login. By default, the value is 443. For information on a related parameter, see "FORCE_LOGIN_SSL_ MODE" on page 33. MAIL_SERVER_ PORT The SMTP server port used by ALM to send mail. By default, the value is set to 25. For information on a related parameter, see "MAIL_SERVER_HOST" on page 21. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 36 of 154
  • 37. Parameter (A – Z) Description MAX_ CONCURRENT_ REPORTS This parameter defines the maximum number of project reports that can be generated concurrently. Define any value where the minimum is 1. Where the maximum number has been reached, and you choose to generate an additional report, the report generation only begins once one of the original reports finishes generating. For example, if the maximum number is 5, and you try generate an additional report, the sixth report only begins generating once one of the original five concludes generating. The default maximum is 3. MAX_GRAPH_ RESULT_DATA_ TABLE_VOLUME This parameter enables you to change the maximum size of the graph results, as calculated by the number of cells in the graph's Grid View. The size of a cell is 8 bytes. The default maximum is 100 megabytes. MAX_KPIS_PER_ MILESTONE This parameter determines the maximum number of KPIs that can be defined per milestone. The default number is 30. MAX_ MILESTONES_ PER_RELEASE This parameter determines the maximum number of milestones that can be defined per release. The default number is 20. MAX_PROJECTS_ IN_EXCEL_ REPORT This parameter determine the maximum number of projects that can be selected fora Business Views Excel report. MAX_QUERY_ LENGTH This parameter enables you to change the maximum query length (number of letters). It includes the parameters and is valid for Oracle and for SQL. The default value is 1000000. Some reports are too large for the default limit query size to handle. In such cases, this parameter should be set to 100000000. MAX_SCOPE_ ITEMS_PER_ RELEASE This parameter determines the maximum number of scope items that can be defined per release. The default number is 20. MAX_STEPS_IN_ PROJECT This parameter limits the maximum number of steps that can be fetched in each request, to protect the server from an Out Of Memory error. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 37 of 154
  • 38. Parameter (A – Z) Description MAX_TEST_ INSTANCES This parameter enables you to limit the number of test instances handled by the server per call. The default value is 1000000. If there is a call with more test instances than this value, an error message will appear and the calls will be rejected causing the operation to fail. MAX_TESTS_IN_ TEST_SET This parameter enables you to limit the number of tests in a test set for copy/paste or delete functions. The default value is 20000. If there is a test set with more tests than this value, an error message will appear and the functions will not be performed. MAX_ THRESHOLD_ VALUES_ PER_KPI This parameter determines the maximum number of threshold values that can be defined per KPI. The default number is 12. . NLS_SEARCH_ LOCALE The language used by the Find Similar Defects command to tokenize the defect summary. This parameter is needed only if the default locale on the server does not match the language in which the defect summary is written, in terms of whether spaces are used to separate words. The value should be a string value that matches a language code listed in ISO 639 (http://www.w3.org/WAI/ER/IG/ert/iso639.htm). For example, if the default locale is English and the text is in Japanese, which does not use spaces to separate words, set NLS_SEARCH_ LOCALE=ja. If this parameter is not defined or is invalid, the default locale of the server is used. ORACLE_RAC_ SUPPORT This parameter must be set to Y to enable RAC support on Oracle database servers. ORPHAN_ ANALYSIS_ DATA_ FILE_INACTIVE_ PERIOD The parameter defines how old an analysis data file must be in order to be considered an orphan. The file is considered to be an orphan if it's last modified property is older than the time frame you define as part of this parameter. Define a value in milliseconds where the minimum is 3600000 (one hour). The default value is 86400000 (one day). HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 38 of 154
  • 39. Parameter (A – Z) Description OUTPUT_ SANITIZATION_ BY_CLIENT_TYPE This parameter determines whether output sanitization is invoked by client type. The format is <client type name>=true/false;<client type name>=true/false;... The default value for any client type that is not defined scpecifically in this site parameter is true. PASSWORD_ RESET_DISABLE This parameter determines whether ALM users can reset their passwords using the Forgot Password link in the ALM Login window. If this parameter is not defined or if the parameter is set to 'N', users can reset their passwords using the Forgot Password link. If LDAP authentication is enabled, you must set this parameter to 'Y'. PASSWORD_ RESET_ ELAPSED_ TIME If a user clicks the Forgot Password link in the ALM Login window, by default 24 hours have to elapse before the same user can make another password reset request. This parameter allows you to change the length of time, in minutes, that has to elapse before a user can make another password reset request. PASSWORD_ RESET_SERVER If a user clicks the Forgot Password link in the ALM Login window, an email notification is sent to the user with a link to specify a new password. This parameter allows you to override the default URL, or parts of the URL, that is embedded in the reset link. Use one of the following syntaxes: l <server>:<port>. Overrides both the default server and port. l <server>. Overrides the default server. l <port>. Overrides the default port. PASSWORD_ RESET_VALID_ PERIOD If a user clicks the Forgot Password link in the ALM Login window, an email notification is sent to the user with a link to specify a new password. By default, the link is valid for 24 hours. This parameter allows you to change the length of time, in minutes, that the link is valid. PPT_KPI_ FAILURES_ PERCENTAGE_ PER_RELEASE_ FUSE By default, if 10% or more of the KPI calculations within the release fail, ALM aborts project planning and tracking calculations on a release and skips to the next release in a project. The default number is 60. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 39 of 154
  • 40. Parameter (A – Z) Description PPT_RECENTLY_ USED_ PROJECTS_ THRESHOLD_ MINUTES This parameter sets a threshold for controlling which projects are included in PPT calculations. PPT calculations are not performed for projects to which no one has logged in for the number of minutes specified The default is 10080 minutes (7 days). PROJECT_ SELECTION_ MAX_PROJECTS By default, cross-project graphs can include up to six projects. This parameter enables you to set a different number of maximum projects that cross-project graphs can include. Increasing the number of projects may reduce the system's performance. QC_SENSE_ AUTHORIZATION_ DISABLED This parameter allows you to disable the authorization check for users that want access to QC Sense reports. The default value is N (meaning, the authorization check is enabled). QC_SENSE_ REPORTS_USERS By default, only site administrator users have access to QC Sense reports. This parameter enables you to grant permissions to additional users who are not site administrators. Enter user names using the following syntax: <user1>;<user2>;<user3> REPLACE_TITLE This parameter enables you to change the names of ALM modules across all your projects. Rename one or more modules by entering the following parameter value: <original title1 [singular]>;<new title1 [singular]>; <original title1 [plural]>;<new title1 [plural]>; <original title2 [singular]>;<new title2 [singular]>;... For example, if you want to change the name of the Defects module to Bugs, and the Requirements module to Goals, enter the following: Defect;Bug;Defects;Bugs;Requirement;Goal; Requirements;Goals Renaming the Releases module does not change the module name in the following locations: l The Releases command in the Releases module menu bar. l The New Release Folder menu command and dialog box. l The New Release menu command and dialog box. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 40 of 154
  • 41. Parameter (A – Z) Description REPORT_MAX_ ALLOWED_SIZE This parameter defines the estimated maximum number of pages that can be included in a project report. The default value is 1000. Note: While a report it being generated, ALM can only estimate the number of pages. Therefore it cannot be guaranteed that the final generated report will not exceed this number of pages. To leave the maximum number of pages as unlimited, set the parameter to -1. However, this is not recommended as it may negatively impact on your server's performance. REPORT_ RESULTS_ LIFESPAN When a project report is shared via the Share Analysis Item command in the Analysis View module, the report retrieves data from a cache. By default, the cache information is updated every 60 minutes. This parameter enables you to configure the frequency, in minutes, at which the cache is updated. The minimum value you can assign to the parameter is 5 minutes. The maximum value is 60 minutes. REPOSITORY_ GC_ DELAY_ CANDIDATE_ TIME This parameter enables you to create a delay between the time of the cleaning processes of each project repository and the time the files without references are actually deleted. Set a value in days between 0 and 28. If the parameter does not exist, ALM delays the deletion of obsolete files in the file system for seven days. REPOSITORY_ GC_ JOB_PRIORITY The parameter determines the speed at which the repository cleanup process is performed. Set a value between 0 (fastest) and 10 (slowest). If the parameter does not exist, the speed is set to 3. REPOSITORY_ GC_ PROJECT_ CLEANUP_ INTERVAL This parameter defines the time interval in days between cleaning processes of each project repository. Set a value in days between 1 and 28. If the parameter does not exist, ALM scans project repositories once every seven days. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 41 of 154
  • 42. Parameter (A – Z) Description REPOSITORY_ MIGRATION_ JOB_PRIORITY The parameter determines the speed at which files are copied from the old to the new project repository. Set a value between 0 (fastest) and 10 (slowest). If the parameter does not exist, the speed is set to 3. REQUIREMENT_ REVIEWED_ FIELD_ AUTOMATIC_ UPDATE If this parameter is set to Y (default), then any change to a requirement field automatically sets the Reviewed (RQ_REQ_REVIEWED) field to Not Reviewed. If it is set to N, then a change to a requirement field does not affect the value of the Reviewed field. REQUIREMENTS_ LIBRARY_FUSE This parameter indicates the maximum number of requirements for a library in order to maintain optimal performance. The default value for this parameter is 3500. A validation of this value is performed when you create baselines, import libraries, or synchronize libraries. For information on a related parameter, see "LIBRARY_FUSE" on page 20. REST_API_ DEFAULT_PAGE_ SIZE The number of entities per page returned by default with each GET operation on a collection using the REST API (unless the API consumer specifies a different page size for retrieval). The default is 100 entities. REST_API_HTTP_ CACHE_ ENABLED This parameter enables REST API support for server side HTTP caching. If enabled, the server supports caching using an ETag for the following resources:  l customization/entities l customization/relations l customization/used-lists l customization/users The default is Y. REST_API_MAX_ BULK_SIZE The maximum number of entities allowed for a single bulk operation. A bulk operation over REST means to be able to POST, PUT, or DELETE a collection of entities of the same type. The default is 2000 entities. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 42 of 154
  • 43. Parameter (A – Z) Description REST_API_MAX_ ENTITY_TREE_ SIZE REST API provides a tree sub-resource for hierarchical entities. It retrieves an entity collection sorted as an expanded tree. This parameter limits the maximum collection size retrieved in a single request. Note: The tree sub-resource does not support paging, and therefore the REST_API_MAX_PAGE_SIZE parameter is not relevant. The default is 100 entities. Note: Higher values affect performance. REST_API_MAX_ PAGE_SIZE The maximum number of entities per page that can be returned with a single GET operation on a collection using the REST API. The default is 5000 entities. REST_SESSION_ MAX_IDLE_TIME This parameter sets the REST API session maximum idle time (in minutes). The idle time is the amount of time a REST API session token remains valid if there is no activity in the session. After this period, the session (including the licenses and locks that it holds) expire. On the next call, the REST API recreates a new session. The default value is 60 minutes. SA_MAX_DB_ HANDLERS This parameter enables you to define the maximum number of connections to the database allowed for the Site Administration schema. The default value is 50. The value must be 50 or higher. SD_RUN_ AMOUNT The amount of runs taken into account when calculating the suggested duration of a particular test set or build verification suite execution. The default value for this parameter is 10. The recommended threshold value is 100. A higher value could potentially affect performance. SECURED_QC_ URL When ALM generates email, it includes a link to ALM in the email. If this parameter is set to Y, the ALM URL uses an SSL connection (starting with https:). If it is set to N (default), SSL is not used. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 43 of 154
  • 44. Parameter (A – Z) Description SEND_ EXCEPTION_ DEFAULT_TO This parameter defines the default email address for sending an error report in ALM. For information on a related parameter, see "SEND_EXCEPTION_  ENABLED" below. For more information on sending error details, see the HP Application Lifecycle Management User Guide. SEND_ EXCEPTION_ ENABLED If this parameter is set to Y, the Send Error Details option is available on the Help menu in ALM, enabling you to send details of an error as attachments to an email. For information on a related parameter, see "SEND_EXCEPTION_ DEFAULT_TO" above. SKIP_CLIENT_ PREREQUISITES_ CHECK This parameter enables you to bypass the prerequisites check performed in the deployment phase of starting the ALM client. The default value is N. Tip: For similar functionality in MSI Generator, check the Skip Prerequisites Check checkbox. SMTP_SSL_ SUPPORT This parameter enables an SSL tunnel to the SMTP server. The default value is N. SQL_QUERY_ VALIDATION_ BLACK_LIST By default, ALM checks that SQL queries for an Excel reports do not include any of the following commands: INSERT, DELETE, UPDATE, DROP, CREATE, COMMIT, ROLLBACK, ALTER, EXEC, EXECUTE, MERGE, GRANT, REVOKE, SET, INTO, or TRUNCATE. This ensures that you do not inadvertently modify or delete records in the project database. You can modify which commands are on this list by adding this parameter. The parameter's value must be a comma-separated list of SQL commands that ALM should verify are not included in SQL queries for an Excel report. Note that this verification is not performed if the SQL_QUERY_ VALIDATION_ENABLED parameter exists and is set to N. For details, see "SQL_QUERY_VALIDATION_ENABLED" on the next page. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 44 of 154
  • 45. Parameter (A – Z) Description SQL_QUERY_ VALIDATION_ ENABLED By default, ALM checks SQL queries in Excel reports to ensure that they are valid and do not alter the project database. If this parameter is set to N, this validation is not performed. If this parameter does not exist, is empty, or is set to Y, this validation is performed. For information on a related parameter, see "SQL_QUERY_ VALIDATION_BLACK_LIST" on the previous page. SSO_ EXPIRATION_ TIME Expiration time of the LWSSO token (the authentication token of the REST API) in minutes. After this period of inactivity, the REST API consumer is required to re-authenticate. The default value is 60 minutes. STATIC_ CONTENT_ MAX_CACHED_ FILE_SIZE The maximum file size in MB that can be cached in the Jetty static content cache. You can reduce the cache file size, or cancel the cache by setting the parameter value to 0. SUPPORT_ TESTSET_END If this parameter is set to "Y", the Automatic Runner dialog box can signal a remote agent when a test set execution starts and ends. The events are passed using the Remote Agent's Set_Value method. SUSPEND_ REPOSITORY_ GC This parameter relates to the project repository cleaning process.. The parameter stops the cleanup process on the entire site. Use this only in special circumstances. For example, to check if the cleanup process is impacting system performance. Define this parameter and set its value to Y to temporarily stop the project repository cleaning process. To restart the cleaning process, set the parameter to N. SUSPEND_ REPOSITORY_ MIGRATION This parameter relates to the project repository migration process. The parameter stops the migration process on the entire site. Use this only in special circumstances. For example, to back up projects, or to check if the migration is affecting system performance. Define this parameter and set its value to Y to temporarily stop the migration of project files. To restart the migration, set the parameter to N. TEXT_ ENCODING_ BY_CLIENT_TYPE This parameter determines whether text encoding of output sanitization is invoked by client type. The format is <client type name>=true/false;<client type name>=true/false;... The default value for any client type that is not defined scpecifically in this site parameter is false. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 45 of 154
  • 46. Parameter (A – Z) Description TEXT_SEARCH_ TIMEOUT The length of time, in seconds, that ALM waits before canceling the operation of enabling and rebuilding the text search indexes. This operation is activated by clicking the Enable/Rebuild Text Search button in the Site Projects tab of the Site Administration. The default timeout value is 20 minutes. UNIX_SERVER If this parameter is set to Y, it enables direct file access from a testing tool on a Windows machine to a UNIX based repository. You must then add a new parameter for each directory on the UNIX server machine you want to be able to access externally and specify the corresponding Windows path, as follows: l Parameter name is FOLDER_MAPPING_n where n is an identifying number. For example, FOLDER_MAPPING_1 l Parameter value is in the format UNIXpath->Windowspath For example, /opt/Mercury/repository/qc/->netappqcrepository Note: This parameter applies to HP LoadRunner. UPGRADE_ EXCEPTION_FILE This parameter defines the location of the global exception file to be used when upgrading projects. This file defines exceptions for the ALM database user schema. By default, the SchemaExceptions.xml file is saved in the directory. UPLOAD_ ATTACH_ MAX_SIZE Note: This parameter does not affect uploads of attachments in integration tools. The default value is blank (meaning, all attachments are uploaded regardless of size). VERIFY_REPORT_ FOLDER This parameter determines where the verification report is saved when the project verification process completes. By default, the output is saved in <ALM repository path>saDomsInfo MaintenanceDataout on your ALM server machine. HP ALM Docs on Tap Administration HP ALM (12.00) Page 46 of 154
  • 47. Workflow Reference for ALM Events This section contains an alphabetical reference of the ALM event functions and subroutines. It includes the event name, description, syntax, type (Function or Sub), the value returned by a function, and the entities for which the event procedure is available. The following event functions are available: Function Name When the Function is Triggered "ActionCanExecute" on page 49 before performing a user action "Attachment_CanDelete" on page 51 before deleting an attachment "Attachment_CanOpen" on page 51 before opening an attachment "Attachment_CanPost" on page 52 before updating an attachment "CanAddTests" on page 53 before adding tests to a test set "CanCustomize" on page 53 before opening Customization window "CanDelete" on page 53 before deleting an object from the server "CanLogin" on page 56 before a user logs in to the project "CanLogout" on page 57 before a user logs out of the project "CanPost" on page 57 before posting an object to the server "CanRemoveTests" on page 59 before removing tests from a test set "CanAddComponentsToTest" on page 52 before adding business components to a test of type Flow or Business-Process "CanAddFlowsToTest" on page 52 before adding flows to a test of type Business-Process "CanRemoveComponentsFromTest" on page 58 before removing business components from a test of type Flow or Business-Process "CanRemoveFlowsFromTest" on page 59 before removing flows from a test of type Business- Process "CanDeleteGroupsFromTest" on page 56 before deleting groups from a test of type Flow or Business-Process "CanReImportModels" on page 58 before importing business models "DefaultRes" on page 59 before resetting project defaults HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 47 of 154
  • 48. Function Name When the Function is Triggered "FieldCanChange" on page 61 before changing a field value "GetDetailsPageName" on page 64 before displaying Defect Details dialog box "GetNewBugPageName" on page 64 before displaying Add Defect dialog box (for backward compatibility) "GetNewReqPageName" on page 65 before displaying New Requirement dialog box (for backward compatibility) "GetReqDetailsPageName" on page 65 before displaying Requirement Details dialog box (for backward compatibility) The following event subroutines are available: Subroutine Name When the Subroutine is Triggered "AddComponentToTest" on the next page a component has been added to a test of type Flow or Business-Process "AfterPost" on page 50 an object has been posted to the server "Attachment_New" on page 52 an attachment is added "DialogBox" on page 60 a dialog box is opened or closed "EnterModule" on page 60 user switches modules "ExitModule" on page 60 user exits a module "FieldChange" on page 62 a field value changes "MoveTo" on page 66 user changes focus "MoveToComponentFolder" on page 68 user moves to the specified component folder in the business component tree (for backward compatibility) "MoveToFolder" on page 68 user clicks a folder in the test sets tree (for backward compatibility) "MoveToSubject" on page 68 user clicks a subject in the test plan tree (for backward compatibility) "New" on page 69 an object is added "RemoveComponentFromTest" on page 70 user removes a component from a test of type Flow or Business-Process "RunTests" on page 70 user clicks Run in the Test Lab module (provided that Sprinter is not installed and none of the tests is automated) HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 48 of 154
  • 49. Subroutine Name When the Subroutine is Triggered "RunTests_Sprinter" on page 70 user clicks Run in the Test Lab module (provided that Sprinter is installed and at least one test is automated) "RunTestSet" on page 71 user clicks RunTest Set in the Test Lab module "RunTestsManually" on page 71 user clicks Run > Run Manually in the Test Lab module ActionCanExecute This event is triggered before ALM performs an action that has been initiated by the user, to check whether the action can be executed. You can add code to this event procedure to perform actions when the user has initiated a particular action, or to prevent the action from being executed in specific cases. For example, see "Example: Controlling User Permissions" on page 96. Syntax ActionCanExecute(ActionName) where ActionName is the action that the user has initiated. Actions are in the format context.action. Note: The previous format for this event is supported for purposes of backward compatibility. We recommend you use ActionCanExecute instead. User-defined actions start with the prefix UserDefinedActions. Type Function Returns True or False Availability ActionCanExecute (all modules) Tip: To obtain the name of an action, see the sample code on "Action Object" on page 73. AddComponentToTest This event is triggered when the user adds a component to a test of type Flow or Business-Process in the Test Script tab. Version Control: Changing components checked in or checked out by another user, using the AddComponentToTest event, is not supported. Syntax AddComponentToTest Type Sub Availability AddComponentToTest HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 49 of 154
  • 50. AfterPost This event is triggered after an object has been posted to the server. Project fields should not be changed after they have been posted, because then the new value is not stored in the database. Syntax <entity>_AfterPost Type Sub Availability l AnalysisItem_AfterPost l AnalysisItemFolder_AfterPost l Baseline_AfterPost l Bug_AfterPost l BusinessModel_AfterPost l BusinessModelFolder_AfterPost l BusinessModelPath_AfterPost l Component_AfterPost l ComponentFolder_AfterPost l Cycle_AfterPost l DashboardFolder_AfterPost l DashboardPage_AfterPost l Library_AfterPost l LibraryFolder_AfterPost l Release_AfterPost l ReleaseFolder_AfterPost l Req_AfterPost l Resource_AfterPost l ResourceFolder_AfterPost l Run_AfterPost l Step_AfterPost HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 50 of 154
  • 51. l Test_AfterPost l TestConfiguration_AfterPost l TestFolder_AfterPost l TestSet_AfterPost l TestSetFolder_AfterPost Attachment_CanDelete This event is triggered before ALM deletes an attachment from the server, to check whether that attachment can be deleted. Syntax Attachment_CanDelete(Attachment) where Attachment is the IAttachment interface. For more information, refer to the HP ALM Open Test Architecture API Reference. Type Function Returns True or False Availability Attachment_CanDelete (all modules) Attachment_CanOpen This event is triggered before ALM opens an attachment from the server, to check whether the attachment can be opened. Syntax Attachment_CanOpen(Attachment) where Attachment is the lAttachment interface. For more information, refer to the HP ALM Open Test Architecture API Reference. Type Function Returns True or False Availability Attachment_CanOpen (all modules) HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 51 of 154
  • 52. Attachment_CanPost This event is triggered before ALM updates an existing attachment on the server, to check whether the attachment can be updated. Syntax Attachment_CanPost(Attachment) where Attachment is the lAttachment interface. For more information, refer to the HP ALM Open Test Architecture API Reference. Type Function Returns True or False Availability Attachment_CanPost (all modules) Attachment_New This event is triggered when an attachment is added to ALM. Syntax Attachment_New(Attachment) where Attachment is the lAttachment interface. For more information, refer to the HP ALM Open Test Architecture API Reference. Type Sub Availability Attachment_New (all modules) CanAddComponentsToTest This event is triggered before ALM adds business components to a test of type Flow or Business- Process, to check whether the specified components can be added. Syntax CanAddComponentsToTest(Components) where Components is an array of component IDs. Type Function Returns True or False Availability CanAddComponentsToTest CanAddFlowsToTest This event is triggered before ALM adds flows to a test of type Business-Process, to check whether the specified flows can be added. HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 52 of 154
  • 53. Syntax CanAddFlowsToTest(Flows) where Flows is an array of flow IDs. Type Function Returns True or False Availability CanAddFlowstoTest CanAddTests This event is triggered before ALM adds tests to a test set, to check whether the specified tests can be added. Syntax <entity>_CanAddTests(Tests) where Tests is an array of Test IDs. Type Function Returns True or False Availability TestSet_CanAddTests CanCustomize This event is triggered when a user attempts to open the Customization window, to check whether the specified user can customize the specified project. Syntax CanCustomize(DomainName, ProjectName, UserName) where DomainName is the domain name, ProjectName is the project name, and UserName is the user name. Type Function Returns True or False Availability CanCustomize (all modules) CanDelete This event is triggered before ALM deletes an object from the server, to check if the object can be deleted. Syntax <entity>_CanDelete(Entity) Type Function HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 53 of 154
  • 54. Returns True or False Availability l AnalysisItem_CanDelete l AnalysisItemFolder_CanDelete l Baseline_CanDelete l Bug_CanDelete l BusinessModel_CanDelete l BusinessModelFolder_CanDelete l BusinessModelPath_CanDelete l Component_CanDelete l ComponentFolder_CanDelete l Cycle_CanDelete l DashboardFolder_CanDelete l DashboardPage_CanDelete l Library_CanDelete l LibraryFolder_CanDelete l Release_CanDelete l ReleaseFolder_CanDelete l Req_CanDelete l Resource_CanDelete l ResourceFolder_CanDelete l Test_CanDelete l TestConfiguration_CanDelete l TestFolder_CanDelete l TestSet_CanDelete l TestSetFolder_CanDelete HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 54 of 154
  • 55. Additional Syntax for Backward Compatibility For purposes of backward compatibility, the following syntaxes are also available for certain objects. However, we recommend you use CanDelete instead. l The syntax for tests or test subject folders: Syntax Test_CanDelete(Entity, IsTest) where: n Entity is the test or subject folder. n If IsTest is True, Entity refers to an ITest object. If IsTest is False, Entity refers to an ISubjectNode object. For more information on ITest and ISubjectNode, refer to the HP ALM Open Test Architecture API Reference. Type Function Returns True or False Availability Test_CanDelete l The syntax for test sets or test set folders: Syntax TestSet_CanDelete(Entity, IsTestSet) where: n Entity is the test set or test set folder. n If IsTestSet is True, Entity refers to an ITestSet object. If IsTestSet is False, Entity refers to an ITestSetFolder object. For more information on ITestSet and ITestSetFolder, refer to the HP ALM Open Test Architecture API Reference. Type Function Returns True or False Availability TestSet_CanDelete HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 55 of 154
  • 56. l The syntax for business components or business component folders: Syntax Component_CanDelete(Entity, IsComponent) where: n Entity is the component or component folder. n If IsComponent is True, Entity refers to an IComponent object. If IsComponent is False, Entity refers to an IComponentFolder object. For more information on IComponent and IComponentFolder, refer to the HP ALM Open Test Architecture API Reference. Type Function Returns True or False Availability Component_CanDelete CanDeleteGroupsFromTest This event is triggered when a user removes groups from a test of type Flow or Business-Process, to check whether the specified groups can be removed. Syntax CanDeleteGroupsFromTest(Groups) where Groups is an array of group IDs. Type Function Returns True or False Availability CanDeleteGroupsFromTest CanLogin This event is triggered to check whether the specified user can log in to the specified project. Syntax CanLogin(DomainName, ProjectName, UserName) where DomainName is the domain name, ProjectName is the project name, and UserName is the user name. Type Function Returns True or False Availability CanLogin (all modules) HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 56 of 154
  • 57. CanLogout This event is triggered to check whether the current user can log out of the current project. Syntax CanLogout Type Function Returns True or False Availability CanLogout (all modules) CanPost This event is triggered before ALM posts an object to the server, to check whether the object can be posted. You can add code to this event procedure to prevent an object from being posted in specific cases. For example, see "Example: Object Validation" on page 93. Syntax <entity>_CanPost Type Function Returns True or False Availability l AnalysisItem_CanPost l AnalysisItemFolder_CanPost l Baseline_CanPost l Bug_CanPost l BusinessModel_CanPost l BusinessModelFolder_CanPost l BusinessModelPath_CanPost l Component_CanPost l ComponentFolder_CanPost l Cycle_CanPost l DashboardFolder_CanPost l DashboardPage_CanPost l Library_CanPost HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 57 of 154
  • 58. l LibraryFolder_CanPost l Release_CanPost l ReleaseFolder_CanPost l Req_CanPost l Resource_CanPost l ResourceFolder_CanPost l Run_CanPost l Step_CanPost l Test_CanPost l TestConfiguration_CanPost l TestFolder_CanPost l TestSet_CanPost l TestSetFolder_CanPost l TestSetTests_CanPost (does not appear in the Scripts Tree) CanReImportModels This event is triggered when attempting to import the specified business process models that already exist in ALM, to check if the business process models can be reimported. Syntax <entity>_CanReImportModels(Models) where Models is an array of Model IDs. Type Function Returns True or False Availability CanReImportModels CanRemoveComponentsFromTest This event is triggered when a user removes components from a test of type Flow or Business- Process, to check whether the specified components can be removed. HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 58 of 154
  • 59. Syntax CanRemoveComponentsFromTest(Components) where Components is an array of component IDs. Type Function Returns True or False Availability CanRemoveComponentsFromTest CanRemoveFlowsFromTest This event is triggered when a user removes flows from a test of type Business-Process, to check whether the specified flows can be removed. Syntax CanRemoveFlowsFromTest(Flows) where Flows is an array of flow IDs. Type Function Returns True or False Availability CanRemoveFlowsFromTest CanRemoveTests This event is triggered to check whether the specified tests can be removed from a test set. Syntax <entity>_CanRemoveTests(Tests) where Tests is an array of Test Instance IDs. Type Function Returns True or False Availability TestSet_CanRemoveTests DefaultRes This function is used to determine the default return value for ALM functions, such as FieldCanChange. All ALM workflow functions call this function (unless explicitly omitted by user) to determine the default return value. DefaultRes can be used to quickly replace the default return values of all ALM workflow functions. Syntax DefaultRes Type Function HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 59 of 154
  • 60. Returns True or False Availability DefaultRes (all modules) DialogBox This event is triggered when a dialog box is opened or closed. Syntax DialogBox(DialogBoxName, IsOpen) where DialogBoxName is the name of the dialog box, and IsOpen indicates whether the dialog box is open. Type Sub Availability DialogBox (all modules) Note: For purposes of backward compatibility, this event is also triggered using backward compatible values for defect details (DialogBoxName="Details") and test instance details (DialogBoxName="TestInstanceDetails"). These backward compatible values are not recommended. EnterModule This event is triggered when the user enters or switches to an ALM module. It is also triggered when the user logs in to ALM. You can add code to this event procedure to perform an action whenever the user switches to the specified module. Syntax EnterModule Type Sub Availability EnterModule (all modules) ExitModule This event is triggered when the user exits the specified module. Syntax ExitModule Type Sub Availability ExitModule (all modules) HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 60 of 154
  • 61. FieldCanChange This event is triggered before ALM changes a field value, to determine whether the field can be changed. You can add code to this event procedure to prevent a field from being changed in specific cases. For example, see "Example: Field Validation" on page 94. Syntax <entity>_FieldCanChange(FieldName, NewValue) where FieldName is the name of the field and NewValue is the field value. Type Function Returns True or False Availability l AnalysisItem_FieldCanChange l AnalysisItemFolder_FieldCanChange l Baseline_FieldCanChange l Bug_FieldCanChange l BusinessModel_FieldCanChange l BusinessModelActivity_FieldCanChange l BusinessModelFolder_FieldCanChange l BusinessModelPath_FieldCanChange l Component_FieldCanChange l ComponentFolder_FieldCanChange l ComponentStep_FieldCanChange l Cycle_FieldCanChange l DashboardFolder_FieldCanChange l DashboardPage_FieldCanChange l DesignStep_FieldCanChange l Library_FieldCanChange l LibraryFolder_FieldCanChange l Release_FieldCanChange HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 61 of 154
  • 62. l ReleaseFolder_FieldCanChange l Req_FieldCanChange l Resource_FieldCanChange l ResourceFolder_FieldCanChange l Run_FieldCanChange l Step_FieldCanChange l Test_FieldCanChange l TestConfiguration_FieldCanChange l TestFolder_FieldCanChange l TestSet_FieldCanChange l TestSetFolder_FieldCanChange l TestSetTests_FieldCanChange The code for hiding a field that depends on another field should be placed in the FieldChange event procedure (not in the FieldCanChange event procedure). FieldChange This event is triggered when the value of the specified field changes. Every change of value triggers the field change event when the field loses focus. You can add code to this event procedure to perform an action when the value of a particular field is changed. For example, you can hide or display one field depending on the value the user enters into another field. For example, see "Example: Changing One Field Based on Another Field" on page 92. Syntax <entity>_FieldChange(FieldName) where FieldName is the name of the field. Type Sub Availability l AnalysisItem_FieldChange l AnalysisItemFolder_FieldChange l Baseline_FieldChange l Bug_FieldChange l BusinessModel_FieldChange HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 62 of 154
  • 63. l BusinessModelActivity_FieldChange l BusinessModelFolder_FieldChange l BusinessModelPath_FieldChange l Component_FieldChange l ComponentFolder_FieldChange l ComponentStep_FieldChange l Cycle_FieldChange l DashboardFolder_FieldChange l DashboardPage_FieldChange l DesignStep_FieldChange l Library_FieldChange l LibraryFolder_FieldChange l Release_FieldChange l ReleaseFolder_FieldChange l Req_FieldChange l Resource_FieldChange l ResourceFolder_FieldChange l Run_FieldChange l Step_FieldChange l Test_FieldChange l TestConfiguration_FieldChange l TestFolder_FieldChange l TestSet_FieldChange l TestSetFolder_FieldChange l TestSetTests_FieldChange HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 63 of 154
  • 64. When a user changes a field value using the Find/Replace command, workflow events are not triggered. If restrictions implemented in workflow scripts are critical, consider disabling the Replace command for specific user groups, to ensure that your restrictions cannot be bypassed. GetDetailsPageName This event is triggered by ALM to retrieve the name of the page (tab) that has the index number specified in PageNum in the following dialog boxes: l The Details dialog box for an entity l The New <entity> dialog box for an entity You can add code to this event procedure to customize the tab names for the Details dialog box. For example, see "Example: Changing Tab Names" on page 91. Syntax GetDetailsPageName(PageName, PageNum) where PageName is the default page (tab) name (for example, Page 1) and PageNum is the page (tab) number. Note: The page number is the absolute page number, regardless of the page's relative position in relation to the other displayed pages in the dialog box. Type Function Returns String containing the page name Availability GetDetailsPageName (all modules) GetNewBugPageName This event is triggered by ALM to retrieve the name of the New Defect dialog box page (tab) that has the index number specified in PageNum. You can add code to this event procedure to customize the tab names on the New Defect dialog box. For example, see "Example: Changing Tab Names" on page 91. Syntax GetNewBugPageName(PageName, PageNum) where PageName is the default page (tab) name (for example, Page 1) and PageNum is the page (tab) number. Note: The page number is the absolute page number, regardless of the page's relative position in relation to the other displayed pages in the New Defect dialog box. Type Function HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 64 of 154
  • 65. Returns String containing the page (tab) name Availability GetNewBugPageName Note: The GetNewBugPageName event is not listed in the Scripts Tree of the Script Editor. This event is triggered for backward compatibility purposes only. GetDetailsPageName should be used instead. GetNewReqPageName This event is triggered by ALM to retrieve the name of the New Requirement dialog box page (tab) that has the index number specified in PageNum. You can add code to this event procedure to customize the tab names on the New Requirement dialog box. For example, see "Example: Changing Tab Names" on page 91. Syntax GetNewReqPageName(PageName, PageNum) where PageName is the default page (tab) name (for example, Page 1) and PageNum is the page (tab) number. Note: The page number is the absolute page number, regardless of the page's relative position in relation to the other displayed pages in the New Defect dialog box. Type Function Returns String containing the page name Availability GetNewReqPageName Note: The GetNewReqPageName event is not listed in the Scripts Tree of the Script Editor. This event is triggered for backward compatibility purposes only. GetDetailsPageName should be used instead. GetReqDetailsPageName This event is triggered by ALM to retrieve the name of the Requirement Details dialog box page (tab) that has the index number specified in PageNum. You can add code to this event procedure to customize the tab names on the Requirement Details dialog box. For example, see "Example: Changing Tab Names" on page 91. HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 65 of 154
  • 66. Syntax GetReqDetailsPageName(PageName, PageNum) where PageName is the default page (tab) name (for example, Page 1) and PageNum is the page (tab) number. Note: The page number is the absolute page number, regardless of the page's relative position in relation to the other displayed pages in the New Defect dialog box. Type Function Returns String containing the page name Availability GetReqDetailsPageName Note: The GetReqDetailsPageName event is not listed in the Scripts Tree of the Script Editor. This event is triggered for backward compatibility purposes only. GetDetailsPageName should be used instead. MoveTo This event is triggered when the user changes focus from one object to another. You can add code to this event procedure to perform actions when the user changes the focus. For example, see "Example: Presenting a Dynamic Field List" on page 95. Tip: When moving from one object to another in a tree, the MoveTo event is not triggered. However, it is possible to trigger the event for Requirement trees. For details, see "ENABLE_ ENTITY_SELECTION_TREE_REQ_MOVE_TO" on page 30. Syntax <entity>_MoveTo Type Sub Availability l AnalysisItem_MoveTo l AnalysisItemFolder_MoveTo l Baseline_MoveTo l Bug_MoveTo l BusinessModel_MoveTo l BusinessModelActivity_MoveTo l BusinessModelFolder_MoveTo HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 66 of 154
  • 67. l BusinessModelPath_MoveTo l Component_MoveTo l ComponentFolder_MoveTo (formerly MoveToComponentFolder) l ComponentStep_MoveTo l Cycle_MoveTo l DashboardFolder_MoveTo l DashboardPage_MoveTo l DesignStep_MoveTo l Library_MoveTo l LibraryFolder_MoveTo l Release_MoveTo l ReleaseFolder_MoveTo l Req_MoveTo l Resource_MoveTo l ResourceFolder_MoveTo l Run_MoveTo l Step_MoveTo l Test_MoveTo l TestConfiguration_MoveTo l TestFolder_MoveTo l TestSet_MoveTo l TestSetFolder_MoveTo l TestSetTests_MoveTo HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 67 of 154
  • 68. MoveToComponentFolder This event is triggered when the user moves to the specified component folder in the business component tree. Syntax MoveToComponentFolder(Folder) where Folder is the IComponentFolder interface. For more information, refer to the HP ALM Open Test Architecture API Reference. Type Sub Availability MoveToComponentFolder Note: The MoveToComponentFolder event is not listed in the Scripts Tree of the Script Editor. This event is supported for purposes of backward compatibility. We recommend you use ComponentFolder_MoveTo event instead. MoveToFolder This event is triggered when the user moves to the specified test set folder in the test sets tree. Syntax MoveToFolder(Folder) where Folder is the ISysTreeNode interface. For more information, refer to the HP ALM Open Test Architecture API Reference. Type Sub Availability MoveToFolder Note: The MoveToFolder event is not listed in the Scripts Tree of the Script Editor. This event is supported for purposes of backward compatibility. We recommend you use MoveToFolder instead. MoveToSubject This event is triggered when the user moves to the specified subject in the test plan tree. Syntax MoveToSubject(Subject) where Subject is the ISysTreeNode interface. For more information, refer to the HP ALM Open Test Architecture API Reference. Type Sub Availability MoveToSubject HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 68 of 154
  • 69. Note: The MoveToSubject event is not listed in the Scripts Tree of the Script Editor. This event is supported for purposes of backward compatibility. We recommend you use MoveToSubject instead. New This event is triggered when an object is added to ALM. You can add code to this event procedure to perform an action when a new object is added. For example, see "Example: Customizing a Defects Module Dialog Box" on page 88. Syntax <entity>_New Type Sub Availability l AnalysisItem_New l AnalysisItemFolder_New l Baseline_New l Bug_New l BusinessModelFolder_New l BusinessModelPath_New l Component_New l ComponentFolder_New l ComponentStep_New l Cycle_New l DashboardFolder_New l DashboardPage_New l DesignStep_New l Library_New l LibraryFolder_New l Release_New l ReleaseFolder_New l Req_New HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 69 of 154
  • 70. l Resource_New l ResourceFolder_New l Step_New l Test_New l TestConfiguration_New l TestFolder_New l TestSet_New l TestSetFolder_New RemoveComponentFromTest This event is triggered when the user removes a component from a test of type Flow or Business- Process in the Test Script tab. Version Control: Changing components checked in or checked out by another user, using the RemoveComponentFromTest event, is not supported. Syntax RemoveComponentFromTest Type Sub Availability RemoveComponentFromTest RunTests This event is triggered when the user clicks the Run button to run tests in the Test Lab module, provided that Sprinter is not installed and none of the tests is automated. Syntax RunTests(Tests) where Tests is an array of Test Instance IDs. Type Sub Availability RunTests RunTests_Sprinter This event is triggered: HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 70 of 154
  • 71. l When the user clicks the Run arrow and chooses Run with Sprinter to run tests in the Test Lab module. l When the user clicks the Run button to run tests in the Test Lab module, if Sprinter is installed and all the tests are manual. Syntax RunTests_Sprinter(Tests) where Tests is an array of Test Instance IDs. Type Sub Availability RunTests_Sprinter RunTestSet This event is triggered when the user clicks the RunTest Set button to run a test set in the Test Lab module. Syntax RunTestSet(Tests) where Tests is an array of Test Instance IDs. Type Sub Availability RunTestSet RunTestsManually This event is triggered when the user clicks the Run arrow and chooses Run Manually to run tests in the Test Lab module. Syntax RunTestsManually(Tests) where Tests is an array of Test Instance IDs. Type Sub Availability RunTestsManually Workflow Object and Property Reference Workflow scripts can reference HP Application Lifecycle Management (ALM) objects to obtain information and to change project values. They can also use properties that return information about the current module and dialog box. This section lists the ALM objects and properties that are available to workflow scripts. About ALM Objects and Properties 72 Actions Object 73 HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 71 of 154
  • 72. Action Object 73 Fields Objects 74 Field Object 76 Lists Object 77 TDConnection Object 78 User Object 78 ALM Properties 79 About ALM Objects and Properties Workflow scripts can obtain information, make decisions based on that information, and change values in the project based on those decisions. You can obtain information such as the user group to which the current user belongs, and the value of a field, by accessing objects such as the User object or the Field object. You can also obtain information about the active module and active dialog box using workflow properties. For more information on these properties, see "ALM Properties" on page 79. Your script can change the value of a field or field list. To do so, the script modifies the Value property or the List property of the appropriate Field object. The following table lists the ALM objects that are available when you write a script. Object Description Actions The list of actions that are available. See "Actions Object" on the next page. Action The Action object is handled by the Actions object. See "Action Object" on the next page. Fields Includes the objects that provide access to specific fields. See "Fields Objects" on page 74. Field The Field object is handled by the Fields objects. See "Field Object" on page 76. Lists Includes the lists that are available in an ALM project. See "Lists Object" on page 77. TDConnection Provides access to open test architecture (OTA) objects. See "TDConnection Object" on page 78. User Includes the properties of the current user. This object is available in all modules. See "User Object" on page 78. Note: In some cases, a function returns the object itself instead of the ID property of the HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 72 of 154
  • 73. object. For example, after the following statement has been executed, testsetf is a reference to a TestSetFolder object: Set testsetf = TestSet_Fields("CY_FOLDER_ID").Value. For each ALM object, this section lists the properties of the object. The list includes the property name, a description, and the data type of the property. It indicates whether the property is read-only (R) or whether your script can modify it (R/W). Version Control: After enabling version control for a project, you should review all its workflow scripts and make adjustments for each checked in entity. This includes the following entities: Req, Test, Resource, and Component. For each checked in entity that includes a Post function in its script, you must modify the script. To modify, add a Checkout function before every Post function. Making this modification prevents the Check Out dialog box from opening each time a call to a Post function is made. For more information about the Post and Checkout functions, see the HP ALM Open Test Architecture Reference. Actions Object You can use the Actions object to manipulate toolbar buttons, menu commands, and dialog boxes. The Actions object has the following property: Property R/W Type Description Action R Object Allows access to every action in a list. The index for this property is the action name. Action Object You can use the Action object to verify whether a button or command is enabled, checked, or visible. You can also use it to execute actions. For example, to set the Defect Details dialog box to open automatically when the user moves from one defect to another in the Defects Grid, place the following code in the Bug_MoveTo event procedure: Set NewDefectAction=Actions.Action("Defects.DefectDetails") NewDefectAction.Execute To obtain the name of an action, add the following lines to the ActionCanExecute event procedure, perform the action, and note the action name that is printed in the message: Sub ActionCanExecute(ActionName)         On Error Resume Next         MsgBox "You have performed an action named: " & ActionName         On Error GoTo 0 End Sub HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 73 of 154
  • 74. This object has the following properties: Property R/W Type Description Checked R/W Boolean Indicates whether an action is checked in ALM. Enabled R/W Boolean Indicates whether an action is enabled. A disabled action cannot be invoked by the user, but can be invoked from the workflow script. Visible R/W Boolean Indicates whether an action is visible in ALM. The Action object includes the following method: Method Description Execute Executes the action. When a workflow script invokes an action using the Execute method of the Action object, the workflow events that would be triggered if a user initiated the action from a dialog box are by default not triggered. Therefore, when using Action.Execute, you must ensure that you do not bypass the site policies you are enforcing with workflow events. To enable workflow events to be triggered from within a dialog box, set the value of the AllowReentrancy flag to true. To restore the default settings, so that these events are not triggered, set the value of the AllowReentrancy flag to false. For example, to set the Add Defect dialog box to open automatically when a user enters the Defects module, place the following code in the EnterModule event procedure: AllowReentrancy=true Set NewDefectAction=Actions.Action("Defects.DefectDetails") NewDefectAction.Execute AllowReentrancy=false If the value of the AllowReentrancy flag is set to false, the dialog box opens as usual, but workflow customizations will not work in the dialog because the workflow events for the dialog box are not triggered. Caution: Consider carefully the implications of setting the value of this flag to true. If you set the value of the flag to true, you enable a function to call another function which may call the original function. This can cause an endless loop. This can also occur when functions call internal functions which call the original function. Fields Objects You can use the following objects in workflow scripts to access the fields of ALM modules: Object Description AnalysisItem_Fields Provides access to the fields of the reports and graphs in the Dashboard module. HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 74 of 154
  • 75. Object Description AnalysisItemFolder_ Fields Provides access to the fields of the report and graph folders in the Dashboard module. Baseline_Fields Provides access to the fields of the baselines in the Libraries module. Bug_Fields Provides access to the fields of the defects in the Defects module and the Manual Runner dialog box. Component_Fields Provides access to the fields of components in the Business Components module. ComponentStep_ Fields Provides access to the fields of component steps in the Business Components module. Cycle_Field Provides access to the fields of cycles in the Releases module. DashboardFolder_ Fields Provides access to the fields of dashboard page folders in the Dashboard module. DashboardPage_ Fields Provides access to the fields of dashboard pages in the Dashboard module. DesignStep_Fields Provides access to the fields of the design steps in the Test Plan module. Library_Fields Provides access to the fields of the libraries in the Libraries module. LibraryFolder_ Fields Provides access to the fields of the library folders in the Libraries module. Release_Fields Provides access to the fields of the releases in the Releases module. ReleaseFolder_ Fields Provides access to the fields of the release folders in the Releases module. Req_Fields Provides access to the fields of the Requirements module. Resource_Fields Provides access to the fields of the resources in the Test Resources module. ResourceFolder_ Fields Provides access to the fields of the resource folders in the Test Resources module. Run_Fields Provides access to the fields of the test runs in the Manual Runner dialog box. Step_Fields Provides access to the fields of the steps in the Manual Runner dialog box. Test_Fields Provides access to the fields of tests in the Test Plan module. TestSet_Fields Provides access to the fields of the test sets in the Test Lab module. HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 75 of 154
  • 76. Object Description TestSetTest_Fields Provides access to the fields of the test instances in the Test Lab module. For example, to set a certain property for all fields in the Req_Fields object, you can refer to each field by its ID number (Req_Fields.FieldById). To set all fields to be visible (IsVisible)in a dialog box, you can use the following code: For i = 1 to Req_Fields.Count Req_Fields.FieldById(i).IsVisible = True Next These objects have the following properties: Property R/W Type Description Count R Long Returns the number of fields in the current object. Field (FieldName) R Object Accesses the fields by field name or field label. FieldById (FieldID) R Object Accesses the fields by the field ID number. Tip: To avoid errors if your script attempts to access a non-active or a non-existing field, include On Error Resume Next in the script. Field Object You can use the Field object to access the properties of an entity field. For example, to display a message box when a user does not have permission to change a value in the Status field, you can use the following code: Msgbox "You do not have permission to change "_ & "Bug_Fields.Field("BG_STATUS").FieldLabel field." The Field object has the following properties: Property R/W Type Description FieldLabel R String The displayed label of the field. FieldName R String The logical name of the field. IsModified R Boolean Specifies whether the value was modified. IsMultiValue R Boolean Specifies whether the field can contain multiple values from a lookup list. HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 76 of 154
  • 77. Property R/W Type Description IsNull R Boolean Specifies whether the field value is absent. IsReadOnly R/W Boolean Specifies whether the field is read-only. IsRequired R/W Boolean Specifies whether a field value is required. This enables you to override field customization information. To modify the IsRequired property of a field, the IsVisible property must be True. Changes to IsRequired are ignored if the field is not visible. Users must always enter a value for a field that is set as required by the workflow. This applies whether they are modifying an existing record or adding a new record, and even if the field is already empty. IsVisible R/W Boolean Specifies whether the field is displayed. List R/W List Sets or retrieves the field list attached to a field of type lookup list. PageNo R/W Integer Sets or retrieves the page (tab) on which the field is displayed in the New Defect and Defect Details dialog boxes. Value R/W Variant Sets or retrieves the value of the field. ViewOrder R/W Integer Sets or retrieves the order in which the fields are displayed in the New Defect and Defect Details dialog boxes. You must set the value for every field in the dialog box. Lists Object You can use the Lists object to limit field input to a specific list of values. For example, to set the list in the Planned Closing Version field, depending on the Project field value, you can use the following code: If Bug_Fields.Field("BG_PROJECT").Value = "Project 1" Then         Bug_Fields.Field("BG_PLANNED_CLOSING_VER").List _         = Lists("All Projects")        ' ... End If For more information, see "Example: Presenting a Dynamic Field List" on page 95. The Lists object can be used only with fields that are defined as the Lookup List type or the String type in Project Customization of project entities. The Lists object has the following properties: Property R/W Type Description List R ISysTreeNode Accesses the ALM lists. HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 77 of 154
  • 78. Note: When workflow customization has been used to change a list of values for a field that has transition rules defined, the field may only be modified in a way that satisfies both the workflow script and the transition rules. TDConnection Object In workflow scripts, the only objects that are available are the objects of the module in which the code is written and a limited number of global objects. One of the global objects is the TDConnection object. TDConnection provides access to the open test architecture (OTA) objects. You can use the TDConnection object to access objects from other modules, and to access general session parameters. You can access TDConnection properties in any procedure, from any module. For more information about the TDConnection object, and a list of TDConnection properties, refer to the HP ALM Open Test Architecture API Reference. User Object You can access the User object to retrieve the user name of the current user and to check whether the user belongs to a particular user group. You can retrieve or modify the first and last name of the user. For example, to have a message box open when the user has project administrator permissions, use the following code: If User.IsInGroup("TDAdmin") Then         MsgBox "The user " & User.FullName & _         " has administrative permissions for this project." End If For more information, see "Example: Changing a Field Based on the User Group" on page 93, and "Example: Controlling User Permissions" on page 96. To access user properties that cannot be accessed by the User object, you can use the TDConnection object of the ALM open test architecture (OTA). The User object has the following properties: Property R/W Type Description FullName R/W String Sets or retrieves the first and last name of the current user. IsInGroup (GroupName) R Boolean Checks whether or not the current user is a member of a predefined/user-defined group. UserName R String Returns the user name used when logging in to ALM. HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 78 of 154
  • 79. ALM Properties You can use the ActiveModule and ActiveDialogName properties to obtain information about the active module and dialog box. This section includes: ActiveModule Property 79 ActiveDialogName Property 80 ActiveModule Property The ActiveModule property returns the name of the active ALM module. The following values can be returned: l Releases l Libraries l Analysis l Dashboard l Requirements l Business Models l Test Resources l Business Components l Test Plan l Test Lab l Test Runs l Defects Example To open a message box displaying the module name when you move to a new module, use the following code: Sub EnterModule         On Error Resume Next         msgbox "You have just entered the " & ActiveModule & _ " module." HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 79 of 154
  • 80.         On Error GoTo 0 End Sub ActiveDialogName Property The ActiveDialogName property returns the name of the active dialog box. Example To open a message box displaying the dialog box name when you open a new dialog box, use the following code: Sub DialogBox(DialogBoxName, IsOpen)         On Error Resume Next         msgbox "You have just opened the " & ActiveDialogName & _ " dialog box."         On Error GoTo 0 End Sub Workflow Examples and Best Practices About the Workflow Examples The workflow examples presented in this section perform several types of tasks. The following table lists the examples that illustrate each type of task. Workflow Task See Examples dialog box customization "Example: Customizing a Defects Module Dialog Box" on page 88 "Example: Changing Tab Names" on page 91 field value automation "Example: Adding a Template to a Memo Field" on page 92 "Example: Changing One Field Based on Another Field" on page 92 "Example: Changing a Field Based on the User Group" on page 93 data validation "Example: Object Validation" on page 93 "Example: Field Validation" on page 94 HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 80 of 154
  • 81. Workflow Task See Examples dynamic field customization "Example: Presenting a Dynamic Field List" on page 95 "Example: Changing Field Properties when a Field Changes" on page 96 user permission control "Example: Controlling User Permissions" on page 96 functionality "Example: Adding Button Functionality" on page 97 error handling "Example: Error Handling" on page 97 using OTA to obtain session parameters "Example: Obtaining Session Properties" on page 98 sending mail "Example: Sending Mail" on page 99 using the Settings object "Example: Storing the Last Values Entered" on page 100 copying values between modules "Example: Copying Field Values to Another Object" on page 102 Best Practices for Writing Workflow Scripts This section describes best practices for writing workflow scripts and making sure the scripts run as expected. In addition to the best practices provided in this section, you can refer to the Microsoft Developer Network VBScript Language Reference at http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/. The following best practices are described in this section: General VBScript Tips and Best Practices l "Checking Value Types Before Use" on the next page l "Anticipating Full Evaluation of Logical Expressions" on page 83 l "Defining Default Behavior for Select Case and If-Then-Else Statements" on page 84 l "Setting Return Values in Functions" on page 85 ALM Workflow Tips and Best Practices l "Making Sure that Entity Properties Are Set Before an Entity Comes into Focus" on page 85 l "Check if a Dialog Box is Open" on page 87 l "Avoid Defining Duplicate Subroutines" on page 88 HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 81 of 154
  • 82. Checking Value Types Before Use VBScript is a "weakly-typed" programming language. This means that you can create, use, and access data values without initially declaring their types. However, certain operations can be performed only on values of a specific type. Therefore, it is important to check the type of the data before performing any operations on them. Values of different types behave differently in different statements. Object value behavior is even more unpredictable because the behavior depends on the object's implementation. For example, the object in the call <entity>_CanDelete(Entity) can either be text or a subject node. Recommendations To avoid unpredictable results: l Check value types before use, especially for object types. When checking an object type, also check that the object has the properties you access. l Assume as little as possible—do not assume that a value is of a certain type. Write scripts that can handle all possibilities by using Else statements and Select Case statements. l Always check parameter types before use with various VBScript functions, such as IsArray, IsDate, IsNull, IsEmpty, IsNumeric, and IsObject. l Do not assume an object's default property is of a specific type; the type can vary from object to object. l Use VBScript built-in conversion functions to achieve a degree of type safety. l When working with objects, check that the value you receive is neither Null or Empty by calling the IsNull and IsEmpty functions. HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 82 of 154
  • 83. Examples For the purposes of the following examples, assume the field values are declared as in the table below. Field Values Type Bug_Fields["BG_BUG_ID"].Value Integer Bug_Fields["BG_SUMMARY"].Value String Bug_Fields["BG_SUBJECT"].Value Object implementing the ISysTreeNode interface In the following example, statement usage is correct. The integer is converted to a string. If Bug_Fields["BG_BUG_ID"].Value = "10" Then... In the following example, statement usage is correct. The strings are comparable. If Bug_Fields["BG_SUMMARY"].Value = "some text" Then... In the following example, statement usage is incorrect. This code can work only when the value of BG_SUBJECT field is neither Empty or Null. VBScript also assumes that this objects's default value (meaning, the default property) is either of string type or is comparable with the string type, which is not always the case. If Bug_Fields["BG_SUBJECT"].Value = "My Tests" Then... Anticipating Full Evaluation of Logical Expressions The VBScript programming language does not short-circuit evaluation of Boolean conditions. VBScript evaluates all the terms in a Boolean logical expression, even if the expression can be established as True or False without evaluating all its terms. For example, in the following example, both <statement1> and <statement2> are evaluated, even if <statement1> resolves to False: <statement 1> AND <statement 2> Recommendations To avoid errors, check that all values and objects are not Null before attempting to use them. Examples The following examples: l demonstrate incorrect and correct usage of logical expressions l take into consideration how logical expressions are evaluated HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 83 of 154
  • 84. Incorrect Usage value.Name is evaluated even when its value is Null. This causes an error. Sub namecheck(value)         If Not IsNull(value) And value.Name = "aName" Then ' ... End If End Sub Correct Usage The code is correct on the condition that value is an object that contains the Name property. The code runs without errors. Sub namecheck(value)     If Not IsNull(value) And Not IsEmpty(value) Then         If value.Name = "aName" Then             ' ...         End If     End If End Sub Defining Default Behavior for Select Case and If-Then- Else Statements Unpredictable results can occur when no default action is defined for Select Case statements or If- Then-Else statements. Recommendations To avoid unpredictable results, always define default behavior when using Select Case of If-Then- Else statements. Example The following are examples of incorrect and correct ways to define default behavior for situations not covered by the existing Select Case and If-Then-Else statements. Incorrect Usage The author of this subroutine intends for the BG_USER_01 field to be visible only if the status of the defect is Open, New, or Reopen. However, if the IsVisible property of a Closed or Fixed defect was set to True prior to the instance of this subroutine, that Closed or Fixed defect will also be visible. This is because there is no case statement defined specifically for Closed and Fixed defects. HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 84 of 154
  • 85. Sub Bug_FieldChange(FieldName)     If FieldName="BG_STATUS" Then         Select Case Bug_Fields(FieldName).Value             Case "Open", "New", "Reopen" _ Bug_Fields("BG_USER_01").IsVisible = True         End Select     End If End Sub Correct Usage This subroutine effectively handles all possible cases. Sub Bug_FieldChange(FieldName)     If FieldName="BG_STATUS" Then         Select Case Bug_Fields(FieldName).Value             Case "Open", "New", "Reopen"                 Bug_Fields("BG_USER_01").IsVisible = True             Case Else                 Bug_Fields("BG_USER_01").IsVisible = False         End Select     End If End Sub Setting Return Values in Functions If a function ends without a return value, unpredictable and inconsistent results may occur. Also, it is difficult to debug behavior if a return code is not set. Recommendations To avoid unpredictable results, set a default return value at the beginning of each function. Making Sure that Entity Properties Are Set Before an Entity Comes into Focus It is common practice to set entity properties (such as IsVisible, IsRequired, and List) when creating or modifying a new entity (New or FieldChanged). When writing ALM workflow scripts, it is also important to set entity properties when the entity comes into focus (meaning, when the user navigates to that entity in the ALM graphical user interface). When an entity comes into focus, the MoveTo event is called. If entity values are not set in the MoveTo event, the end user experience is unpredictable—for example, incorrect values might be displayed in drop-down lists. HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 85 of 154
  • 86. Recommendations To avoid unpredictable results, such as a drop-down list not containing the most up-to-date set of values: l Make sure that all entity properties are set in the MoveTo event—not just in the New or FieldChanged events. l Isolate entity properties customization code into a separate routine and call that routine from all relevant events. Example The following table provides an example of how to make sure that properties of a defect are set appropriately when the defect is in focus—and not just when it is modified or added. Sub SetupBugFields(Context1, Context2)     ' Code for customizing defect properties is entered here,     ' such as set IsVisible, IsRequired, IsReadonly, Label, List...     If Context1="Focus" Then         ' Code for handling the focus event is entered here     ElseIf Context1="FieldChange" Then             If Context2="RQ_USER_01" Then         ' Code for handling the FieldChange event ' is entered here             ElseIf Context2="RQ_REQ_STATUS" Then                 ' ... Enter your code here             Else        ' ... Enter your code here End If End If End Sub Sub Req_FieldChange(FieldName)     If FieldName = "RQ_REQ_STATUS" Then         SetupBugFields("FieldChange", FieldName)     Else         ' ...Enter your code here     End If End Sub Sub Req_MoveTo         SetupBugFields("Focus") End Sub HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 86 of 154
  • 87. Check if a Dialog Box is Open It is helpful to track whether a dialog box is open before performing certain actions. For example: l Dialog boxes do not need to be refreshed but grid displays do. l Certain workflow events are not allowed when a dialog box is open. The DialogBox event can be used to track the visibility of dialog boxes. Recommendations To avoid unpredictable results, determine if a dialog box is open before any events occur. Example The following example checks whether the dialog box for creating a new defect is open. This is relevant because the BG_USER_01 field can only be modified for a new defect. If a different dialog box is open, such as the dialog box for editing a defect, the BG_USER_01 field cannot be modified. ' Declare a global variable for each dialog box of interest Dim NewDefectDialogIsOpen ' Initialize the global variable NewDefectDialogIsOpen = False Sub DialogBox(DialogBoxName, IsOpen)     If DialogBoxName="New Bug" Then         NewDefectDialogIsOpen = True     Else         NewDefectDialogIsOpen = False     End If End Sub Function Bug_FieldCanChange(FieldName, NewValue) ' Initialize the function's return value to avoid ' unpredictable behavior. Bug_FieldCanChange = True ' The BG_USER_01 field can only be modified for a new defect. If FieldName="BG_USER_01" Then     If NewDefectDialogIsOpen Then         Bug_FieldCanChange = True     Else        Bug_FieldCanChange = False     End If End If End Function HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 87 of 154
  • 88. Avoid Defining Duplicate Subroutines If you define a subroutine in one section and then add another subroutine with the same name in another section, the subroutines will conflict. One of them will be ignored. Example: If you define the subroutine, MySub, in the Test Lab module script section, and then define another subroutine, MySub, in the Manual Runner script section, one of your defined subroutines will be ignored. Recommendations To avoid unpredictable conflicts when defining subroutines, always check if another subroutine with the same name already exists in your project. Workflow Examples Example: Customizing a Defects Module Dialog Box This example shows how you can customize the field layout and other field properties in the Add Defect dialog box. You can create similar code to arrange the layout of the Defect Details dialog box. This example illustrates a solution that customizes field properties for all user groups. You can also use the script generators to customize the layout of the Defects module dialog boxes. If you use the script generators, you must perform customization separately for each user group. This example involves the following procedures: l SetFieldApp is a general purpose procedure that receives a field name and its properties as parameters, and assigns the properties to the field. See "SetFieldApp" on the next page. l FieldCust_AddDefect calls SetFieldApp for each field in the Add Defects dialog box, to set the properties of the field. For some of the fields, FieldCust_AddDefect checks the user group to which the current user belongs, and customizes the field properties accordingly. A call to FieldCust_AddDefect is placed in the Bug_New event procedure. See "FieldCust_AddDefect" on the next page. Note: To implement this example, you can run the Add Defect Field Customization script generator and then modify the resulting scripts. n Rename the generated function WizardFieldCust_Add to FieldCust_AddDefect and modify it as necessary. (Before you modify a generated script, you must rename it so that it is not overwritten the next time you run the script generator.) n The script generator places a call to WizardFieldCust_Add in the event procedure Bug_ New.Change this to FieldCust_AddDefect. HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 88 of 154
  • 89. n The function SetFieldApp is generated when you run the script generator. You do not need to rename or modify this function. SetFieldApp The subroutine SetFieldApp receives a field name and its properties as parameters, and assigns the properties to the field. The subroutine assigns the following field properties: field visibility, whether the field is required, the number of the page (tab) on which the field should be displayed, and the view order (from left to right and from top to bottom). Add a call to the subroutine SetFieldApp in the user-defined function FieldCust_AddDefect. For more information on this function, see "FieldCust_AddDefect" below. Sub SetFieldApp(FieldName, Vis, Req, PNo, VOrder)     On Error Resume Next     With Bug_Fields(FieldName)         .IsVisible = Vis         .IsRequired = Req         .PageNo = PNo         .ViewOrder = VOrder     End With     PrintError "SetFieldApp"     On Error GoTo 0 End Sub FieldCust_AddDefect The user-defined function FieldCust_AddDefect calls the function SetFieldApp. The function first sets all fields to be invisible, not required, and to appear on page 100 at location 0. This ensures that if you add a new field using the Project Entities link on the Project Customization window, the layout will not be changed. Add a call to FieldCust_AddDefect in the Bug_New event procedure so that it will be triggered when a user adds a new defect: Sub Bug_New FieldCust_AddDefect End Sub First, the code handles the fields that are common to all user groups. It uses conditional statements for the fields that will appear in the dialog box only for specific user groups, or that will have different properties for different users. Sub FieldCust_AddDefect         On Error Resume Next ' Initialize the fields of the defect         For i= 0 To Bug_Fields.Count -1 HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 89 of 154
  • 90.             SetFieldApp Bug_Fields.FieldByID(i).FieldName, _ False, False, 100, 0         Next         ViewNum = 0         PageNum = 0 ' Set fields that are in common for all user groups         SetFieldApp "BG_BUG_ID", True, True, PageNum, ViewNum         ViewNum = ViewNum + 1         SetFieldApp "BG_DESCRIPTION", True, False, PageNum, ViewNum         ViewNum = ViewNum + 1         SetFieldApp "BG_SUMMARY", True, True, PageNum, ViewNum         ViewNum = ViewNum + 1         SetFieldApp "BG_DETECTED_BY", True, True, PageNum, ViewNum         ViewNum = ViewNum + 1         SetFieldApp "BG_DETECTION_DATE", _ True, True, PageNum, ViewNum         ViewNum = ViewNum + 1         SetFieldApp "BG_DETECTION_VERSION", True, True, PageNum, _         ViewNum         ViewNum = ViewNum + 1         SetFieldApp "BG_SEVERITY", True, True, PageNum, ViewNum         ViewNum = ViewNum + 1         SetFieldApp "BG_PRIORITY", True, True, PageNum, ViewNum         ViewNum = ViewNum + 1         SetFieldApp "BG_PROJECT", True, False, PageNum, ViewNum         ViewNum = ViewNum + 1         SetFieldApp "BG_REPRODUCIBLE", True, False, PageNum, ViewNum         ViewNum = ViewNum + 1         SetFieldApp "BG_STATUS", True, False, PageNum, ViewNum         ViewNum = ViewNum + 1 ' Set fields that are different for different user groups. ' Since one user can belong to multiple user groups, ' or none of these groups, there is no need for an Else statement.         If User.IsInGroup("Developer") Then             SetFieldApp "BG_PLANNED_CLOSING_VERSION", True, False, _             PageNum, ViewNum             ViewNum = ViewNum + 1             SetFieldApp "BG_PLANNED_FIX_TIME", True, False, PageNum, _             ViewNum             ViewNum = ViewNum + 1         End If         If User.IsInGroup("QATester") Then             PageNum = PageNum + 1             SetFieldApp "BG_USER_01", True, False, PageNum, ViewNum             ViewNum = ViewNum + 1             SetFieldApp "BG_USER_02", True, False, PageNum, ViewNum             ViewNum = ViewNum + 1         End If HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 90 of 154
  • 91.         SetFieldApp "BG_ACTUAL_FIX_TIME", True, False, PageNum, _         ViewNum         ViewNum = ViewNum + 1 ' ...         PrintError "FieldCust_AddDefect"         On Error GoTo 0 End Sub Example: Changing Tab Names You can change the names of the tabs on the Add Defect dialog box. This example sets the tabs to General, Environments, and Business Case. Add the following code to the GetNewBugPageName event procedure, which is triggered before ALM opens the Add Defect dialog box. To change the tab names on the Defect Details dialog box, add similar code to the Defects_GetDetailsPageName event procedure. Sub Bug_New On Error Resume Next Bug_Fields.Field("BG_ACTUAL_FIX_TIME").PageNo = 1 Bug_Fields.Field("BG_ESTIMATED_FIX_TIME").PageNo = 2 On Error GoTo 0 End Sub Function GetDetailsPageName(PageName,PageNum) On Error Resume Next if ActiveDialogName = "New Bug" then Select case PageNum case "1" GetDetailsPageName="General" case "2" GetDetailsPageName="Environments" case else GetDetailsPageName="Business Case" End Select end if On Error GoTo 0 End Function HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 91 of 154
  • 92. Example: Adding a Template to a Memo Field You can use workflow scripts to add a default template to a memo field. This example adds text to a memo field called Business Case to display the following template: Perform this customization by placing the HTML code for the text into the BG_USER_25 field when a defect is added. This example assumes that the user-defined field BG_USER_25 stores a business case string. Add the code to the Bug_New event procedure, which is triggered when a user adds a new defect. Sub Bug_New         On Error Resume Next         Bug_Fields("BG_USER_25").value = _         "<html><body><b>Step by step scenario:</b>" & _         "<br><br><br><b>How it affects the user:</b></body></html>"         PrintError "Bug_New"         On Error GoTo 0 End Sub Example: Changing One Field Based on Another Field This example demonstrates how you can change a field value based on the value entered into another field. For example, you can cause defects to be assigned to user alex_qc when UI Suggestion is typed into the Category field, and to user alice_qc when Security Issues is typed. The example assumes that the user-defined field BG_USER_05 is used to store the category. When the Category field is changed in the Defects module, the BG_RESPONSIBLE field is assigned the appropriate value. Add the code to the Bug_FieldChange event procedure so that it is triggered when a user changes a field value for a defect. Sub Bug_FieldChange(FieldName)         On Error Resume Next HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 92 of 154
  • 93.         If FieldName = "BG_USER_05" then             Select case Bug_Fields("BG_USER_05").Value             case "UI Suggestion"                 Bug_Fields("BG_RESPONSIBLE").value="alex_qc"             case "Security Issue"                 Bug_Fields("BG_RESPONSIBLE").value="alice_qc"             Case Else                 Bug_Fields("BG_RESPONSIBLE").value="non-assigned"             End Select         End If         PrintError "Bug_FieldChange"         On Error GoTo 0 End Sub Example: Changing a Field Based on the User Group This example demonstrates how you can change a field value according to the user group of the user entering the defect. In this example, the user-defined field BG_USER_01 is a detection mode field in which the user who detected the defect can enter the way in which it was discovered. Possible values are Formal testing, Informal testing, and BTW. The example sets the value of the detection mode field to BTW when a defect is opened by a user who is not in the QA Tester group. If the defect is opened by a user who is in the QA Tester group, the default value Formal testing is set. Add the code to event procedure Bug_New, so that it is triggered when a defect is added. Sub Bug_New         On Error Resume Next         If not User.IsInGroup("QATester") then             Bug_Fields("BG_USER_01").Value = "BTW"         Else             Bug_Fields("BG_USER_01").Value = "Formal testing"         End If         PrintError "Bug_New"         On Error GoTo 0 End Sub Example: Object Validation This example demonstrates how you can perform validations of all fields by using the CanPost event procedure. For example, this code segment ensures that a user cannot reject a defect without adding a comment. In this example, a user may not post a defect where the defect status (BG_STATUS) has been changed to Rejected unless some explanatory text has been typed in the R&D Comment field (BG_DEV_COMMENTS). HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 93 of 154
  • 94. Add the code to the Bug_CanPost event procedure so that the check is performed when the user attempts to submit the defect. Function Bug_CanPost         ' Initialize the function's return value ' to avoid unpredictable behavior.         Bug_CanPost = False         On Error Resume Next         If Bug_Fields("BG_STATUS").IsModified and _         Bug_Fields("BG_STATUS").Value = "Rejected" and _         not Bug_Fields("BG_DEV_COMMENTS").IsModified then             Bug_CanPost = False             msgbox "You must enter a comment when rejecting a defect."         Else             Bug_CanPost = True         End If         PrintError "Bug_CanPost"         On Error GoTo 0 End Function Example: Field Validation This example demonstrates how to validate a single field value. For example, the following code segment shows how you can ensure that a user in a specific group cannot lower the priority of a defect. In this example, if the user is in the QATester group and the BG_PRIORITY field is being modified, the new value of the BG_PRIORITY field cannot be lower than the current value. This example assumes that in the Priority field list for the project, lower priorities come first when the values are sorted in ascending order. For example, the list meets this requirement if the elements are as follows: 1-Low, 2-Medium, 3-High. Add the code to the Bug_FieldCanChange event procedure so that it is triggered when the user attempts to change a defect field value. Function Bug_FieldCanChange(FieldName, NewValue)         ' Initialize the function's return value ' to avoid unpredictable behavior.         Bug_FieldCanChange = True         On Error Resume Next         If User.IsInGroup("QATester") and FieldName ="BG_PRIORITY" _ Then             If NewValue < Bug_Fields("BG_PRIORITY").Value then                 Bug_FieldCanChange = False                 msgbox "You do not have permission to lower " _ & "defect priority."             Else                 Bug_FieldCanChange = True             End If         Else HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 94 of 154
  • 95.             ' Enter your code here.         End If         PrintError "Bug_FieldCanChange"         On Error GoTo 0 End Function Example: Presenting a Dynamic Field List This example demonstrates how you can present a different field list in a field, depending on the value of another field. The user-defined function SW_SetLists_Environment checks the value of the Environment Specification field and assigns the appropriate field list to the Environment Type field. This example assumes that the field lists have been defined in the project. Note: To use workflow scripts to change or create lists that can be assigned to fields, you must use the Open Test Architecture (OTA) interface. Add code to the Bug_MoveTo event procedure so that the user-defined function SW_SetLists_ Environment is called when the user changes focus in the defects module. Sub Bug_MoveTo()         On Error Resume Next         SW_SetLists_Environment         PrintError "Bug_MoveTo"         On Error GoTo 0 End Sub Add code to the Bug_FieldChange event procedure so that the user-defined function SW_ SetLists_Environment is called when a user changes the value of the Environment Type field in the Defects module. Sub Bug_FieldChange(FieldName)         On Error Resume Next         If FieldName = "BG_USER_01" then             SW_SetLists_Environment         Else             ' Enter your code here.         End If         PrintError "Bug_FieldChange"         On Error GoTo 0 End Sub The user-defined function SW_SetLists_Environment checks the value of the Environment Specification field (BG_USER_02) and assigns the appropriate field list to the Environment Type field (BG_USER_01). Sub SW_SetLists_Environment()         Dim listName         On Error Resume Next         Select Case Bug_Fields("BG_USER_01").Value HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 95 of 154
  • 96.         Case "Browser"             listName = "Browsers"         Case "Database Type"             listName = "Database Type"         Case "Operating System"             listName = "Platform"         Case "Web Server"             listName = "Web Server"         Case Else             listName = "Environment Specification"         End Select         Bug_Fields("BG_USER_02").List = Lists(listName)         PrintError ("Set Environment List")         On Error GoTo 0 End Sub Example: Changing Field Properties when a Field Changes This example demonstrates how you can change the properties of a field when a different field is changed. In this example, if the status of the defect (BG_STATUS) is changed to Closed, the user must provide a value in the field Closed in Build (BG_CLOSING_VERSION). Add the code to the Bug_FieldChange event procedure, to make the Closed in Build field a required field if the status is changed to Closed. Sub Bug_FieldChange(FieldName)         On Error Resume Next         If FieldName= "BG_STATUS" then             If Bug_Fields("BG_STATUS").value="Closed" then                 Bug_Fields("BG_CLOSING_VERSION").IsRequired=True             Else                 Bug_Fields("BG_CLOSING_VERSION").IsRequired=False             End If         Else             ' Enter your code here.         End If         PrintError "Bug_FieldChange"         On Error GoTo 0 End Sub Example: Controlling User Permissions This example demonstrates how you can prevent members of specific user groups from performing an action. The code allows a user to replace a defect field value only if the user belongs to the Admin user group. HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 96 of 154
  • 97. Add the code to the ActionCanExecute event procedure so that the check is performed when a user attempts to execute an action. Function ActionCanExecute(ActionName)         ' Initialize the function's return value ' to avoid unpredictable behavior.         ActionCanExecute = False         On Error Resume Next         If ActionName = "UserDefinedActions.BugReplaceAction1" _             And Not User.IsInGroup("Admin") then             ActionCanExecute = False             msgbox "You do not have permission to perform this action"         Else             ActionCanExecute = True         End If         PrintError "ActionCanExecute"         On Error GoTo 0 End Function Example: Adding Button Functionality This example opens a calculator when a user clicks a button defined with action name Calculator. Add the code to the ActionCanExecute event procedure, so that it is triggered when a user initiates an action. For information about the Wscript.Shell object, refer to the Microsoft documentation. To access help for the VBScript language, choose Help > VBScript Home Page in the Script Editor. Function ActionCanExecute(ActionName)         ' Initialize the function's return value to ' avoid unpredictable behavior.         ActionCanExecute = DefaultRes         On Error Resume Next         If ActionName = "UserDefinedActions.Calculator" Then             Set shell = CreateObject("Wscript.Shell") shell.Run "Calc"             Set shell = Nothing         End If         ActionCanExecute = DefaultRes         PrintError "ActionCanExecute"         On Error GoTo 0 End Function Example: Error Handling This example demonstrates how you can display a standard error message. Error handling should be added to each workflow script that you write, because errors that are not detected by the workflow code can cause the user's browser to crash. HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 97 of 154
  • 98. The user-defined function PrintError receives the name of the calling procedure as a parameter. If an error has occurred, PrintError prints out the error number, description and severity, and the name of the procedure in which the error occurred. You do not need to create an Err object, because it is intrinsic to VBScript. For more information about the Err object, refer to the Microsoft documentation. Sub PrintError(strFunctionName)         If Err.Number <> 0 Then             MsgBox "Error #" & Err.Number & ": " & Err.Description, _             vbOKOnly+vbCritical, _             "Workflow Error in Function " & strFunctionName         End If End Sub The following code segment illustrates how you can add error handling to your subroutines. Sub <sub_name>()         On Error Resume Next         ... [Your code here]         ...         PrintError "<sub_name>" End Sub The following code segment illustrates how you can add error handling to your functions. Function <function_name>()         On Error Resume Next         ... [Your code here]         ...         PrintError "<function_name>" End Function Example: Obtaining Session Properties This example demonstrates how to use the TDConnection object to obtain the properties of the current session. Add the code to the procedure where these properties are needed. The properties do not depend on each other, so each of the properties can be retrieved separately. The following are examples of session properties: TDConnection.ServerName TDConnection.ServerTime TDConnection.DomainName TDConnection.ProjectName User.UserName Note that there is no need to use TDConnection to retrieve the user name because the workflow has a predefined User object. For more information, see "TDConnection Object" on page 78. HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 98 of 154
  • 99. The example below tests the first five characters of the server URL to determine whether the user is connected to the server using HTTP or HTTPS: If Left(UCase(TDConnection.ServerName), 5) = "HTTPS" Then         MsgBox "You are currently connected to the server using SSL." Else         MsgBox "You are not using SSL." End If Example: Sending Mail These examples demonstrate how to use the TDConnection object to send mail when a defect is submitted, and to send mail when a field value changes in the Test Plan module. Sending Mail when a Defect is Submitted This example sends mail when a defect is submitted. Add a call to the SendDefect procedure in the Bug_AfterPost event procedure. Note: If the SendDefect procedure is called before the defect is submitted, the values that were changed in the current modification will not be included. The database is updated with the new values only after the defect is posted. Sub SendDefect (iObjectId, strTo, strCc, strSubject, strComment)         On Error Resume Next         Dim objBugFactory, objBug         Set objBugFactory = TDConnection.BugFactory         Set objBug = objBugFactory.Item(iObjectId)         objBug.Mail strTo, strCc, 2, strSubject, strComment         Set objBug = Nothing         Set objBugFactory = Nothing         PrintError "SendDefect"         On Error GoTo 0 End Sub The constant 2 in the call to objBug.Mail indicates that the history should be included with the mail. For a list of the constants that can be used to customize email, refer to the tagTDMAIL_FLAGS enumeration in the HP ALM Open Test Architecture API Reference. In workflow scripts, use numeric constants and not the enumeration values. Sending Mail when a Test Plan Module Field Value Changes The example below demonstrates mail notification when the value of the status field is changed in the Test Plan module. The code is added to the Test_FieldChange event procedure. It constructs a subject and comment for the email, and calls a user-defined function, SendTest. SendTest sends mail from the HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 99 of 154
  • 100. Test Plan module. You can code SendTest similarly to the SendDefect subroutine shown in "Sending Mail when a Defect is Submitted" on the previous page. Sub Test_FieldChange(FieldName)         On Error Resume Next         Dim strSubject, strComment         If FieldName = "TS_STATUS" Then             strSubject = "Test Change Notification" & _                 " for project " & TDConnection.ProjectName & _                 " in domain " & TDConnection.DomainName             strComment = "The user " & User.FullName & _                 " changed the status of the test " & _ Test_Fields("TS_NAME").Value & _                 " to " & Test_Fields("TS_STATUS").Value SendTest Test_Fields("TS_TEST_ID").Value, _                 Test_Fields("TS_RESPONSIBLE").Value, "[QA Testers]", _                 strSubject, StrComment         End If End Sub Example: Storing the Last Values Entered This example shows how to use the TDConnection object to implement persistent data between actions. The lifetime of a variable in a routine is only for the routine run. Therefore, persistent data must be stored if it must be available later. It is recommended that you use the ALM API to store persistent data whenever possible instead of using external objects, files, or the registry. In this example, a user-defined function SW_KeepLastValue uses the Settings object to save the values typed into the fields BG_DETECTION_VERSION, BG_USER_01, and BG_USER_03 when a user posts a defect. These values are retrieved and assigned as default values when this user adds a new defect. The user-defined function is called with the SET action from Bug_CanPost, before a new defect is posted by the user. The values in the fields are stored. Function Bug_CanPost()         ' Initialize the function's return value to ' avoid unpredictable behavior.         Bug_CanPost = True         If Bug_Fields("BG_BUG_ID").Value = "" Then             SW_KeepLastValue ("SET")         End If End Function The function is called with the GET action from the Bug_New event procedure. When a user adds a new defect, the values stored in the fields for this user are entered into these fields. Sub Bug_New() SW_KeepLastValue ("GET") End Sub HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 100 of 154
  • 101. Depending on the action passed as a parameter, the user-defined function SW_KeepLastValue stores the values of the fields in the common settings table for the current user, or reads the values from the Settings object and assigns the values to the appropriate fields. Sub SW_KeepLastValue(action) Dim tdc, vals, flds Dim uset, pairs, pair Dim bld On Error Resume Next         bld = ""         Set tdc = TDConnection         Set uset = tdc.UserSettings         If action = "SET" Then             flds = Array("BG_DETECTION_VERSION", _             "BG_USER_01", "BG_USER_03")             vals = ""             For i = 0 To UBound(flds)                 If vals <> "" Then vals = vals & ";"                 vals = vals & flds(i) & "=" & _ Bug_Fields(flds(i)).Value             Next             'Open category KeepLValueSetting             uset.Open ("KeepLValueSetting")             'Setting KeepValueFields in category KeepLValueSetting             uset.Value("KeepValueFields") = vals             uset.Close         End If 'SET         If action = "GET" Then             uset.Open ("KeepLValueSetting")             vals = uset.Value("KeepValueFields")             If vals <> "" Then                 pairs = Split(vals, ";")                 For i = 0 To UBound(pairs)                     pair = Split(pairs(i), "=")                     If UBound(pair) = 1 Then                         Select Case pair(0)                             Case "BG_USER_03"                                 bld = pair(1)                             Case Else                                 If Bug_Fields(pair(0)).Value = "" Then                                    Bug_Fields(pair(0)).Value = pair(1) End If                         End Select                         If Bug_Fields("BG_DETECTION_VERSION").Value _ <> ""                         And bld <> "" Then                             SW_SetLists_VersionsBuilds _                             "BG_DETECTION_VERSION", _                             "BG_USER_03"                             Bug_Fields("BG_USER_03").Value = bld HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 101 of 154
  • 102.                             If Err.Number <> 0 Then Err.Clear                         End If 'Bug_Fields                     End If 'UBound(pair)                 Next             End If 'vals <> ""         End If 'GET         uset.Close         PrintError ("Keep Last Value (" & action & ")")         On Error GoTo 0 End Sub Example: Copying Field Values to Another Object This example shows how to use the TDConnection object to copy the value from the Build Number field of a Run (RN_USER_02) to the Last Ran On Build field of a Test in a Test Set (TC_ USER_03). Add the code to the Run_AfterPost event procedure. Sub Run_AfterPost         On Error Resume Next         Dim tdc         set tdc = TDConnection         Dim TSFact 'As TestSetFactory         Set TSFact = tdc.TestSetFactory         Dim TstSet 'As TestSet         Set TstSet = TSFact.Item(Run_Fields("RN_CYCLE_ID").Value)         MsgBox TstSet.Name         Dim TSTestFact 'As TSTestFactory         Set TSTestFact = TstSet.TSTestFactory         Dim TSTst 'As TSTest         Set TSTst = _ TSTestFact.Item(Run_Fields("RN_TESTCYCL_ID").Value)         MsgBox TSTst.Name         TSTst.Field("tc_user_03").value = _ Run_Fields("RN_USER_02").Value         TSTst.Post         PrintError ("Run_AfterPost")         On Error GoTo 0 End Sub HP ALM Docs on Tap Workflow HP ALM (12.00) Page 102 of 154
  • 103. Installation Prerequisites Pre-Installation Checklist Review and verify the following checklist before installing ALM. This checklist outlines the information that you must supply during the installation process. For detailed prerequisite information, see the chapters in this part that are relevant to your installation. Check Information Required Installation Machine l Operating system version l CPU type l Free disk space l Free memory For the list of supported system environments, refer to the Readme. Note: The supported environment information in the Readme is accurate for the ALM12.00 release, but there may be subsequent updates. For the most up-to-date supported environments, refer to the HP Software Web site using the following URL: http://www.hp.com/go/TDQC_SysReq. Setup Paths l Installation path l Deployment path Note: l You can accept the default paths offered by the Installation and Configuration wizards, or enter alternative paths. l The installation path must not include folders with accented characters (for example, ä, ç, ñ). l The installation path and the deployment path cannot contain non- English characters. l You must have full permissions on the installation and deployment directories. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 103 of 154
  • 104. Check Information Required License Key License file Cluster Description l Is clustering used? l Cluster hosts Encryption Passphrases l Communication security passphrase l Confidential data passphrase Note: In a cluster, use the same passphrase on all nodes. Application Server The port number Mail Server l Server type l Server host l Server port Demo Project Do you require the Web-based demo application for work with the HP Application Lifecycle Management Tutorial? Database Server l Database type l Database version l Database server name l Database administrator user name l Database administrator user password l Database port l Database SID (Oracle only) l Default tablespace (Oracle only) l Temp tablespace (Oracle only) Site Administration l Site administrator user name l Site administrator password HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 104 of 154
  • 105. Check Information Required Existing ALM/Quality Center Installation If there is an existing Site Administration schema, provide the following information for the existing version: l ALM/Quality Center version l ALM/Quality Center host l Confidential data passphrase l Database server name l Database administrator user name l Database administrator password l Site Administration database schema name l Site Administration database schema password l Repository folder location l Site administrator user name l Site administrator password Repository Repository folder location Prerequisites: Windows Operating Systems System Configurations: Windows Verify that your server machine meets the ALM system configurations. For the recommended and supported system configurations for your ALM server machine, refer to the Readme. Note: The supported environment information in the Readme is accurate for the ALM 12.00 release, but there may be subsequent updates. For the most up-to-date supported environments, refer to the HP Software Web site using the following URL: http://www.hp.com/go/TDQC_SysReq. ALM can be deployed on a VMware ESX/ESXi server according to the VMWare guest operating system compatibility matrix. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 105 of 154
  • 106. Required Permissions: Windows Verify that you have the required permissions to install ALM on a server machine. Note: Some permissions require access to the ProgramData folder. This folder is hidden by default. To show hidden files and folders, perform the relevant steps for your operating system. l If you are upgrading from a previous version of ALM/Quality Center with a remote repository, the ALM/Quality Center application server user account must have network access to the remote repository. For more information, contact your network administrator. l You must be logged on as a local or domain user with administrator permissions. Your user name cannot include a pound sign (#) or accented characters (such as, ä, ç, ñ). l You must disable User Account Control (UAC) during the ALM installation and configuration. Note: In Windows 8, UAC cannot be completely disabled. Instead, use the Run as Administrator option during installation and configuration. l The Distributed Link Tracking Client service must be stopped during the ALM installation and configuration. l We recommend disabling anti-virus software during the ALM installation and configuration. l You must have the following file system and registry key permissions: n Full read permissions to all the files and directories under the directory in which ALM is installed. The installation directory path is specified by the user during installation. By default, ALM writes the installation files to: C:Program FilesHPHP Application Lifecycle Management. n Full read, write, and execute permissions to the directory on which ALM is deployed. The deployment directory is specified by the user during installation. By default, ALM is deployed in C:ProgramDataHPALM. n Full read and write permissions to the repository directory, which contains the sa and qc directories. The repository path is specified by the user during installation. By default, it is located under the ALM deployment directory. For more information on the repository, refer to the HP Application Lifecycle Management Administrator Guide. n Full read permissions to the system root (%systemroot%) directory. If you do not have these permissions, you can still install ALM, but you cannot install any patches. n Full read and write permissions to the installation and configuration log files directory. Installation and configuration log files are written to C:ProgramDataHPALMlog. n Full read and write permissions to all the keys under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREMercury Interactive. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 106 of 154
  • 107. Clustering: Windows Check with your system administrator whether you are installing ALM on a single node or as a cluster. If you are installing ALM on cluster nodes, verify which machine to use as the first node to start the installation and the number of machines you should use. This depends on the number of users and availability considerations. When installing on additional nodes: l ALM version. You must install the same version of ALM on all nodes. l Operating System. You must install the same version of the operating system, including all patches, updates, or hot fixes, on all nodes. l Site Administration schema. All nodes must point to the Site Administration schema. l Database details. Configure all nodes with the same database information. l Confidential Data Passphrase. You must use the same Confidential Data Passphrase on all nodes. l Repository path. All nodes must point to the repository path that is defined on the first node. It is important that you enter the repository path using the exact same characters on all nodes. For example, you cannot have the path on the first server node defined as c:almrepository and on additional nodes defined as server1c$almrepository—the server1c$almrepository path must appear on every node. ALM Repository Path: Windows The location of the repository directory is specified by the user during installation. The default location is: C:ProgramDataHPALMrepository. You must have full control permissions to the ALM repository path as described in "Required Permissions: Windows" on the previous page. Prerequisites: Linux/Oracle Solaris Operating Systems System Configurations: Linux Verify that your server machine meets the ALM system configurations. For the recommended and supported system configurations for your ALM server machine, refer to the Readme. Note: The supported environment information in the Readme is accurate for the ALM12.00 release, but there may be subsequent updates. For the most up-to-date supported environments, refer to the HP Software Web site using the following URL: http://www.hp.com/go/TDQC_SysReq. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 107 of 154
  • 108. Consider the following for implementing ALM configurations: l Verify that you have a supported kernel by running uname -a. l ALM can be deployed on a VMware ESX/ESXi server according to the VMWare guest operating system compatibility matrix. Installing ALM for Non-Root Users By default, the ALM installer for the Linux operating systems requires a root user. If you are unable to work with ALM using the root user because of security concerns, speak to your system administrator about using a non-root user with sudo permissions to install and run ALM. Note: Installing ALM as non-root user without sudo permissions is not supported and causes installation problems. To use a non-root user with sudo permissions to install and run ALM: Note: The sudo package is included by default on some systems. These instructions assume that sudo is installed on the target machine. If sudo is not included by default, it can be downloaded and installed from http://www.gratisoft.us/sudo/download.html. 1. Create an ALM_Admin user. 2. Edit the sudoers file to grant sudo permissions to the ALM_Admin user within the ALM installation directory. This allows the ALM_Admin user to run the installation file with root privileges. Example If the administrator decides that the ALM installation directory is /user/Install/ALM, the following line should be added to the sudoers file: qcadmin ALL=NOPASSWD:/user/Install/ALM 3. Check if the /var/opt/HP folder exists. If it does not exist, create it. 4. Give the ALM_Admin user Read/Write/Execute permissions to the /var/opt/HP folder. 5. Move the ALM installation file to the installation directory, /user/Install/ALM. 6. Use the ALM_Admin user to run the installation script and start ALM. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 108 of 154
  • 109. Required Permissions: Linux The following permissions are required: l Verify that you have the required permissions to install ALM on a server machine. l If you are upgrading from a previous version of ALM/Quality Center with a remote repository, the ALM/Quality Center application server user account must have network access to the remote repository. For more information. contact your network administrator. l You must be logged on as a local or domain user with administrator permissions. Your user name cannot include a pound sign (#) or accented characters (such as, ä, ç, ñ). l To install ALM, you must have the following file system permissions: n Full read and write permissions for all the files and directories under the directory on which ALM is installed. The installation files are used for configuring the server. By default, the ALM installation files are written to: /var/opt/HP/HP_ALM_Server. n Full read and write permissions to the directory on which ALM is deployed. The deployment directory is specified by the user during installation. By default, ALM is deployed on: /var/opt/HP/ALM. n Full read and write permissions to the repository directory, which contains the sa and qc directories. The repository path is specified by the user during installation. By default, it is located under the ALM deployment directory. For more information on the repository, refer to the HP Application Lifecycle Management Administrator Guide. n Full read and write permissions to the installation and configuration log files directory. Installation and configuration log files are written to: /var/opt/HP/ALM/log. n Full read and write permissions to the file delivery logs. The log files are written to: /var/log. n If the file repository is located on a remote machine: o On the file server machine, share the file repository directory so that the user running the installation is the owner of the files. o On the ALM machine, or on each cluster node, create a mount directory that points to the file repository directory. Minimum Disk Space Requirements The following partitions have minimum disk space requirements: l /opt. Requires at least enough free space to accommodate the size of ALM after it has been installed. The approximate size of an installation is 300MB, though the exact amount of space may vary from installation to installation. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 109 of 154
  • 110. l /var. Requires at least enough free space equal to the space on the installation DVD, approximately 150MB. A copy of the installation is stored in this partition. l /tmp. Requires a large amount of free space. The exact amount cannot be specified as this partition is also consumed by the operating system. It is advisable that the amount of free space is equal in size to ALM after it has been installed, which is approximately 300MB. Clustering: Linux Check with your system administrator whether you are installing ALM on a single node or as a cluster. If you are installing ALM on cluster nodes, verify which machine to use as the first node to start the installation and the number of machines you should use. This depends on the number of users and availability considerations. When installing on additional nodes: l ALM version. You must install the same version of on all nodes. l Operating System. You must install the same version of the operating system, including all patches, updates, or hot fixes, on all nodes. l Site Administration schema. All nodes must point to the Site Administration schema. l Database details. All nodes must be configured with the same database information. l Confidential Data Passphrase. You must use the same Confidential Data Passphrase on all nodes. l Repository path. You must mount the file system repository before you start the installation process. The mount should not use any cache mechanisms. For details, contact your network administrator. All nodes must mount the shared file server with the same mount name. For example, if the file server is some.server.org, and it is mounted on /mnt/some_server on the first node, it should be mounted with /mnt/some_server on all nodes. ALM Repository Path: Linux The location of the repository directory is specified by the user during installation. The default location is: /var/opt/HP/ALM/repository. You must have full control permissions to the ALM repository path as described in "Required Permissions: Linux" on the previous page. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 110 of 154
  • 111. Prerequisites: Oracle Database Servers Connecting ALM to an Oracle Database Server User Permissions for Connecting ALM to an Oracle Database Server Database Administrative User Privileges Following are the privileges required by the ALM database administrative user. Additional explanations about these privileges can be found in the notes at the end of the table. Privilege Description CREATE SESSION WITH ADMIN OPTION (1) ALM uses this privilege to connect to the database as the ALM database administrative user. CREATE USER Required to create a new project user schema when creating a new ALM project. DROP USER When deleting an ALM project, ALM attempts to remove the Site Administration database schema from the database server. If there is an insufficient privileges error, ALM ignores the error and requests that the user notify the database administrator to delete (drop) the database user schema. CREATE TABLE WITH ADMIN OPTION (1) Required for granting this permission to a newly created ALM project user schema. CREATE VIEW WITH ADMIN OPTION (1) Required to create views for ALM projects. CREATE TRIGGER WITH ADMIN OPTION (1) Required to create triggers for ALM projects. ALM uses database triggers to collect change history for specific tables. CREATE SEQUENCE WITH ADMIN OPTION (1) Required to create sequences for ALM projects. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 111 of 154
  • 112. Privilege Description CREATE PROCEDURE WITH ADMIN OPTION (1) Required to create stored packages for ALM projects. ALM uses packages to collect change history for specific tables. CTXAPP ROLE WITH ADMIN OPTION (1) Enables ALM to use the Oracle text searching feature. This role exists only if the Oracle text search component was installed and enabled on the database server. SELECT ON DBA_FREE_ SPACE (2) Required to check free space on the database server prior to creating a new Site Administration database schema or a new project. SELECT ON SYS.DBA_ TABLESPACES (2) Required to collect a list of tablespaces that exist on the database server prior to creating a new Site Administration database schema or a new project. SELECT ON SYS.DBA_ USERS (2) Required to verify the existence of specific database project users. For example, you might want to verify the existence of an Oracle CTXSYS user before creating a new ALM project. SELECT ON SYS.DBA_ REGISTRY (2) Required to verify that the text search component is installed on the database server. SELECT ON SYS.DBA_ ROLES (2) Required to verify that the text search role (CTXAPP) is installed on the database server. SELECT ANY TABLE WITH ADMIN OPTION (1) and INSERT ANY TABLE Required for various administrative operations when upgrading the Site Administration database schema during installation using the copy and upgrade method, and for enhancing performance when copying a project that has the same source and target database server. Note: l (1) An ALM database administrative user must have privileges with Admin Option. l (2) The SELECT ON SYS privileges can be given directly by the table owner, or through a database application role. To avoid giving these privileges each time, you can grant this role to the ALM database administrative user. The recommended name for this role is QC_ SELECT_ON_SYS_OBJECTS. You can create this role using the qc_sys_db___ oracle.sql example script, which is located in the UtilitiesDatabases_scripts directory HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 112 of 154
  • 113. on the installation DVD. You should run this script before you run the qc_admin_db___ oracle.sql script. Project User Privileges When creating a new project, ALM creates a project user schema. This user schema hosts all the tables that are used by the project for storing and retrieving data. Following are the required privileges for an ALM project user schema: Project User Schema Privilege Description QUOTA UNLIMITED ON <default tablespace> Required for creating database objects that are owned by the ALM project user schema. This privilege allows users to create tables in the default tablespace. It replaces the UNLIMITED TABLESPACE system privilege that gave users system privileges to create tables in any tablespace, including the SYSTEM tablespace. CREATE SESSION ALM uses this privilege to connect to the database user schema to perform required operations. For example creating database objects such as tables, and using them to insert, retrieve, and delete data. l CREATE TABLE l CREATE VIEW l CREATE TRIGGER l CREATE SEQUENCE l CREATE PROCEDURE l CTXAPP Role For a description of these privileges, see "Database Administrative User Privileges" on page 111. Tip: The installation DVD contains an example script that describes the recommended permissions required for the ALM database project user schema. This script contains information and does not need to be run. It is located at UtilitiesDatabases_scriptsqc_ project_db_oracle.sql. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 113 of 154
  • 114. Site Administration Database Schema Considerations: Oracle Be aware of the following schema name and password considerations: l The default Site Administration database schema name is qcsiteadmin_db. If you want to rename the schema, you can change the name when configuring the ALM installation. l You can create your own ALM user password for accessing the Site Administration database schema. l If there is an existing Site Administration database schema, you can create a copy of the existing schema and upgrade the copy. This enables you to work with ALM 12.00 and previous versions of ALM/Quality Center simultaneously. Note: This scenario does not apply to working with Performance Center projects. After you upgrade LAB_PROJECT, you must then upgrade Performance Center projects before they can be used. Oracle RAC Support Oracle RAC is a way to enhance Oracle database availability and scalability, allowing it to interact with more than one database instance. ALM RAC support includes: l Load balancing between Oracle instances. l Failover between all specified Oracle RAC nodes at initial connection. ALM RAC support does not include: l TAF (Transparent Application Failover) support. A user failing to complete a request upon an Oracle instance crash is required to perform the activity again with a working Oracle instance. To enable Oracle RAC support: 1. Verify that a file containing information of Oracle database addresses is saved on your ALM machine. The file is named tnsnames.ora. The file should contain information similar to the following examples: a. This first example shows an RAC TNS Alias using all cluster nodes in the ADDRESS sub- section and a sample of utilizing the Load balance and Failover features: OrgRAC = HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 114 of 154
  • 115. (DESCRIPTION = (ADDRESS_LIST= (FAILOVER = on) (LOAD_BALANCE = on) (ADDRESS= (PROTOCOL = TCP)(HOST = server1)(PORT = 1521)) (ADDRESS= (PROTOCOL = TCP)(HOST = server2)(PORT = 1521)) (ADDRESS= (PROTOCOL = TCP)(HOST = server3)(PORT = 1521)) ) (CONNECT_DATA= (SERVICE_NAME = myrac.yourcompany.com) ) ) b. This second example shows an RAC TNS Alias using Single Client Access Name (SCAN). This enables Oracle 11gR2 clients to connect to the database with the ability to resolve multiple IP addresses, reflect multiple listeners in the cluster and handle public client connections. For more information on working with RAC SCAN, refer to the Oracle documentation. OrgRAC_Scan = (DESCRIPTION = (ADDRESS_LIST= (FAILOVER = on) (LOAD_BALANCE = on) (ADDRESS= (PROTOCOL = TCP)(HOST = myrac-cluster-scan)(PORT = 1521)) (CONNECT_DATA= (SERVICE_NAME = myrac.yourcompany.com) ) ) 2. Verify that you have the address of the TNS server to which ALM should refer, for example, OrgRAC. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 115 of 154
  • 116. Prerequisites: Microsoft SQL Database Servers Connecting ALM to a Microsoft SQL Database Server Verify the following: Database type and version Verify that ALM supports your database type and version. For the list of supported databases, refer to: refer to the Readme. Note: The supported environment information in the Readme is accurate for the ALM12.00 release, but there may be subsequent updates. For the most up-to- date supported environments, refer to the HP Software Web site using the following URL: http://www.hp.com/go/TDQC_ SysReq. Database server name Verify the name of the database server. Database user permissions Verify that you have the database permissions required to connect ALM to the Microsoft SQL database server (not applicable for Windows Authentication). For a list of required permissions, see "User Permissions for Connecting ALM to a Microsoft SQL Database Server" on the next page. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 116 of 154
  • 117. Site Administration database schema To install ALM on an existing Site Administration database schema (second node or upgrade), you must have: l The existing database schema name and the database administrator permissions required to connect ALM to the database server. l Full read/write permissions on the existing repository. l ALM must have access to the previous Site Administration schema repository path. l Full read/write permissions for the ALM user to the previous schema repository path. l The Confidential Data Passphrase that was used to create the existing schema. For schema name and password considerations, see "Site Administration Database Schema Considerations: SQL" on page 119. Text Search Verify that the text search component is installed on the server, even if you do not intend to use it. User Permissions for Connecting ALM to a Microsoft SQL Database Server To connect ALM to a Microsoft SQL database server, the installing database user must have sufficient permissions to perform certain administrative tasks in SQL. If you have the SQL sa login, you can use it to install ALM. If you are unable to use the SQL sa login due to security reasons, it is recommended that your database administrator create an ALM database administrative login, for example td_db_admin, with the specific privileges required to install ALM. The td_db_admin login must have the Database Creators role. You must also grant the td_db_ admin login the Security Administrators role. This allows the td_db_admin login to create and add the td user with only those privileges required for running ALM, and to run the Maintain Project activities, such as Verify, Repair, and Update. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 117 of 154
  • 118. To create an ALM database administrative login on a Microsoft SQL Server: 1. Open the SQL Server Management Studio. 2. In the Object Explorer pane, under the ALM database server, expand the Security folder. 3. Right-click the Logins folder, and select New Login. 4. Type td_db_admin as the login name, and select the authentication type (enter password if necessary). 5. Click the Server Roles tab, and select the dbcreator and securityadmin options. 6. Click OK. To test the ALM database administrative login after connecting via this login (SQL Server Authentication): 1. Verify the select sysdatabases table permission in the master database: SELECT name FROM sysdatabases where name=<db_name> 2. Verify the create database permission: CREATE DATABASE <dbName> -- the database name must not already exist 3. Verify the drop database permission: DROP DATABASE <database_name> -- the database name must exist 4. Verify the select syslogins permission: SELECT COUNT(*) FROM master..syslogins WHERE name=<dbOwnerName> Note: The dbOwnerName must be set to td. To test the ALM database administrative login permissions after connecting via this login (Windows Authentication): 1. Verify the change database context permission: USE <dbName> HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 118 of 154
  • 119. 2. Verify the create database permission: CREATE DATABASE <dbName> -- the database name must not already exist 3. Verify the select on syslogins permission: SELECT COUNT(*) FROM master..syslogins WHERE name='<dbOwnerName>' 4. Verify the select on sysusers permission: SELECT COUNT(*) FROM master..sysusers WHERE name='<dbOwnerName>' Site Administration Database Schema Considerations: SQL Be aware of the following schema name and password considerations: l The default Site Administration database schema name is qcsiteadmin_db. If you want to rename the schema, you can change the name when configuring the ALM installation. l You can create your own ALM user password for accessing the Site Administration database schema. l If there is an existing Site Administration database schema, you can create a copy of the existing schema and upgrade the copy. This enables you to work with ALM 12.00 and previous versions of ALM/Quality Center simultaneously. Note: This scenario does not apply to working with Performance Center projects. After you upgrade LAB_PROJECT, you must then upgrade Performance Center projects before they can be used. Prerequisites: Miscellaneous License File Verify that you have the ALM license file. To activate your license, visit the HP Software Licensing Portal (http://www.hp.com/software/licensing) and enter your Entitlement Order Number. The license file has a .dat file extension by default. Make a note of where you save the file, as during the ALM configuration process you need to specify a path to it. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 119 of 154
  • 120. If you do not have a license, visit the HP Software Licensing Portal and click the Contact Licensing Support link. Security Passphrases Verify that you have passphrases for confidential data and communication security encryption. For secondary cluster nodes, verify that you have the confidential data encryption passphrase that you used to install the primary cluster. When upgrading from an ALM 11.00 or later version of the Site Administration database schema, you must use the same confidential data passphrase as was used for the previous installation. Performance Center: You must use the same communication security passphrase for the ALM and Performance Center server configurations. Mail Server Information A mail server enables ALM users to send emails to other users in a project. You select which server to use as part of the installation configuration process. Before installing ALM, decide which mail server to use. Ask your system administrator for assistance. If you are using an SMTP Server, check that you have the SMTP Server name and port. The installer checks that the specified mail server name and port are valid and that the mail server is running. Conflicting Applications To work with ALM, you may need to disable conflicting applications that are running on the ALM machine. For a list of these applications, see HP Software Self-solve knowledge base article KM176429 (http://h20230.www2.hp.com/selfsolve/document/KM176429). (Requires HP Passport sign-in credentials.) Prerequisites: Client-side System Configurations Required Software The following must be installed on client machines: l Microsoft .NET Framework 4.5 HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 120 of 154
  • 121. Additional Considerations The following considerations must also be taken into account: l If you are integrating ALM with other HP testing tools, you must modify the DCOM permissions on your client machine. For more information, see HP Software Self-solve knowledge base article KM187086 (http://h20230.www2.hp.com/selfsolve/document/KM187086). (Requires HP Passport sign-in credentials.) ALM Edition: Modifying DCOM permissions is not required for running Functional test sets (server-side test execution). l You can work with the ALM client using a remote desktop. l For customers using remote or mass distribution mechanisms, ALM client components can be deployed locally on client machines by running a self-extracting msi file. You build the msi file by running the HP ALM Client MSI Generator, available from the HP Application Lifecycle Management Add-ins page (Help > Add-ins). Permissions Required to Download ALM Client Components To enable ALM to work with HP testing tools as well as various other integrations and third-party tools, you need to log in to the client machine with administrator privileges. These privileges are required to install the HP ALM Client Registration add-in, which you use to register ALM client components and Site Administration client components on your client machine. File System Permissions You must have the following file system permissions: l Full read and write permissions on the HPALM-Client deployment folder. This is located at %ALLUSERSPROFILE%. l Full read and write permissions to the Temp (%TEMP% or %TMP%) directory. The installer program writes installation and log files to this directory. This is generally located at C:Users<username>AppDataLocalTemp. Internet Explorer Configuration Before you download Application Lifecycle Management on a client machine, you must perform the following configurations to the Internet Explorer browser on the client machine. l Configure the Custom Level security settings. The Custom Level security setting should be configured for the specific zone of the ALM server. l Set Internet Explorer as the default Web browser. This ensures that external links to ALM entities can open in ALM. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 121 of 154
  • 122. To configure security settings on the client machine: 1. In Internet Explorer, select Tools > Internet Options. The Internet Options dialog box opens. 2. Click the Security tab. The Web content zone of the ALM server (Internet or Local intranet) is automatically selected. Click Custom Level. 3. In the Security Settings dialog box, configure the following settings: Under .NET Framework-reliant components: n Set Run components not signed with Authenticode to Enable. n Set Run components signed with Authenticode to Enable. Under ActiveX controls and plug-ins: n Set Run ActiveX controls and plug-ins to Enable. n Set Download signed ActiveX controls to Enable or Prompt. Note: You do not need to enable Download signed ActiveX controls if you install the ALM client using the HP ALM Client MSI Generator Add-in. This allows you to install all ALM modules on a client machine without downloading them through a browser. 4. On Windows 7: n It is suggested that you add the ALM server site to the Trusted Sites security zone. This is not mandatory. n Disable the Protected Mode for the Trusted Sites security zone. 5. Click OK. To set Internet Explorer as the default web browser: 1. In Internet Explorer, select Tools > Internet Options. The Internet Options dialog box opens. 2. Click the Programs tab. 3. Under Default web browser, make sure that Internet Explorer is set as the default browser. If not, click the Make default button. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 122 of 154
  • 123. Enabling User Account Control (UAC) If you enable UAC on a Microsoft Windows 7, 2008R2, or 2012 operating system, be aware of the following considerations: l To register ALM client components, you must run Internet Explorer as the administrator. l To register ALM client components on a shared location of a client machine, you must run Internet Explorer as the administrator. l Administrator permissions are required to run the ClientMSIGenerator.exe file. In addition, you must run the .exe file as the administrator. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 123 of 154
  • 124. Troubleshooting the ALM Installation Disabling Validation Checks for the Installation Wizard The ALM Installation Wizard automatically performs validation checks to verify that particular system configurations requirements are met. If the ALM configuration does not complete due to a failed validation, you can fix the problem or disable selected validation checks, and rerun the installation. Note: l You should disable validation checks only if you decide to take responsibility for the ALM server installation. l To resolve failures that occur during the ALM Installation Wizard, see "Checking the Installation and Configuration Log Files" on page 128, or "ALM Installation Already Exists" on page 129. l For troubleshooting tips on database validations, see "Database Validator Fails" on page 129. To disable configuration validators and rerun the ALM Installation Wizard in Linux: Note: These instructions also apply when running the Windows silent installation. 1. In the ALM installation directory, locate the validations.xml file, which is near the installation executable ( ALM_installer.bin). 2. Edit the validations.xml file by changing the validation value from true to false as required. Following is an example of the file with all configuration validators active. <validations> <os enabled="true" /> <memory enabled="true" threshold="8" /> <installation_disk_space enabled="true" threshold="8" /> <sa-schema enabled="true" /> <db enabled="true" /> <mail enabled="true" /> <license-key enabled="true" /> <repository enabled="true" /> HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 124 of 154
  • 125. <sa-user enabled="true" /> <security enabled="true" /> <alm-services enabled="true" /> <web-server enabled="true" /> </validations> 3. Save the file and rerun the installation. Configuration Validators Validator Checks To Disable os Checks that the operating system is supported. For the list of supported system environments, refer to the Readme. Note: The supported environment information in the Readme is accurate for the ALM12.00 release, but there may be subsequent updates. For the most up-to-date supported environments, refer to the HP Software Web site using the following URL: http://www.hp.com/go/TDQC_SysReq. <os enabled="false" /> memory Checks that the customer machine has at least x GB of memory (x is defined by the threshold value, the default is 8 GB). <memory enabled="false" /> installation_ disk_space Checks that the installation location has at least x GB of free disk space (x is defined by the threshold value, the default is 8 GB). Note: This validation is related only to the installation location. If the installation fails because of a lack of free space in the temporary folder, changing the threshold value or disabling this validation does not affect the failure. <installation_ disk_space enabled="false" /> sa-schema Checks Site Administration database settings. <sa-schema enabled="false" /> db Checks database connectivity. <db enabled="false" /> HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 125 of 154
  • 126. Validator Checks To Disable mail Checks that the mail server is valid. <mail enabled="false" /> license-key Checks the license file key. <license-key enabled="false" /> repository Checks that the repository folder is accessible, and has sufficient space. <repository enabled="false" /> sa-user Checks site administrator user settings. <sa-user enabled="false" /> security Checks encryption passphrases. <security enabled="false" /> alm- services Checks Windows service settings. <alm-services enabled="false" /> web-server Checks that the HTTP port and web server deployment folder is accessible, and has sufficient space <web-server enabled="false" /> To disable configuration validators and rerun the ALM Installation Wizard in Windows: Note: These instructions do not apply when running the Windows silent installation. For Windows silent installation, follow the Linux instructions above. 1. In the ALM installation directory, locate the validations.xml file, which is near the installation executable ( ALM_installer.exe). 2. Edit the validations.xml file by changing the validation value from true to false as required. Following is an example of the file with all configuration validators active. <validations> <os enabled="true" /> <memory enabled="true" threshold="8" /> <installation_disk_space enabled="true" threshold="8" /> <sa-schema enabled="true" /> <db enabled="true" /> HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 126 of 154
  • 127. <mail enabled="true" /> <license-key enabled="true" /> <repository enabled="true" /> <sa-user enabled="true" /> <security enabled="true" /> <alm-services enabled="true" /> <web-server enabled="true" /> </validations> 3. Only the following configuration validators are used in the Windows installation wizard: Validator Checks To Disable os Checks that the operating system is supported. For the list of supported system environments, refer to the Readme. Note: The supported environment information in the Readme is accurate for the ALM12.00 release, but there may be subsequent updates. For the most up- to-date supported environments, refer to the HP Software Web site using the following URL: http://www.hp.com/go/TDQC_SysReq. <os enabled="false" /> memory Checks that the customer machine has at least x GB of memory (x is defined by the threshold value, the default is 8 GB). <memory enabled="false" /> installation_ disk_space Checks that the installation location has at least x GB of free disk space (x is defined by the threshold value, the default is 8 GB). Note: This validation is related only to the installation location. If the installation fails because of a lack of free space in the temporary folder, changing the threshold value or disabling this validation does not affect the failure. <installation_ disk_space enabled="false" /> db Checks database connectivity. <db enabled="false" /> HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 127 of 154
  • 128. 4. Save the file and rerun the installation. 5. On the Installation Summary page, before clicking Done, edit the run_configuration.bat file, located under the <installation folder>, to disable validations. Validator Checks To Disable Existing installation Checks if an older version of ALM or Quality Center is installed. - wPreviousInstallationValidator License file Checks license file key. -wLicenseTypeValidator Security passphrases Checks encryption passphrases. -wEncryptionStepValidator Mail server Checks that the mail server name is valid. wMailServerValidator Database settings Checks Site Administration database settings. -wSaSchemaValidator Site administrator Checks site administrator user settings. -wSiteAdminUserValidator repository folder Checks that the repository folder is accessible, and has sufficient space. -wRepositoryValidator 6. Save the run_configuration.bat file and click Done to continue the installation. Checking the Installation and Configuration Log Files If you encounter problems installing ALM, check for errors in the following log files: Windows File Delivery Logs Log Path Install Completed <installation folder>log Install Failed on the desktop: HP_Application_Lifecycle_Management_Install_<mm_dd_yyyy_hh_mm_ ss>.log HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 128 of 154
  • 129. Linux File Delivery Logs Log Path Install Completed <installation folder>/log Install Failed in the user's home folder: HP_Application_Lifecycle_Management_Install_<mm_dd_yyyy_hh_mm_ ss>.log Application Logs Log Path Configuration logs l Windows. <ALM deployment folder>log l Linux. <ALM deployment folder>/log Site Administration database schema creation logs l Windows. <ALM deployment folder>logsa l Linux. <ALM deployment folder>/log/sa ALM Installation Already Exists If an error message displays during the installation indicating that an ALM installation already exists, uninstall the existing ALM installation and remove all traces of it from the server machine. Database Validator Fails During the ALM Server configuration, the database validator performs the following checks: l Check that the input parameters are correct. l Check that the Site Administration database schema name was provided. l Check whether the same authentication type was used as the one used in the previous installation. Perform the following steps: 1. Check whether the parameters are correct: n Read the error message that displays during installation and try to understand and resolve the problem from the root cause. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 129 of 154
  • 130. n For further clarifications, check with your database administrator. n If no error was found and you are sure that the parameters are correct, disable the DB parameters validator. For details, see "Disabling Validation Checks for the Installation Wizard" on page 124. 2. Check that the Site Administration Database Schema name was provided: a. Open a database query tool. b. Make sure the PROJECTS table exists in the Site Administration Database Schema. This table does not exist in the project schema. 3. To check the authentication type of a previous installation: a. Navigate to C:Program FilesHPALM_Server on Windows, and /opt/HP/HP_ALM_ Server on Linux and open the application folder. b. Extract the contents of qcbin.war into a temp file, and open the siteadmin.xml file in a text editor. c. Search for the native property. If its value is set to Y, Windows authentication was used. Make sure that the new installation uses the same authentication type (Microsoft SQL Server authentication or Windows authentication) as the previous installation. Monitoring ALM Server Fails When running one of the Java-based tools to monitor ALM you receive the following message: "Not enough storage is available to process this command." This problem is caused because the JVM running ALM Server is running with a service account. Choose one of the following solutions, depending on which tool you are running: l jmap and jstack. See the suggestion in the following link: http://stackoverflow.com/questions/906620/jstack-and-not-enough-storage-is-available-to- process-this-command You will be required to download the pstools tool from the following address: http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/sysinternals/bb897553 l jconsole and jvisualvm. Download the following tool from the following address: http://www.iopus.com/guides/srvany.htm Also refer to the following Microsoft article: http://support.microsoft.com/kb/137890 HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 130 of 154
  • 131. Upgrade Preparation Troubleshooting General Validation Supported Database Version The verification process checks that the project schema is stored in a supported database server. If the verification process detects that the database server version is not supported, it displays a warning. For details about the database servers versions supported by ALM, refer to the Readme. Note: The supported environment information in the Readme is accurate for the ALM12.00 release, but there may be subsequent updates. For the most up-to-date supported environments, refer to the HP Software Web site using the following URL: http://www.hp.com/go/TDQC_SysReq. Valid Database User Schema Name The upgrade mechanism does not support databases that include special characters in the database name. If the verification process finds special characters, you must remove them. For SQL databases, periods are also not supported in the database user schema name. To remove special characters from database names: 1. Deactivate the project. 2. Ask your database administrator to rename the database user schema to a name that does not include special characters, or periods for SQL databases. 3. Remove the project from Site Administration. 4. Update the Dbid.xml file to point to the new database user schema name. 5. Restore the project by using the updated Dbid.xml file. 6. Run the verification process again to make sure the problem is resolved. Mixed Table Ownership ALM can connect to Microsoft SQL server by using SQL authentication or Windows authentication. For each of these methods, a different user owns the tables of a project: l SQL Authentication. Table owner is the user td. l Windows Authentication. Table owner is the user dbo (a user mapped to the operating system user that runs the ALM server). HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 131 of 154
  • 132. If you create a project with one type of authentication (for example, SQL), and then restore it with the other type of authentication (for example, Windows), these tables cannot be accessed. In this case, new tables are created with owners that are different from those of the old tables. You will not be able to work with the project. It is likely that the upgrade will fail. To prevent this problem, the duplicate ownership validator checks that the owner of all of the tables in the project database user schema matches the connection method that ALM is using to connect to the server. To fix table ownership manually, do one of the following: l SQL Authentication: Run the following query to make td the table owner: EXEC sp_changeobjectowner '<table name>', 'td' l Windows Authentication: Run the following query to make dbo the table owner: EXEC sp_changeobjectowner 'td.<table name>', 'dbo' Repository over Database Feature The Repository over Database feature is not supported in Quality Center 10.00 or in ALM versions 11.00 and later. If you use this feature in Quality Center 9.2, you should migrate the repository from the database to the file system (available from Quality Center 9.2 Patch 12) before upgrading the project to Quality Center 10.00, and then upgrade the project to ALM 11.00. For more information about the tool for migrating the project repository from the database to the file system, see the ReadMe files for Quality Center 9.2 Patch 12. The verification process checks whether the project is using the Repository over Database feature. If the project is using the feature, the validator displays a warning. Version Control Validation l Legacy version control projects. Integration with external version control tools is not supported in ALM12.00. Quality Center version 10.00 and ALM include a built-in version control functionality to support your projects. To work with projects from Quality Center 9.2 that use version control, you must first upgrade to ALM 11.00, migrate legacy version control data, and then upgrade to ALM12.00. l Version control enabled projects. Version control enabled projects cannot be upgraded to ALM12.00 while there are checked out entities. The verification process checks that there are no checked out entities. If there are checked out entities, they must be checked in. To determine if there are checked out entities, see HP Software Self-solve knowledge base article KM00470884 (http://h20230.www2.hp.com/selfsolve/document/KM00470884). (Requires HP Passport sign- in credentials.) HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 132 of 154
  • 133. Database Permissions To enable an upgrade to the current ALM version, the project schema requires a set of minimum required permissions. The verification process makes sure that both the project user and the administrator user have all the privileges needed to perform the upgrade. Text Search Configuration Quality Center versions 9.0 and later support the database text search feature. However, not all databases are configured to support this feature. If your database does support text search, ALM installs the required components when creating a new project database. ALM also activates the text search for the new database. The verification process checks whether your project has the text search feature enabled, and that it is configured correctly. The verification process validates the following: Validity of the Text Search Configuration The verification process checks that text search components are installed and are valid on the database server. If a database server is text search-enabled in the DB Servers tab in Site Administration, text search must also be enabled on the Oracle or SQL database server. If the verification process detects that text search is not enabled or configured incorrectly on the Oracle or SQL database server, the upgrade process does not run until you manually repair the problem. We recommend that you ask your database administrator to reconfigure text search on the Oracle or SQL database server. Alternatively, as a workaround, you can disable text search for the database server from Site Administration. To disable the text search for the database server: 1. Run the following query on your Site Administration schema: update <SA Schema>.dbservers set db_text_search_enabled = null where dbserve r_name = '<DB logical name>' 2. Restart the ALM server. 3. Run the repair process for your projects. 4. When the repair process completes, run the following query: update <SA Schema>.dbservers set db_text_search_enabled = 'Y' where dbserver_ name = '<DB logical name>' 5. Restart the ALM server. Only Valid Fields Configured Under "Text Search" The verification process checks that only valid fields are defined as searchable. You can enable the text search only for specific entities, and only on fields of the type string or memo. The following entities are supported: BUG, COMPONENT, COMPONENT_STEP, DESSTEPS, REQ, TEST, BPTEST_TO_COMPONENT, and CYCLE. Any other configuration could cause functionality HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 133 of 154
  • 134. problems during upgrade or customization. This problem is fixed automatically by the repair process. Text Search Validation for Oracle Database Server For an Oracle Database server, the verification process checks the following: l Validity of Text Search Indexes. The verification process checks that database text search indexes are valid. Invalid text search indexes can cause functionality problems and even upgrade failure in ALM. If the verification process detects an invalid index, try to recreate the index by dropping it from the schema and creating it again. In Site Administration, click the Site Projects tab. Select the relevant project and click the Enable/Rebuild Text Search button. If this procedure returns an error, consult your database administrator or contact HP Support. l Validity of Project Database User Permissions. The verification process checks that the project database user has the required permissions to work with text search. When text search is installed on the database, the role CTXAPP is created automatically. ALM requires that this role be granted to all projects database users that support text search. (ALM grants the CTXAPP role automatically when creating the project or enabling the text search for a project.) If this role is not granted to the project database user (configured to support text search), the verification process returns a warning. In these cases, ask your database administrator to grant the required role to the project database user. Text Search Validation for Microsoft SQL Database Server The verification process checks that the project database user schema enables the text search feature. To work with text search on SQL project, you need to enable the text search on the database. To enable text search on the database: 1. Select the database from the SQL server Enterprise Manager. 2. Right-click the database name. 3. Select Properties/Files. 4. Select Use Full-Text Indexing. Schema Validation The verification process helps to ensure that the project database user schema is correct and configured as expected. The verification process performs two types of schema verifications: l Schema Correctness. Checks that the project database schema includes all of the required schema objects, as defined in the expected database user schema for the project. This verification ensures that all of the required entities exist and are defined as expected. It also ensures that there are no extra entities defined on top of the schema. l Alignment to the current version. Notifies you about differences in the project database user HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 134 of 154
  • 135. schema caused by internal changes made in Quality Center or ALM. In this way, the verification process aligns the schema with the latest internal changes to the schema made in preparation for the upgrade. The verification process displays warnings in the verification report if it finds the following: l Extra entities defined. For example, Table, Column, Trigger, View, and Sequence. l Differences from the expected definitions. For example, Column Size and Index Attributes. l Missing objects. Schema differences found by the verification process can cause upgrade failures or usage problems. As long as the verification process still finds these differences, an upgrade to the current ALM version will not start. Note: Many of the schema changes can be fixed automatically by the repair process. The following sections contain possible warnings, grouped by the different database objects, that the verification process can display in the verification report: Tables 135 Columns 136 Indexes and Constraints 138 Triggers 141 Sequences 141 Internal Quality Center Changes 142 Tables Database tables can contain the following warnings: Extra Table The ALM schema should contain only the tables that are defined in the schema configuration file. Adding extra tables on top of the schema is not supported and might cause future problems with ALM. Problem: If the verification process finds extra tables that were added manually to the schema, it generates an Extra Table warning. Note: This problem requires manual repair. The repair process cannot fix it. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 135 of 154
  • 136. Solution: Do one of the following: l Change the Schema. If you use the table, copy it to a different schema. If you do not use the table, delete it. Before taking either action, back up the schema and consult your database administrator. For details, see "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149. l Use the Exception File. Note: If the project database is case sensitive, the table name must be the same in both the database and the exception file. Note: Not recommended: Instruct the upgrade to ignore this problem. Missing Table The verification process checks that all of the tables defined for the project schema actually exist (according to the tables of each Quality Center/ALM version). Problem: If a table is missing, the verification process generates a Missing Table warning. Solution: Do one of the following: l See "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149. l Run the repair process to create the missing table. Although you can use the repair process to add these objects, we recommend that you contact HP Support to make sure that the missing objects are not just symptoms of a bigger problem. Columns Database columns can contain the following warnings: Extra Column The verification process checks that each table includes the required columns, as defined for the expected database user schema and version. The schema should not include extra columns. Extra columns in a table might cause upgrade failure or functionality problems. Problem: If the verification process detects an extra column (that does not exist in the database user schema definitions) in one of the tables, it generates an Extra Column warning. Note: This problem requires manual repair. The repair process cannot fix it. Solution: Do one of the following: l Change the Schema. If you have an internal implementation that requires extra table columns, move the extra columns to a different table in a different schema. If you do not use a particular column, delete it. Before taking either action, back up your schema and consult your database administrator. For a more detailed explanation, see "Changing the Database User Schema" on HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 136 of 154
  • 137. page 149. l Use the Exception File. Note: Not recommended: Instruct the upgrade to ignore this problem. Column Size Mismatch The verification process checks that all the table columns are defined as expected. This validation ensures that the column size matches the expected size as defined for each table column. This verification excludes user-defined fields, whose size can be customized through project customization. Some column mismatch warnings are caused by internal changes made in Quality Center 10.00 that are fixed by the repair process automatically. For details, see "Internal Quality Center Changes" on page 142. Problem A: Size is bigger than expected. If the column size is bigger than expected, decrease the column size to the required size manually. Because this operation can cause data loss, it is not performed automatically by repair process. Note: This problem requires manual repair. The repair process cannot fix it. Solution A: Consult your database administrator to resolve this issue. For risks involved in changing the database user schema, see "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149. Problem B: Size is smaller than expected. If the column size is smaller than expected, the repair process fixes the problem automatically by increasing the column size to the expected size. Solution B: Run the repair process to increase the current size to the required size. Column Precision Mismatch In an Oracle Database, "precision" is the term used to define the size of fields with the INTEGER type. Problem: The verification process generates a warning if the precision defined for a certain column is smaller than expected. Solution: Run the repair process to increase the current precision to the required precision. Column Type Mismatch Changing a column type causes the upgrade to fail, and can cause major functionality problems. Problem: The verification process generates a Column Type warning if the column type has changed. Note: This problem requires manual repair. The repair process cannot fix it. Solution: Consult your database administrator to resolve this issue. For risks involved in changing the database user schema, see "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 137 of 154
  • 138. Column Nullability Mismatch One of the attributes that is defined for a column is whether it can accept null values. A null is the absence of a value in a column of a row. Nulls indicate missing, unknown, or inapplicable data. If you have defined a NOT NULL or PRIMARY KEY integrity constraint for a particular column, you cannot insert rows into the column without adding a value. Problem: The verification process compares the required definitions for each column in the expected database user schema to the project database user schema. If it encounters differences in the column NULL attribute definition, it generates a Column Nullable warning. Solution: Run the repair process. The repair process runs a query to modify the column attributes to the expected attributes. If the column includes NULL values, the repair process cannot update the column attribute to NOT NULL (if this is the required attribute) for the column. Ask your database administrator how to remove the NULL values from the column. After removing the NULL values, run the repair process again. For details, see "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149. Identity Column The IDENTITY property is one of the attributes defined for columns in Microsoft SQL server. Problem: As part of the verification for the columns attributes, the verification process might find a column IDENTITY property that is not configured as expected. Note: This problem requires manual repair. The repair process cannot fix it. Solution: Change the IDENTITY property of the column to the expected configuration (according to the output from the verification process report) manually. Consult your database administrator to resolve this issue. For details, see "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149. Missing Column If a column is missing from a table, run the repair process or contact HP Support. Problem: If the verification process finds that a column is missing from one of the tables, it generates a Missing Column warning. Solution: Do one of the following: l Run the repair process to fix the problem. l See "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149. Indexes and Constraints A database index is a data structure that improves the speed of operations in a table. You can create indexes using one or more columns, providing the basis for both rapid random lookups and efficient ordering of access to records. Database Constraints are constraints on the database that require relations to satisfy certain properties. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 138 of 154
  • 139. Database indexes and constraints can cause the following validation warnings: Extra Index The ALM schema should include only those indexes defined in the required schema configurations. Problem: If the verification process finds an index that is not defined in the required schema configuration, it generates an Extra Index warning. Note: This problem requires manual repair. The repair process cannot fix it. Solution: Remove the extra indexes manually. Consult with your database administrator to resolve this issue. For details, see "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149. Some Extra Index warnings are caused by internal changes made in Quality Center 10.00. These extra indexes are no longer used by ALM, and are removed by the repair process. For details, see "Internal Quality Center Changes" on page 142. Extra Constraint The ALM schema should include only those constraints defined in the required schema configurations. Problem: If the verification process finds a constraint that is not defined in the required schema configuration, it generates an Extra Constraint warning. Note: This problem requires manual repair. The repair process cannot fix it. Solution: Remove the extra constraint manually. Consult with your database administrator to resolve this issue. For details, see "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149. Index Uniqueness Mismatch A unique index guarantees that the index key contains no duplicate values. As a result, every row in the table is unique. Specifying unique indexes on ALM data tables ensures data integrity of the defined columns. In addition, it provides helpful information that is used as a query optimizer. Problem: If the index uniqueness attribute does not have the expected value, the verification process generates an Index Uniqueness Mismatch warning. You cannot create a unique index, unique constraint, or PRIMARY KEY constraint if duplicate key values exist in the data. The verification process performs these data validations. If a table has duplicate values or IDs, based on the index definitions on that table, the verification process also displays the duplication in the verification report. In this case, the repair process automatically fixes the duplication problem before creating the unique index. Solution: Run the repair process to fix the problem. Index Clustered In Microsoft SQL, index type can be classified as clustered or non-clustered. The verification process compares the required definitions for each index in the expected database user schema to the project database user schema. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 139 of 154
  • 140. Problem: If the verification process finds differences in the index clustered attribute definition, it generates an Index Clustered warning. Solution: Run the repair process to fix the problem. Missing Constraint Constraints are rules that the database enforces to improve data integrity. Problem: If the verification process finds a constraint that should be defined as missing, it generates a Missing Constraint warning. Solution: Run the repair process to fix the problem. Missing Index The verification process checks that all the required indexes (as defined in the expected database user schema) exist in the projects database user schema. Problem: If the verification process does not find all the required indexes in the projects database user schema, it generates a Missing Index warning. Solution: Run the repair process to fix the problem. Index Changed The verification process checks that the indexes are defined according to the expected database user schema. Problem: If the verification process finds an index that is not defined according to the expected database user schema, it generates an Index Changed warning. This warning can indicate the following problems: l Function in a function-based index is different than expected. l Index is not defined on the expected columns. Solution: Run the repair process to fix the problem. The repair process removes the index, and then recreates it, based on the required definitions for this index. Index Order Changed The verification process checks that the order of the columns in the index definition has not changed. Problem: If the order of the columns in the index definition has changed, the verification process generates an Index Order Changed warning. Solution: Run the repair process to fix the problem. The repair process removes the index, and then recreates it, based on the required definitions for this index. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 140 of 154
  • 141. Triggers A database trigger is procedural code that is automatically executed in response to certain events on a particular table in a database. Database triggers can contain the following warning: Extra Trigger Extra triggers can cause upgrade failures and functionality problems. Problem: If the verification process finds an extra trigger, it generates an Extra Trigger warning. Note: This problem requires manual repair. The repair process cannot fix it. Solution: Before upgrading, back up your database schema and remove the extra triggers manually. Because extra triggers can cause upgrade failures, the upgrade process cannot ignore this warning by using the Exception file. For details, see "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149. Sequences A sequence is an Oracle object that acts as a generator that provides a sequential series of numbers. Database sequences can contain the following warnings: Extra Sequence ALM schemas should contain only the sequences that are defined in the schema configuration file. Problem: If the verification process finds an extra sequence, it generates an Extra Sequence warning. Note: This problem requires manual repair. The repair process cannot fix it. Solution: Do one of the following: l Change the Schema. Move the sequence to a new database user schema. Before doing so, consult with your database administrator. For details, see "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149. l Use the Exception File. Note: Not recommended: Instruct the upgrade to ignore this problem. Missing Sequence Problem: If the verification process finds that one of the sequences that should be defined on the ALM schema is missing, it generates a Missing Sequence warning. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 141 of 154
  • 142. Solution: Do the following: l Run the repair process to fix the problem. l See "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149. Incorrect Sequences Problem: Sometimes the Oracle object sequence numbers become incorrect, for example, if an export of the database is done on a live activated project, in which users are still modifying tables. If the verification process finds that Oracle sequences objects are not fully synchronized with ALM schema table IDs, the verification process generates an Incorrect Oracle sequences found warning. Solution: Run the repair process to fix the problem. Internal Quality Center Changes For upgrade from Quality Center 9.2: As a result of internal changes in Quality Center 10.00, a set of updates needs to be applied to the schema as part of the preparation for the upgrade to ALM. To apply the updates to the schema, perform the following processes:  Verification Process If the verification process finds any internal differences, it generates warnings in the verification report. The repair process fixes them automatically. The verification process checks for the following internal changes: Type Problem Element Comment Column Size mismatch COMMON_ SETTINGS.CSET_NAME Expected column size is 240. Actual size is 70. Column Size mismatch REQ.RQ_REQ_PRIORITY Expected column size is 255. Actual size is 70. Column Size mismatch REQ.RQ_REQ_TYPE Expected column size is 255. Actual size is 70. Column Size mismatch REQ.RQ_REQ_AUTHOR Expected column size is 255. Actual size is 70. Column Size mismatch REQ.RQ_REQ_PRODUCT Expected column size is 255. Actual size is 70. Column Size mismatch REQ.RQ_REQ_REVIEWED Expected column size is 255. Actual size is 70. Column Size mismatch REQ.RQ_REQ_STATUS Expected column size is 255. Actual size is 70. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 142 of 154
  • 143. Type Problem Element Comment Index Missing ALL_LISTS.AL_ABS_ PATH_COV_IDX Index Missing BUG.BG_COMPOUND_IDX Index Missing CYCLE.CY_FOLDER_IDX Index Missing REQ.RQ_REQ_STATUS_ IDX Index Missing RUN.RN_CYCLE_IDX Index Missing STEP.ST_RUN_IDX Index Missing TEST.TS_SUBJECT_IDX Index Extra BUG.BG_DETECTED_BY_ LWR_IDX Index Extra BUG.BG_STATUS_LWR_ IDX Index Extra BUG.BG_PRIORITY_ LWR_IDX Index Extra BUG.BG_RESPONSIBLE_ LWR_IDX Index Index changed REQ_COVER.RC_ ENTITY_ID_IDX Index Index changed RUN.RN_TEST_ID_IDX Index Index changed RUN.RN_TESTCYCLE_ IDX Function- based indexes - relevant only for SQL server. Extra index COMMON_SETTINGS.CS_ COVER_LWR_IDX Function- based indexes - relevant only for SQL server. Extra index HOSTS.HOSTS_LWR_IDX Function- based indexes - relevant only for SQL server. Extra index HOSTS_IN_GROUP. HG_ COVER_LWR_IDX HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 143 of 154
  • 144. Type Problem Element Comment Function- based indexes - relevant only for SQL server. Extra index HOST_GROUP. GH_LWR_ IDX Function- based indexes - relevant only for SQL server. Extra index USERS.US_USERS_LWR_ IDX Repair Process The repair process fixes these internal differences in the following way: l Column Size. Increases the size of columns to the required size. l Index Definition. Removes extra indexes. It also recreates missing indexes and indexes that were defined differently. l Extra Function-based Indexes. Microsoft SQL Server only. Removes obsolete function-based indexes. Before beginning the upgrade, run the repair process on each project. Data Validation Duplicate Values Some fields (or a combination of fields) must be unique in given tables. This constraint is enforced by the creation of a unique index on these fields. For example, the combination of fields TS_ SUBJECT and TS_NAME, which represent the ID of the test's parent folder and test name, must be unique. It is not possible to create two tests with the same name under the same folder. In rare cases, a corrupted database contains duplicate values in these fields. Problem: The verification process checks that all unique indexes exist (and therefore enforce unique values). If the verification process finds duplicate values, it does not permit the upgrade to run on the project. The verification report specifies the fields in which there are duplications and number of duplicate values found, as shown below. Solution: Automatic Repair. Run the repair process to automatically handle the duplicate values. The repair process renames the duplicate values to resolve the problem. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 144 of 154
  • 145. Duplicate IDs Most tables have a unique primary key, usually a unique single column. If there are duplicate values in this field, the primary key is not created. For example, in a table called test, the column TS_TEST_ID represents the test ID, which is unique. In rare cases, a corrupted database contains duplicate IDs. Problem: The verification process checks that all IDs in a table are unique. If it finds duplicate IDs, it does not permit the upgrade to run on the project. The verification report specifies the fields in which there are duplicate items and values, as shown below. Solution: Automatic Repair. The repair process automatically deletes one of the records with a duplicate ID. Caution: This option assumes that the entire record is duplicated, and that the duplicated record is not accessible from the ALM user interface. Because there can be exceptions, we recommend that you use this option only after verifying manually that this record deletion will not cause data loss. Tree Inconsistencies The verification process checks four different entity trees (hierarchical representation of entities): l Test Plan tree l Business Components tree l Requirement tree l Test Lab tree The verification process checks that the data in the tree tables is correct. Caution: Do not manually fix any problems related to tree data. The repair process fixes them automatically. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 145 of 154
  • 146. Problem: The verification process checks for the following types of problems: l Corrupted Path. This is an internal ALM field that contains a string that represents the order of each node in the tree. l Wrong Number of Children. This is an internal ALM field that contains the number of children for each node in the tree. l Orphan Records in Trees. By definition, orphan records do not have parent records. As a result, you cannot access them through the ALM user interface. Solution: Automatic Repair. Run the repair process to automatically fix any problems related to tree data. Caution: Before beginning the automatic repair, review each orphan record carefully. If the verification process finds an orphan record, it deletes it (and all its descendants) from the tree automatically. Views Database views can contain the following warning: Extra Views ALM schemas should contain only the views that are defined in the schema configuration file. Problem: If the verification process detects extra views that were added manually to the schema, it displays an Extra Views warning. Adding extra views on top of the schema is not supported and could cause problems. Note: This problem requires manual repair. The repair process cannot fix it. Solution: Do one of the following: l Change the Schema. If you use the view, copy it to a different schema. If you do not use the view, delete it. Before taking either action, back up your schema and consult your database administrator. For details, see "Changing the Database User Schema" on page 149. l Use the Exception File. Note: Not recommended: Instruct the upgrade to ignore this problem. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 146 of 154
  • 147. Orphaned Entities The verification process checks for entity data that is missing corresponding parent data. For example, the following entities might be missing corresponding test configurations or test criteria: l Test configuration coverage l Criteria coverage l Run criteria l Runs l Test instances Caution: Do not manually fix any problems related to orphaned entities. The repair process fixes them automatically. Problem: In version-controlled projects, deleting a test configuration or test criteria did not delete corresponding entities after checking in. This caused incorrect coverage calculation. Solution: Automatic Repair. Run the repair process to automatically fix any problems related to orphaned entities created by this problem. Missing Entities The verification process checks for data that is missing. For example, the following entities might be missing: l Test configurations l Test criteria Caution: Do not manually fix any problems related to missing entities. The repair process fixes them automatically. Problem: The upgrade process can detect that certain entities are missing based on information that exists in related tables. Solution: Automatic Repair. Run the repair process to automatically fix any problems related to missing entities created by this problem. Missing Lists and/or List Values The verification process checks that all of the fields of List type are associated with a list. Problem: If a list and/or its values are missing, the verification process generates a warning about missing lists or missing list values. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 147 of 154
  • 148. Solution: Run the repair process to create the missing list and/or its values. Missing lists are re-created with the name: AUTO_GENERATED_LIST_NAME_<unique_ number> After running the repair process, do the following in Customization > Project Lists:  l Rename any lists whose names are prefixed by AUTO_GENERATED_LIST_NAME_. l If necessary, add any list values that are missing. Tip: Although you can use the repair process to add these objects, we recommend that you contact HP Support to make sure that the missing objects are not just symptoms of a bigger problem. Encrypted Values Some fields are saved in the database in an encrypted state. Encryption is done using confidential data passphrases. Note: This is an issue with Performance Center and Lab Management projects. Problem: The verification process checks that all encrypted data can be decrypted with the current confidential data passphrases. If the verification process finds encrypted values that cannot be decrypted, the project is not upgraded. The verification report specifies the fields that cannot be decrypted. Solution: If verifying the LAB_PROJECT fails due to a problem with the Confidential Data Passphrase, do one of the following:  l Make sure that the same Confidential Data Passphrase is defined on the original server on which the LAB_PROJECT was located, as well as on the server to which it is being restored. l Perform the following steps: a. In Site Administration: Before attempting to verify the LAB_PROJECT again, navigate to the Lab Management tab and clear all encrypted field values from the project by running the following queries: HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 148 of 154
  • 149. o For a Microsoft SQL Database update td.LAB_DIAGNOSTICS_SERVERS set DIAG_SVR_PASSWORD = '' update td.LAB_AUT_HOSTS set AUTHOST_PASSWORD = '' ALTER TABLE td.LAB_HOSTS DISABLE TRIGGER ALL update td.LAB_HOSTS set HOST_PASSWORD = '' ALTER TABLE td.LAB_HOSTS ENABLE TRIGGER ALL o For an Oracle Database update <schema name>.LAB_DIAGNOSTICS_SERVERS set DIAG_SVR_ PASSWORD = ' ' update <schema name>.LAB_AUT_HOSTS set AUTHOST_PASSWORD = ' ' update <schema name>.LAB_HOSTS set HOST_PASSWORD = ' ' b. Proceed with the verify, repair, and upgrade of your LAB_PROJECT. c. Login to Lab Management and update the passwords of the AUT Hosts, Diagnostics Server and Standalone Unix Load Generators. For information on working in Lab Management, refer to the HP ALM Lab Management Guide. Changing the Database User Schema This section describes the problems that require manual repair (cannot be fixed automatically by the repair process), and recommends solutions for these problems. If you encounter any of the problems mentioned below, consult with your database administrator or contact HP Support for further guidelines to resolve these problems before upgrading. The stability of the new database upgrade component depends on the database user schema validity. We recommend that you not use the Exception file to change the database user schema. This section includes: Missing Database Objects 150 Missing List Warning 150 Sequences Warning 150 Changed Database Objects 150 Extra Database Objects 151 HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 149 of 154
  • 150. Missing Database Objects Missing database objects can be symptoms of a bigger problem. Problem: Missing database objects (for example, tables and indexes) can yield unexpected and unwanted behavior. Solution: Although you can use the repair process to add these objects, we recommend that you contact HP Support to make sure that the missing objects are not just symptoms of a bigger problem. Missing List Warning User-defined fields of List type must be associated with lists. Problem: If a list is missing for a user-defined field, the verification process generates a Missing List warning. Solution: Contact HP Support for instructions on changing the data type of the user-defined field from List to String in the SYSTEM_FIELD table. Caution: Contact HP Support before attempting to fix the problem manually. Sequences Warning An internal mechanism manages IDs and other system numerators. The table SEQUENCES holds the name of the table or other entity whose numeration is being tracked as well as its highest current value. Problem: If one of the records is missing in this table, or if one of the values is incorrect, the verification process generates a Sequences warning. Solution: The repair process fixes the problem automatically. Caution: We strongly recommend that you not attempt to fix the problem manually. Changed Database Objects Any of the following cases is defined as a Changed Database Object: l Data type of a column was changed l Length of a column was changed l Nullability of a column was changed l Column is defined as identity although it should not be defined as such, or vice versa Problem: A changed column data type can result in incorrect behavior on the server side. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 150 of 154
  • 151. Solution: To avoid this behavior, make sure that you have resolved all data type and length concerns before beginning the upgrade. For every changed database object that is found, do the following: 1. Create a new column with the required attributes as originally defined by the ALM server. 2. Move the data from the old column to the new one. If you cannot move the data (for example, move strings to numeric columns, or move large data to smaller fields), contact HP Support. 3. Remove the old column. 4. Rename the new column to the original column name. Extra Database Objects ALM has various customization options. One option is to add user-defined fields (UDFs). You can add a UDF by using either the project customization user interface or through OTA (Open Test Architecture). Problem: Any other addition to the database user schema (for example, defining extra objects on top of ALM schema) can result in a failure, such as the following: l Name Conflict. If the later version happens to include a name that you added for a proprietary database object (for example, a table, view, or column), the two names will be in conflict. l Copy and Synchronize Failure. If the database user schema contains extra or missing database objects, some ALM mechanisms for copying and synchronizing might fail. l Extra Triggers. If the database contains extra triggers, some update operations might fail. Solution: For each extra database object that is found, perform the corresponding solution: l Move extra columns to newly created tables. To make sure a new table has a one-to-one relationship with the original table, define the primary key of the new column in the new table with the value of the primary key of the original column in the original table. l Move extra tables to a different database user schema. These extra tables include those tables created above. You might need to amend the proprietary application data access of these tables. You can still access these tables from within the ALM database connection by specifying the full name. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 151 of 154
  • 152. Examples: n Oracle <schema name>.<table name> n SQL Server <database name>.td.<table name> To be able to see these tables, you must grant the necessary permissions for the database user schema. l Move extra views to a different database user schema. Like extra tables, these views can be moved to a different database user schema. In addition, you must grant reading permissions to the newly created database user schema on the database user schema objects. l Remove referential integrity between customer database objects and ALM database objects. This removal includes no data loss. l Remove extra triggers before the upgrade, and, only if truly necessary, restore them after the upgrade. No data loss is involved. The upgrade process includes data upgraders that perform some data manipulations (for example, removing duplicate values, fixing tree structures, and so on). Your triggers will not be invoked on these update events. As a result, you need to do the following: a. Ask HP Support for information about the data upgrader activity. b. Review the information about the data upgrader activity. c. Decide on which proprietary updates you need to perform. l Remove extra indexes. You can log all indexes before the upgrade, and (only if necessary) restore them after the upgrade. No data loss is involved. l Oracle Database only: Move extra sequences to a newly created database user schema. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 152 of 154
  • 153. To access the extra sequences from the database user schema, you must grant ALM the required permissions. When moving these sequences, set them to start with the number they reached at the time of the move. HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation HP ALM (12.00) Page 153 of 154
  • 154. Page 154 of 154HP ALM (12.00) HP ALM Docs on Tap Installation